SiMT342301E RXYQ-BYM

SiMT342301E
Service
Manual
RXYQ8-60B
Heat Pump 50/60 Hz

SiMT342301E
Introduction .................................................................................... 1
1. Safety Cautions.......................................................................................2
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers.............................2
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.................................4
2. Icons Used ..............................................................................................6
3. Revision History ......................................................................................7
Part 1 General Information ............................................................ 8

1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9
1.1 Australia, New Zealand ............................................................................9
1.2 Vietnam ..................................................................................................11
1.3 Hong Kong .............................................................................................14
1.4 Pakistan..................................................................................................16
2. External Appearance.............................................................................18
2.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................18
2.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................19
2.3 Air Treatment Equipment .......................................................................21
3. Combination of Outdoor Units...............................................................22
4. Capacity Range.....................................................................................23
4.1 Connection Ratio....................................................................................23
4.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations ....................................................................24
5. Specifications ........................................................................................25
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ............................................................. 39

1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................40
1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................40
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................45
1.3 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit...................................................................48
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................50
2.1 RXYQ8B.................................................................................................50
2.2 RXYQ10/12B..........................................................................................52
2.3 RXYQ14/16B..........................................................................................54
2.4 RXYQ18/20B..........................................................................................56
2.5 RXYQ22/24B..........................................................................................58
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................60
3.1 RXYQ8/10/12B.......................................................................................60
3.2 RXYQ14/16/18/20B................................................................................64
3.3 RXYQ22/24B..........................................................................................68
Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................. 72

1. Applicable Models .................................................................................73
2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................75
2.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................75
2.2 BRC1F61................................................................................................77
2.3 BRC1H62 Series ....................................................................................78
2.4 BRC2E61 ...............................................................................................85
2.5 BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series.....................................................88
2.6 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .........................................................................89
i Table of Contents
SiMT342301E
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................92
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E63, BRC1F61)...................................92
3.2 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1H62 Series) .........................................93
3.3 Wired Remote Controller (BRC2E61) ....................................................94
3.4 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................95
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................96
4.1 Setting for Signal Receiver PCB ............................................................96
4.2 Setting for BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series ...................................97
4.3 Setting for BRC4M, BRC7M Series........................................................98
4.4 Multiple Settings A/b...............................................................................99
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting................................................100
5.1 BRC1E63, BRC1F61............................................................................100
5.2 BRC1H62 Series ..................................................................................101
5.3 BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series...................................................102
5.4 Group No. Setting Example..................................................................102
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu........................................103
6.1 BRC1E63 .............................................................................................103
6.2 BRC2E61 .............................................................................................107
7. Administrator Menu, Installer Menu ....................................................110
7.1 BRC1H62 Series ..................................................................................110
Part 4 Functions and Control ..................................................... 111

1. Operation Flowchart............................................................................113
2. Stop Control ........................................................................................114
2.1 Stop due to Error ..................................................................................114
2.2 When System is in Stop Control...........................................................114
2.3 Sub Unit Stops during Master Unit Control ..........................................114
3. Standby Control ..................................................................................115
3.1 Restart Standby....................................................................................115
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control....................................................................115
4. Startup Control ....................................................................................116
4.1 Startup Control in Cooling ....................................................................116
4.2 Startup Control in Heating ....................................................................116
5. Basic Control.......................................................................................117
5.1 Normal Control .....................................................................................117
5.2 Compressor PI Control.........................................................................118
5.3 Compressor Step Control.....................................................................119
5.4 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control.................................................123
5.5 Step Control of Outdoor Unit Fans .......................................................124
6. Protection Control ...............................................................................125
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control.........................................................125
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control..........................................................126
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .......................................................126
6.4 Inverter Protection Control ...................................................................127
7. Special Control....................................................................................128
7.1 Pump Down Residual Control ..............................................................128
7.2 Oil Return Operation ............................................................................129
7.3 Defrost Operation .................................................................................131
7.4 Outdoor Unit Rotation...........................................................................132
Table of Contents ii
SiMT342301E
8. Other Control.......................................................................................133
8.1 Backup Operation.................................................................................133
8.2 Heating Operation Prohibition ..............................................................133
9. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) ...........................................................134
9.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature..............................134
9.2 Thermostat Control...............................................................................135
9.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ............................................................138
9.4 Airflow Direction Control.......................................................................139
9.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A only) ....................140
9.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A only).......................140
9.7 Drain Pump Control..............................................................................141
9.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control..............................................................143
9.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ................................................144
9.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................145
9.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A only)....146
9.12 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)......................................147
9.13 Heater Control ......................................................................................148
9.14 Streamer Operation..............................................................................148
Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation .................................. 149

1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit...............................................................150
1.1 Field Settings with Remote Controller ..................................................150
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .....................................................159
1.3 Applicable Field Settings ......................................................................161
1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit................................................168
1.5 List of Field Settings for Air Treatment Equipment...............................186
1.6 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................189
2. Field Setting from Outdoor Unit...........................................................191
2.1 DIP Switch Setting when Mounting a Spare PCB ................................191
2.2 Accessing the BS Buttons on the PCB.................................................193
2.3 Operating the BS Buttons and DIP Switches on the PCB....................194
2.4 Connecting the PC Configurator to the Outdoor Unit ...........................197
2.5 Monitoring Function and Field Settings ................................................197
2.6 Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation...................212
2.7 Energy Saving and Optimum Operation...............................................217
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................220
3.1 Precautions Before Starting Test Operation.........................................220
3.2 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................222
3.3 Correcting after Abnormal Completion .................................................223
3.4 Error Code............................................................................................223
Part 6 Service Diagnosis ............................................................ 224

1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................226
1.1 General Troubleshooting......................................................................226
1.2 With Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor ...................................................229
2. Troubleshooting with Remote Controller.............................................230
2.1 BRC1E63, BRC1F61............................................................................230
2.2 BRC1H62 Series ..................................................................................231
2.3 BRC2E61 .............................................................................................231
iii Table of Contents

SiMT342301E
2.5 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .......................................................................234

3. Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB .......................................................235
4. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................236
4.1 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................236
4.2 Error Codes - Sub Codes .....................................................................238
4.3 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................249
4.4 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality ...............................................................250
4.5 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................251
4.6 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................253
4.7 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................255
4.8 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality .............................................................261
4.9 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality ......................................................263
4.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............266
4.11 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................267
4.12 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................268
4.13 Defective Capacity Setting ...................................................................269
4.14 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...270
4.15 Transmission Error ...............................................................................272
4.16 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Auto Grille
Control PCB) ........................................................................................273
4.17 Thermistor Abnormality ........................................................................275
4.18 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...276
4.19 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................277
4.21 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................279
4.22 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................284
4.23 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................285
4.24 Detection of Earth Leakage by Leak Detection Circuit.........................286
4.25 Missing of Earth Leakage Detection Core............................................287
4.26 Activation of High Pressure Switch ......................................................288
4.27 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor ......................................................290
4.28 Compressor Motor Lock .......................................................................291
4.29 Compressor Damage Alarm.................................................................293
4.30 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................295
4.31 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................297
4.32 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................298
4.33 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................300
4.34 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................302
4.36 High Pressure Switch Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit
Main PCB and Inverter PCB) ...............................................................304
4.37 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................305
4.38 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................306
4.39 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................307
4.40 Inverter PCB Abnormality.....................................................................308
4.41 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................309
4.42 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent ..............................................311
4.43 Compressor Overcurrent......................................................................313
4.44 Compressor Startup Abnormality .........................................................315
4.45 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor Unit Main
PCB ......................................................................................................317
4.46 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................319
Table of Contents iv
SiMT342301E
4.47 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................321

4.48 Field Setting Abnormality after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB or
Combination of PCB Abnormality.........................................................323
4.49 Refrigerant Shortage ............................................................................324
4.50 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................325
4.51 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................327
4.52 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units, Open
Phase in Power Supply Wiring .............................................................328
4.53 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........331
4.54 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................332
4.55 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........338
4.56 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units in the
Same System .......................................................................................339
4.57 Improper Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit, Indoor Unit
and Remote Controller .........................................................................340
4.58 Address Duplication of Centralized Control..........................................343
4.59 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and Indoor Unit ...344
4.60 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................347
4.61 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............348
5. Check ..................................................................................................350
5.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................350
5.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................351
5.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................353
5.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................355
5.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................356
5.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................357
5.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................358
5.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................359
5.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................363
5.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................364
5.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................365
5.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Wire) ..........................................367
5.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check ...............................................369
Part 7 Appendix .......................................................................... 372

1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................373
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................373
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................374
1.3 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................403
v Table of Contents
SiMT342301E
Introduction
1. Safety Cautions.......................................................................................2
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers.............................2
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.................................4
2. Icons Used ..............................................................................................6
3. Revision History ......................................................................................7
Introduction 1
Safety Cautions SiMT342301E
1. Safety Cautions
Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.
This manual is for the
person in charge of
maintenance and
inspection.
Caution Items The caution items are classified into Warning and Caution. The Warning items are
especially important since death or serious injury can result if they are not followed closely. The
Caution items can also lead to serious accidents under some conditions if they are not
followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items described below.
Pictograms This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Warning
Do not store equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked
flames, gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

disassembling equipment for repair.
Working on equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause
an electrical shock.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspect the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If refrigerant gas is discharged during repair work, do not touch the
discharged refrigerant gas.
Refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the

compressor at the welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas
completely at a well-ventilated place first.
If there is gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it
may cause injury.
If refrigerant gas leaks during repair work, ventilate the area.
Refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting

repair work.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical
components of the outdoor unit.
A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.
2 Introduction
SiMT342301E Safety Cautions
Warning
Do not turn the air conditioner on or off by plugging in or
unplugging the power cable.
Plugging in or unplugging the power cable to operate the equipment may
cause an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when

working in a high place (more than 2 m).
Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall.
In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes,

flare nuts and tools intended for the exclusive use with the R-32 /
R-410A refrigerant.
The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious
accident, such as a damage of refrigerant cycle or equipment failure.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 /
R-410A / R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
Caution
Do not repair electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the

equipment in a humid or wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable
when cleaning the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and may cause injury.
Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled

down enough before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause
burns.
Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

Using the welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.
Introduction 3
Safety Cautions SiMT342301E
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Warning
Do not store the equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked
flames, gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable
model and appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt
to modify the equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires are scratched or have deteriorated,
be sure to replace them.
Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the

same power outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may
cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and

follow the local technical standards related to the electrical
equipment, the internal wiring regulations, and the instruction
manual for installation when conducting electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause
an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and
outdoor units.
Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that
the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may
cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Damaged or modified power cables may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, or heating or pulling the power
cable may damage it.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 /
R-410A / R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leaking point and
repair it before charging the refrigerant. After charging the
refrigerant, make sure that there is no leak.
If the leaking point cannot be located and the repair work must be
stopped, be sure to pump-down, and close the service valve, to prevent
refrigerant gas from leaking into the room. Refrigerant gas itself is
harmless, but it may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such
as those from fan type and other heaters, stoves and ranges.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation
site has sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the
equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength or the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.
4 Introduction
SiMT342301E Safety Cautions
Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose,
then insert the plug into a power outlet securely.
If the plug is dusty or has a loose connection, it may cause an electrical
shock or fire.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

dispose of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases
depending on the conditions of the installation site, to prevent
electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

combustible gas leaks.
If combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.
Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected

properly, and if connections at the soldered or crimped terminals
are secure.
Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat
generation, fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.
A corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall,
resulting in injury.
Check the earth / grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not

properly earthed / grounded.
Improper earth / grounding may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make

sure that the resistance is 1 M or higher.
Faulty insulation may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage may cause water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.
Introduction 5
Icons Used SiMT342301E
2. Icons Used
The following icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information.
Icon Type of Description
Information
Warning Warning is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Warning
Caution Caution is used when there is danger that the reader,
Caution through incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment,
lose data, get an unexpected result or have to restart (part
of) a procedure.
Note Note provides information that is not indispensable, but
Note may nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips
and tricks.
Reference Reference guides the reader to other places in this binder
Reference or in this manual, where he/she will find additional
information on a specific topic.
6 Introduction
SiMT342301E Revision History
3. Revision History
Month / Year Version Revised contents
03 / 2023 SiMT342301E First edition
Introduction 7
SiMT342301E
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9

1.1 Australia, New Zealand ............................................................................9
1.2 Vietnam ..................................................................................................11
1.3 Hong Kong .............................................................................................14
1.4 Pakistan..................................................................................................16
2. External Appearance.............................................................................18
2.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................18
2.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................19
2.3 Air Treatment Equipment .......................................................................21
3. Combination of Outdoor Units...............................................................22
4. Capacity Range.....................................................................................23
4.1 Connection Ratio....................................................................................23
4.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations ....................................................................24
5. Specifications ........................................................................................25
8 Part 1 General Information

SiMT342301E Model Names
1. Model Names
1.1 Australia, New Zealand
1.1.1 Outdoor Unit
Series Model name Power supply
8B 10B 12B 14B 16B 18B 20B 22B 24B
RXYQ 26B 28B 30B 32B 34B 36B 38B 40B 42B YM
44B 46B 48B 50B 52B 54B 56B 58B 60B
YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz
1.1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

Capacity range kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 8.0 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 16.2 18.0 20.0 22.4 28.0 Power
supply,
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 145 160 180 200 250 Standard
Round flow
cassette with 100 125 140
FXFTQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — — —
sensing A A A
(Streamer)
Ceiling mounted cassette
Round flow
cassette with FXFSQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A 100 125 140 — — — — —
A A A
sensing
VM
Round flow FXFQ 100 125 140
— 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — — —
cassette 1 A A A
Compact multi FXZQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B — — — — — — — — — — —
flow cassette
Double flow FXCQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B 63B — 80B — 125 — — — — — —
cassette B
Single flow
FXEQ 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — — — — — — — — — — V36
cassette
with 20 25 32
(Standard type)
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
drain PD PD PD
Slim duct
pump
FXDQ VE
40 50 63
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
ND ND ND
Ceiling concealed duct
Slim duct FXDQ 20T 25T 32T 40T 50T 63T — — — — — — — — — — V1C
(Compact type) V1CA
FXDQ 20 25 32 40 50 63
— — — — — — — — — — V1
2 SP SP SP SP SP SP
Middle static 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140
FXSQ — — — — — — VE
pressure duct PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA
80 100 125 145
FXDYQ — — — — — — — — — — — — V1
MA MA MA MA
Middle-high
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140
static pressure FXMQ — — — — — — VE
PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA
duct
High static 160 180 200 250
FXMQ — — — — — — — — — — — — V1A
pressure duct P P P P
4-way flow
Ceiling suspended
100
ceiling FXUQ — — — — — — 71A — — — — — — — — VEB9
A
suspended
Ceiling 32 50 63 80 100
— — — — — — — — — — — VE
suspended MA MA MA MA MA
FXHQ
125 140
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — VM
B B
Wall mounted FXAQ 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — — — — — — — — — — VM
Floor standing 20 25 32 40 50 63
FXLQ — — — — — — — — — —
MA MA MA MA MA MA
Floor standing
VE8
Concealed floor FXNQ 20 25 32 40 50 63
— — — — — — — — — —
standing 1 MA MA MA MA MA MA
Concealed floor
FXNQ 20 25 32 40 50 63
standing (duct — — — — — — — — — — VEB
2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
connection type)
V1, V1A, V1C, V1CA, V36: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

VE, VE8, VEB: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
VEB9, VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
1For Australia
2For New Zealand
Part 1 General Information 9

Model Names SiMT342301E
1.1.3 Air Treatment Equipment

Outdoor-air High Series (for Australia)
Processing Unit Series Model name Power supply
FXMQ 125MF 200MF 250MF V1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Standard Series
FXMQ 80AF 140AF 200AF 250AF VM
VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim For New Zealand

Ventilator (VKM Series Model name Power supply
Series) Heat reclaim
ventilator with DX VKM 50GC 80GC 100GC VE
coil
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim
Ventilator (VAM Power
Series Model name
supply
Series)
150H 250H 350H 500H 650H
VAM VE
800H 1000H 1500H 2000H —
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

1.2 Vietnam
1.2.1 Outdoor Unit
8B 10B 12B 14B 16B 18B 20B 22B 24B
44B 46B 48B 50B 52B 54B 56B 58B 60B
YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz


Capacity range kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 8.0 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 22.4 28.0 45.0 56.0
Power
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
Standard
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 200 250 400 500
Round flow
FXFTQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
sensing A A A
(Streamer)
Round flow
cassette FXFRQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A 100 125 140 — — — —
A A A
(Streamer)
VM
Round flow 100 125 140
FXFQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
cassette A A A
Compact multi
flow cassette FXZQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B — — — — — — — — — —
Double flow 125

FXCQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B 63B — 80B — — — — — —
cassette B
Single flow
FXEQ 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — — — — — — — — — V36
cassette
3D airflow duct
FXDSQ 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — — — — — — — — —
with sensing VM
Bedroom duct FXDBQ — — — 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — — — — —
with 20 25 32
(Standard type)
— — — — — — — — — — — —
drain PD PD PD
Slim duct
pump
FXDQ VE
40 50 63
— — — — — — — — — — — —
ND ND ND
Slim duct FXDQ 20 25 32 40 50 63 — — — — — — — — — V1

(Compact type) SP SP SP SP SP SP
Middle static 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
— — — — — — VE9
pressure duct PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA
FXSQ
140
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — VE
PA
Middle-high
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140
static pressure FXMQ — — — — — VE
duct PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA
High static 200 250

FXMQ — — — — — — — — — — — — — VM
pressure duct P P
4-way flow
Ceiling suspended
100
ceiling FXUQ — — — — — — 71A — — — — — — — VEB9
A
suspended
Ceiling 32 63 100
— — — — — — — — — — — — VE
suspended MA MA MA
FXHQ
125 140
— — — — — — — — — — — — — VM
B B
Wall mounted FXAQ 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — — — — — — — — — VM
FXLQ — — — — — — — — —
MA MA MA MA MA MA
VE8
Floor standing
Concealed floor 20 25 32 40 50 63
FXNQ — — — — — — — — —
standing MA MA MA MA MA MA
Floor standing 125 200 250 400 500
— — — — — — — — — — Y1
duct N N N N N
FXVQ
500
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — Y16
N
Clean room air FXBQ — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —
conditioner VE
FXBPQ — — — — — 63P — — — — — — — — —
V1, V36: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

VE, VE8, VE9: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
VEB9, VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Y1, Y16: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz


Outdoor-air High Series
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Standard Series
VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim
coil
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim
Series Model name
supply
Series)
150H 250H 350H 500H 650H
VAM VE
800H 1000H 1500H 2000H —
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

1.3 Hong Kong

1.3.1 Outdoor Unit
8B 10B 12B 14B 16B 18B 20B 22B 24B
44B 46B 48B 50B 52B 54B 56B 58B 60B
YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz

Power
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
Standard
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 200 250 400 500
Round flow
FXFTQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
sensing A A A
(Streamer)
Round flow
100 125 140
cassette with FXFSQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —

A A A
sensing
Round flow
100 125 140 VM
cassette FXFRQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
A A A
(Streamer)
FXFQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
cassette A A A
Compact multi
FXZQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B — — — — — — — — — —
flow cassette
Double flow 125
FXCQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B 63B — 80B — — — — — —
cassette B
Corner cassette FXKQ — 25 32 40 — 63 — — — — — — — — — VE9
MA MA MA MA
Bedroom duct FXDBQ — — — 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — — — — — VM
with 20 25 32
— — — — — — — — — — — —
drain PD PD PD
(Standard type)
pump VE
40 50 63
Slim duct
— — — — — — — — — — — —
ND ND ND
FXDQ
without 20 25 32
— — — — — — — — — — — —
drain PD PD PD
pump VET
40 50 63
— — — — — — — — — — — —
ND ND ND
Middle static 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140
FXSQ — — — — —
VE
Middle-high static 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140
FXMQ — — — — —
High static 200 250
FXMQ — — — — — — — — — — — — — VE9
pressure duct M M
4-way flow ceiling 100
Ceiling suspended
FXUQ — — — — — — 71A — — — — — — — VEB9

suspended A
Ceiling suspended 32 63 100
— — — — — — — — — — — — VE
MA MA MA
FXHQ
— — — — — — — — — 125 140 — — — — VM
B B

Floor standing
FXLQ — — — — — — — — —
MA MA MA MA MA MA
Concealed floor VE8
standing 20 25 32 40 50 63
FXNQ — — — — — — — — —
MA MA MA MA MA MA
VE, VE8, VE9, VET: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

VEB9, VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz


V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Standard Series
VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim
coil
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim
Series Model name
supply
Series)
150H 250H 350H 500H 650H
VAM VE
800H 1000H 1500H 2000H —
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

1.4 Pakistan
1.4.1 Outdoor Unit
8B 10B 12B 14B 16B 18B 20B 22B 24B
44B 46B 48B 50B 52B 54B 56B 58B 60B
YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz

Power
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
Standard
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 200 250 400 500
Round flow
FXFTQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
sensing A A A
(Streamer)
Round flow
100 125 140

cassette with FXFSQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
A A A
sensing
Round flow
100 125 140 VM
cassette FXFRQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
A A A
(Streamer)
FXFQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — —
cassette A A A
Compact multi
FXZQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B — — — — — — — — — —
flow cassette
Double flow 125
FXCQ 20B 25B 32B 40B 50B 63B — 80B — — — — — —
cassette B
Corner cassette FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — — — — — — — — VE9
Bedroom duct FXDBQ — — — 40A 50A 63A — 80A — — — — — — — VM
with 20 25 32
drain — — — — — — — — — — — —
PD PD PD
(Standard type)
pump VE
40 50 63
Slim duct
— — — — — — — — — — — —
ND ND ND
FXDQ
without 20 25 32
— — — — — — — — — — — —
drain PD PD PD
pump VET
40 50 63
— — — ND ND ND — — — — — — — — —
Slim duct 20 25 32 40 50 63
FXDQ — — — — — — — — — V1
(Compact type) SP SP SP SP SP SP
Middle static 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140
FXSQ — — — — —
Middle-high VE
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140
static pressure FXMQ PA PA PA PA PA PA — PA PA PA PA
— — — —
duct
High static 200 250
FXMQ — — — — — — — — — — — — — VM
pressure duct P P
4-way flow
Ceiling suspended
100
ceiling FXUQ — — — — — — 71A — — — — — — — VEB9
A
suspended
Ceiling 32 63 100
— — — — — — — — — — — — VE
suspended MA MA MA
FXHQ
125 140
— — — — — — — — — — — — — VM
B B
FXLQ — — — — — — — — —
MA MA MA MA MA MA
VE8
Floor standing
Concealed floor FXNQ 20 25 32 40 50 63 — — — — — — — — —

standing MA MA MA MA MA MA
Floor standing 125 200 250 400 500
— — — — — — — — — — Y1
duct N N N N N
FXVQ
500
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — Y16
N
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

VE, VE8, VE9, VET: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
VEB9, VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Y1, Y16: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz


V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Standard Series
VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim
coil
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Heat Reclaim
Series Model name
supply
Series)
150H 250H 350H 500H 650H
VAM VE
800H 1000H 1500H 2000H —
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

External Appearance SiMT342301E
2. External Appearance
2.1 Outdoor Unit
8, 10, 12 HP 14, 16, 18, 20 HP 22, 24 HP
RXYQ8BYM RXYQ14BYM RXYQ22BYM

RXYQ12BYM RXYQ18BYM
RXYQ20BYM
26, 28, 30, 32 HP 34, 36, 38, 40 HP 42, 44 HP

RXYQ30BYM RXYQ38BYM
RXYQ32BYM RXYQ40BYM
46, 48 HP 50, 52 HP 54, 56, 58, 60 HP

RXYQ58BYM
RXYQ60BYM

SiMT342301E External Appearance
2.2 VRV Indoor Unit

Ceiling Mounted Cassette
Round flow cassette with sensing (Streamer) Double flow cassette
FXFTQ-A FXCQ-B
Round flow cassette with sensing
FXFSQ-A
Round flow cassette (Streamer) Single flow cassette

FXFRQ-A FXEQ-A
Round flow cassette
FXFQ-A
Compact multi flow cassette Corner cassette

FXZQ-B FXKQ-MA
Ceiling Concealed Duct

3D airflow duct with sensing Slim duct (Compact type)
FXDSQ-A FXDQ-SP
Bedroom duct Middle static pressure duct

FXDBQ-A FXSQ-PA
Slim duct (Standard type) Middle static pressure duct

FXDQ-PD FXDYQ-MA
FXDQ-ND
Slim duct (Compact type) Middle-high static pressure duct

FXDQ-T FXMQ-PA

External Appearance SiMT342301E
High static pressure duct High static pressure duct

FXMQ-PV1A FXMQ-M
High static pressure duct

FXMQ-PVM
Ceiling Suspended
4-way flow ceiling suspended Ceiling suspended
FXUQ-A FXHQ-B
Ceiling suspended
FXHQ-MA
Wall Mounted
Wall mounted
FXAQ-A
Floor Standing
Floor standing Concealed floor standing (duct connection type)
FXLQ-MA FXNQ-A2
Concealed floor standing

FXNQ-MA

SiMT342301E External Appearance
Floor Standing Duct

Floor standing duct
FXVQ-N
Clean Room Air Conditioner

Clean room air conditioner
FXBQ-P
FXBPQ-P
2.3 Air Treatment Equipment

Outdoor-air processing unit Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series)
FXMQ-MF VKM-GC with DX coil
Outdoor-air processing unit Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)

FXMQ-AF VAM-H

Combination of Outdoor Units SiMT342301E
3. Combination of Outdoor Units

Capacity 8 HP 10 HP 12 HP 14 HP 16 HP 18 HP 20 HP 22 HP 24 HP
range
Model name RXYQ8B RXYQ10B RXYQ12B RXYQ14B RXYQ16B RXYQ18B RXYQ20B RXYQ22B RXYQ24B
range
Outdoor unit 1 RXYQ12B RXYQ12B RXYQ12B RXYQ12B RXYQ14B RXYQ16B RXYQ18B RXYQ20B RXYQ20B
range
Outdoor unit 3 — — — RXYQ20B RXYQ20B RXYQ20B RXYQ20B RXYQ20B RXYQ20B
System capacity Number Module Outdoor unit multi

kW HP of units 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 connection piping kit 1
22.4 8 1 ●
28.0 10 1 ●
33.5 12 1 ●
40.0 14 1 ●
45.0 16 1 ● —
50.0 18 1 ●
56.0 20 1 ●
61.5 22 1 ●
67.0 24 1 ●
73.5 26 2 ● ●
78.5 28 2 ● ●
83.5 30 2 ● ●
89.5 32 2 ● ●
96.0 34 2 ● ●
101 36 2 ● ●
BHFP22R135
106 38 2 ● ●
112 40 2 ●●
117 42 2 ● ●
123 44 2 ● ●
128 46 2 ● ●
134 48 2 ●●
139 50 3 ● ● ●
145 52 3 ● ●●
152 54 3 ● ●●
BHFP22R168
157 56 3 ● ●●
162 58 3 ● ●●
168 60 3 ●●●
Note: 1. For multiple connection, the outdoor unit multi connection piping kit (separately sold) is required.

SiMT342301E Capacity Range
4. Capacity Range
4.1 Connection Ratio
Total capacity index of the indoor units
Connection ratio =
Capacity index of the outdoor units
Max. connection ratio

Types of connected indoor units Type of connected air treatment equipment
FXDSQ, Including VKM FXMQ-MF FXMQ-AF
Min. FXDBQ-A, FXFTQ25A,
Type connection FXDQ, FXFSQ25A,
ratio Other When When
FXSQ, FXFRQ25A, When VKM
indoor unit When only FXMQ-MF When only FXMQ-AF
FXMQ-PA, FXFQ25A, and and indoor
models FXMQ-MF is and indoor FXMQ-AF is and indoor
FXAQ, FXVQ-N units are
connected units are connected units are
FXBQ, at least one connected
connected connected
FXBPQ unit
Single 8-20 HP 200%
outdoor
units 22/24 HP 180%
50% 200% 130% 130% 100% 100%  130% A% 
Double outdoor units 160%
Triple outdoor units 130%
If the operational capacity of indoor units is more than 130%, low airflow operation is enforced in
all the indoor units.
 When outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF, FXMQ-AF) and standard indoor units are
connected, the total connection capacity of the outdoor-air processing units must not exceed
30% of the capacity index of the outdoor units for FXMQ-MF or B% (depending on the
connection ratio A%) of the capacity index of the outdoor units for FXMQ-AF. And the
connection ratio must not exceed 100% for FXMQ-MF and 130% for FXMQ-AF.
Connection ratio A (%) B (%)
50 ≤ connection ratio ≤ 100% 40%
100 < connection ratio ≤ 110% 30%
Because connection is possible depending on conditions even when the capacity index of
FXMQ-MF exceeds 30% of the capacity index of the outdoor units, contact your local distributor.
Note: When outdoor-air processing mode of FXVQ-N is selected, be sure to connect as follows:
HP Indoor unit Outdoor unit
5 FXVQ125NY1 × 1
RXYQ8B × 1
8 FXVQ200NY1 × 1
10 FXVQ250NY1 × 1 RXYQ10B × 1
16 FXVQ400NY1 × 1 RXYQ16B × 1
20 FXVQ500NY1 × 1 RXYQ20B × 1
FXVQ500NY16 × 1

Capacity Range SiMT342301E
4.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations

Capacity Total capacity index of Maximum number of
kW HP Model name Combination connectable indoor connectable indoor
index
units *1 *2 units *1
22.4 8 200 RXYQ8B RXYQ8B 100 to 260 (400) 13 (20)
28.0 10 250 RXYQ10B RXYQ10B 125 to 325 (500) 16 (25)
33.5 12 300 RXYQ12B RXYQ12B 150 to 390 (600) 19 (30)
40.0 14 350 RXYQ14B RXYQ14B 175 to 455 (700) 22 (35)
45.0 16 400 RXYQ16B RXYQ16B 200 to 520 (800) 26 (40)
50.0 18 450 RXYQ18B RXYQ18B 225 to 585 (900) 29 (45)
56.0 20 500 RXYQ20B RXYQ20B 250 to 650 (1,000) 32 (50)
61.5 22 550 RXYQ22B RXYQ22B 275 to 715 (990) 35 (49)
67.0 24 600 RXYQ24B RXYQ24B 300 to 780 (1,080) 39 (54)
73.5 26 650 RXYQ26B RXYQ12B + RXYQ14B 325 to 845 (1,040) 42 (52)
89.5 32 800 RXYQ32B RXYQ12B + RXYQ20B 400 to 1,040 (1,280) 52 (64)
96.0 34 850 RXYQ34B RXYQ14B + RXYQ20B 425 to 1,105 (1,360) 55 (64)
101 36 900 RXYQ36B RXYQ16B + RXYQ20B 450 to 1,170 (1,440) 58 (64)
106 38 950 RXYQ38B RXYQ18B + RXYQ20B 475 to 1,235 (1,520) 61 (64)
112 40 1,000 RXYQ40B RXYQ20B × 2 500 to 1,300 (1,600)
117 42 1,050 RXYQ42B RXYQ20B + RXYQ22B 525 to 1,365 (1,680)
134 48 1,200 RXYQ48B RXYQ24B × 2 600 to 1,560 (1,920)
139 50 1,250 RXYQ50B RXYQ12B + RXYQ18B + RXYQ20B 625 to 1,625 (1,625) 64 (64)
145 52 1,300 RXYQ52B RXYQ12B + RXYQ20B × 2 650 to 1,690 (1,690)
168 60 1,500 RXYQ60B RXYQ20B × 3 750 to 1,950 (1,950)
Notes:
1. Values inside brackets are based on connection of indoor units rated at maximum capacity,
200% for RXYQ8-20B, 180% for RXYQ22/24B, 160% for double outdoor units, and 130% for
triple outdoor units.
2. When outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF, FXMQ-AF) and standard indoor units are
connected, the total connection capacity of the outdoor-air processing units must not exceed
30% of the capacity index of the outdoor units for FXMQ-MF or B% (depending on the
connection ratio A%) of the capacity index of the outdoor units for FXMQ-AF. And the
connection ratio must not exceed 100% for FXMQ-MF and 130% for FXMQ-AF.
Connection ratio A (%) B (%)
50 ≤ connection ratio ≤ 100% 40%
Because connection is possible depending on conditions even when the capacity index of
FXMQ-MF exceeds 30% of the capacity index of the outdoor units, contact your local distributor.

SiMT342301E Specifications
5. Specifications
Model Name RXYQ8BYM RXYQ10BYM
Power supply 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz
1 Cooling capacity kcal/h 19,000 24,000
Btu/h 76,400 95,500
kW 22.4 28.0
2 Heating capacity kcal/h 22,000 27,000
Btu/h 85,300 107,000
kW 25.0 31.5
Casing color Ivory white (5Y7.5/1) Ivory white (5Y7.5/1)
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 930 × 765 1,660 × 930 × 765
Heat exchanger Cross fin coil Cross fin coil
Compressor Type Hermetically sealed scroll type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output ×
kW (4.3 × 1) (6.2 × 1)
Number of units
Starting method Soft start Soft start
Fan Type Propeller fan Propeller fan
Motor output kW (0.95 × 1) (0.95 × 1)
Airflow rate m³/min 155 169
L/s 2,583 2,817
cfm 5,472 5,966
Drive Direct drive Direct drive
Connecting Liquid pipe mm 9.5 C1220T (Brazing connection) 9.5 C1220T (Brazing connection)
pipes Gas pipe mm 19.1 C1220T (Brazing connection) 22.2 C1220T (Brazing connection)
Mass kg 215 225
3 Sound pressure level (C/H) dB(A) 56 / 56 57 / 58
Sound power level dB 78 79
Safety devices High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector, High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector,
Overcurrent relay, Inverter overload protector, Overcurrent relay, Inverter overload protector,
Leak detecting device Leak detecting device
Capacity control % 11-100 13-100
Refrigerant Refrigerant name R-410A R-410A
Charge kg 6.9 7.1
Control Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Standard accessories Installation manual, Operation manual, Installation manual, Operation manual,
Connection pipes, Clamps, Ferrite core Connection pipes, Clamps, Ferrite core
Drawing No. 4D145118A 4D145118A
Notes:
1. Indoor temp.: 27°CDB, 19°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5 m, height difference: 0 m. Conversion formulae
2. Indoor temp.: 20°CDB, 15°CWB / outdoor temp.: 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5 m, height difference: 0 m. kcal/h = kW × 860
3. Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1 m in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 m. Btu/h = kW × 3412
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions and oil recovery mode. l/s = m³/min × 1000 / 60
When there is concern for noise in the surrounding area such as residences, we recommend investigating the installation location cfm = m³/min × 35.3
and taking soundproofing measures.

Specifications SiMT342301E

Btu/h 114,000 136,000
kW 33.5 40.0
Btu/h 128,000 154,000
kW 37.5 45.0
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 930 × 765 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output ×
kW (7.7 × 1) (3.9 × 1) + (4.4 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.95 × 1) (0.65 × 2)
L/s 3,017 4,333
cfm 6,389 9,178
Mass kg 225 310
Charge kg 7.2 9.7
Notes:


Btu/h 154,000 171,000
kW 45.0 50.0
Btu/h 171,000 191,000
kW 50.0 56.0
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output ×
kW (4.4 × 1) + (5.0 × 1) (4.0 × 1) + (6.6 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.65 × 2) (0.65 × 2)
L/s 4,433 4,300
cfm 9,390 9,107
Mass kg 310 340
Charge kg 9.9 11.7
Notes:


Btu/h 191,000 210,000
kW 56.0 61.5
Btu/h 215,000 235,000
kW 63.0 69.0
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 1,750 × 765
Motor output ×
kW (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) (7.0 × 1) + (7.3 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.65 × 2) (0.95 × 2)
L/s 5,100 7,167
cfm 10,802 15,179
Mass kg 340 385
Charge kg 11.7 11.7
Notes:

Model Name RXYQ24BYM

Power supply 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz
1 Cooling capacity kcal/h 58,000
Btu/h 229,000
kW 67.0
2 Heating capacity kcal/h 65,000
Btu/h 256,000
kW 75.0
Casing color Ivory white (5Y7.5/1)
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 1,750 × 765
Heat exchanger Cross fin coil
Compressor Type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output ×
kW (7.7 × 1) + (8.0 × 1)
Number of units
Starting method Soft start
Fan Type Propeller fan
Motor output kW (0.95 × 2)
Airflow rate m³/min 430
L/s 7,167
cfm 15,179
Drive Direct drive
Connecting Liquid pipe mm 15.9 C1220T (Brazing connection)
pipes Gas pipe mm 34.9 C1220T (Brazing connection)
Mass kg 385
3 Sound pressure level (C/H) dB(A) 68 / 68
Sound power level dB 90
Safety devices High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector, Overcurrent relay, Inverter overload protector, Leak detecting device
Capacity control % 5-100
Refrigerant Refrigerant name R-410A
Charge kg 11.7
Control Electronic expansion valve
Standard accessories Installation manual, Operation manual, Connection pipes, Clamps, Ferrite core
Drawing No. 4D145120A
Notes:

Model Name (Combination Unit) RXYQ26BYM RXYQ28BYM

Model Name (Independent Unit) RXYQ12BYM + RXYQ14BYM RXYQ12BYM + RXYQ16BYM
Btu/h 250,000 268,000
kW 73.5 78.5
Btu/h 282,000 299,000
kW 82.5 87.5
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 930 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 930 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output ×
kW (7.7 × 1) + (3.9 × 1) + (4.4 × 1) (7.7 × 1) + (4.4 × 1) + (5.0 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.95 × 1) + (0.65 × 2) (0.95 × 1) + (0.65 × 2)
Airflow rate m³/min 181 + 260 181 + 266
L/s 3,017 + 4,333 3,017 + 4,433
cfm 6,389 + 9,178 6,389 + 9,390
Mass kg 225 + 310 225 + 310
Charge kg 7.2 + 9.7 7.2 + 9.9
Drawing No. 4D145121 4D145121
Notes:


Btu/h 285,000 305,000
kW 83.5 89.5
Btu/h 319,000 343,000
kW 93.5 100
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 930 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 930 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output ×
kW (7.7 × 1) + (4.0 × 1) + (6.6 × 1) (7.7 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.95 × 1) + (0.65 × 2) (0.95 × 1) + (0.65 × 2)
L/s 3,017 + 4,300 3,017 + 5,100
cfm 6,389 + 9,107 6,389 + 10,802
Mass kg 225 + 340 225 + 340
Charge kg 7.2 + 11.7 7.2 + 11.7
Drawing No. 4D145121 4D145122
Notes:


Btu/h 327,000 345,000
kW 96.0 101
Btu/h 369,000 386,000
kW 108 113
Dimensions (H × W × D) mm 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output ×
kW (3.9 × 1) + (4.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) (4.4 × 1) + (5.0 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2)
L/s 4,333 + 5,100 4,433 + 5,100
cfm 9,178 + 10,802 9,390 + 10,802
Mass kg 310 + 340 310 + 340
Charge kg 9.7 + 11.7 9.9 + 11.7
Drawing No. 4D145122 4D145122
Notes:


Btu/h 362,000 382,000
kW 106 112
Btu/h 406,000 430,000
kW 119 126
Motor output ×
kW (4.0 × 1) + (6.6 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2)
L/s 4,300 + 5,100 5,100 + 5,100
cfm 9,107 + 10,802 10,802 + 10,802
Mass kg 340 + 340 340 + 340
Charge kg 11.7 + 11.7 11.7 + 11.7
Drawing No. 4D145123 4D145123
Notes:


Btu/h 401,000 420,000
kW 117 123
Btu/h 450,000 471,000
kW 132 138
Motor output ×
kW (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) + (7.0 × 1) + (7.3 × 1) (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) + (7.7 × 1) + (8.0 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.65 × 2) + (0.95 × 2) (0.65 × 2) + (0.95 × 2)
L/s 5,100 + 7,167 5,100 + 7,167
cfm 10,802 + 15,179 10,802 + 15,179
Mass kg 340 + 385 340 + 385
Charge kg 11.7 + 11.7 11.7 + 11.7
Drawing No. 4D145123 4D145124
Notes:


Btu/h 439,000 458,000
kW 128 134
Btu/h 491,000 512,000
kW 144 150
Motor output ×
kW (7.0 × 1) + (7.3 × 1) + (7.7 × 1) + (8.0 × 1) (7.7 × 1) + (8.0 × 1) + (7.7 × 1) + (8.0 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.95 × 2) + (0.95 × 2) (0.95 × 2) + (0.95 × 2)
L/s 7,167 + 7,167 7,167 + 7,167
cfm 15,179 + 15,179 15,179 + 15,179
Mass kg 385 + 385 385 + 385
Charge kg 11.7 + 11.7 11.7 + 11.7
Drawing No. 4D145124 4D145124
Notes:


Model Name (Independent Unit) RXYQ12BYM + RXYQ18BYM + RXYQ20BYM RXYQ12BYM + RXYQ20BYM + RXYQ20BYM
Btu/h 476,000 496,000
kW 139 145
Btu/h 534,000 558,000
kW 156 163
Dimensions (H × W × D) 1,660 × 930 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 930 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 +
mm
1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output ×
kW (7.7 × 1) + (4.0 × 1) + (6.6 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) (7.7 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1)
Number of units
Motor output kW (0.95 × 1) + (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) (0.95 × 1) + (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2)
Airflow rate m³/min 181 + 258 + 306 181 + 306 + 306
L/s 3,017 + 4,300 + 5,100 3,017 + 5,100 + 5,100
cfm 6,389 + 9,107 + 10,802 6,389 + 10,802 + 10,802
Mass kg 225 + 340 + 340 225 + 340 + 340
Charge kg 7.2 + 11.7 + 11.7 7.2 + 11.7 + 11.7
Drawing No. 4D145125 4D145125
Notes:


Btu/h 518,000 536,000
kW 152 157
Btu/h 584,000 601,000
kW 171 176
Dimensions (H × W × D) 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 +
mm
1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output × (3.9 × 1) + (4.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (4.4 × 1) + (5.0 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) +
kW
Number of units (7.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) (7.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1)
Motor output kW (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2)
L/s 4,333 + 5,100 + 5,100 4,433 + 5,100 + 5,100
cfm 9,178 + 10,802 + 10,802 9,390 + 10,802 + 10,802
Mass kg 310 + 340 + 340 310 + 340 + 340
Charge kg 9.7 + 11.7 + 11.7 9.9 + 11.7 + 11.7
Drawing No. 4D145125 4D145126A
Notes:


Btu/h 553,000 573,000
kW 162 168
Btu/h 621,000 645,000
kW 182 189
Dimensions (H × W × D) 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 + 1,660 × 1,240 × 765 +
mm
1,660 × 1,240 × 765 1,660 × 1,240 × 765
Motor output × (4.0 × 1) + (6.6 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) +
kW
Number of units (7.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1) (7.4 × 1) + (4.5 × 1) + (7.4 × 1)
Motor output kW (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2) + (0.65 × 2)
L/s 4,300 + 5,100 + 5,100 5,100 + 5,100 + 5,100
cfm 9,107 + 10,802 + 10,802 10,802 + 10,802 + 10,802
Mass kg 340 + 340 + 340 340 + 340 + 340
Charge kg 11.7 + 11.7 + 11.7 11.7 + 11.7 + 11.7
Notes:

SiMT342301E
Part 2
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................40

1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................40
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................45
1.3 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit...................................................................48
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................50
2.1 RXYQ8B.................................................................................................50
2.2 RXYQ10/12B..........................................................................................52
2.3 RXYQ14/16B..........................................................................................54
2.4 RXYQ18/20B..........................................................................................56
2.5 RXYQ22/24B..........................................................................................58
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................60
3.1 RXYQ8/10/12B.......................................................................................60
3.2 RXYQ14/16/18/20B................................................................................64
3.3 RXYQ22/24B..........................................................................................68
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit 39

Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) SiMT342301E
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)

1.1 Outdoor Unit
No. in
Electric
piping symbol Name Function
diagram
(1) M1C Compressor 1 Compressor is operated in multi-steps according to Te or Tc by
using inverter.
(2) M2C Compressor 2
(3) M1F Fan motor 1 The fan rotation speed is varied by using inverter.
(4) M2F Fan motor 2
Electronic expansion valve While being used as evaporator, PI control is applied to keep the
(5) Y1E (Heat exchanger main) outlet superheating degree of air heat exchanger constant.
Electronic expansion valve Used to control the refrigerant flow to cool the diode bridge and
(6) Y2E
(Refrigerant cooling IPM) power module of the inverter PCB.
Electronic expansion valve PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheating degree of
(7) Y3E
(Subcooling heat exchanger) subcooling heat exchanger constant.
Electronic expansion valve Used to control refrigerant charging speed during refrigerant auto
(8) Y4E (Refrigerant auto charge) charge operation and to stop refrigerant charge automatically.
Electronic expansion valve Used to control the refrigerant flow to cool the air inside the
(9) Y5E
(Refrigerant cooling air) electrical component box.
Electronic expansion valve While being used as evaporator, PI control is applied to keep the
(10) Y6E
(Heat exchanger left (sub)) outlet superheating degree of air heat exchanger constant.
Solenoid valve Used to return oil from the oil separator to the compressor.
(11) Y1S (Oil separator oil return 1 for 8-12 HP,
Oil separator oil return 2 for 14-24 HP)
Solenoid valve
(12) Y2S (Oil separator oil return 1 for 14-24 HP)
(13) Y3S Solenoid valve (Hot gas bypass) Used to flow discharge gas to the compressor inlet.
(14) Y4S Solenoid valve (Accumulator oil return) Used to return oil from the accumulator to the compressor.
Solenoid valve (Four way valve) Used to switch outdoor heat exchanger to evaporator or
(15) Y5S
condenser.
(16) S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect the high pressure.
(17) S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect the low pressure.
(18) S1PH High pressure switch (M1C) This functions when pressure increases to stop operation and
avoid high pressure increase in the fault operation.
(19) S2PH High pressure switch (M2C)
(20) — Pressure regulating valve (Liquid pipe) This is used when pressure increases, to prevent any damage on
components caused by pressure increase in transport or storage.
(21) — Subcooling heat exchanger Apply subcooling to liquid refrigerant.
(22) — Capillary tube Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil
separator to the compressor.
(23) — Capillary tube
Thermistor (Outdoor air) Used to detect outdoor air temperature, correct discharge pipe
(24) R1T
temperature and for other purposes.
Thermistor This detects temperature of liquid pipe for air heat exchanger.
(25) R2T
(Heat exchanger liquid pipe (main))
(26) R3T Thermistor Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger.
(Heat exchanger deicer (main)) Used to make judgements on defrost operation.
Thermistor (Electrical box air outlet) Used to detect the outlet pipe temperature of refrigerant cooling
(27) R4T
air.
Thermistor Used to detect temperature of the suction pipe before
(28) R5T
(Suction pipe before accumulator) accumulator.
(29) R6T Thermistor (Subcooling gas pipe) This detects temperature of gas pipe for subcooling heat
exchanger.
Thermistor (Subcooling liquid pipe) This detects temperature of liquid pipe for subcooling heat
(30) R8T
exchanger.
Thermistor This detects temperature of liquid pipe for air heat exchanger.
(31) R9T
(Heat exchanger left (sub) liquid pipe)
Thermistor Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger.
(32) R10T (Heat exchanger left (sub) deicer) Used to make judgements on defrost operation.
Thermistor This detects temperature of gas pipe for air heat exchanger.
(33) R11T
(Heat exchanger right (main) gas pipe)
Thermistor
(34) R12T
(Heat exchanger left (sub) gas pipe)
Thermistor Used to detect discharge pipe temperature.
(35) R13T (M1C discharge pipe for 14-24 HP)
40 Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

SiMT342301E Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)
No. in
Electric
piping symbol Name Function
diagram
Thermistor Detects compressor surface temperature, this switch is activated
(36) R14T
(M1C compressor body for 14-24 HP) at surface temperature of 120°C or more to stop the compressor.
Thermistor Used to detect discharge pipe temperature.
(37) R15T (M1C discharge pipe for 8-12 HP,
M2C discharge pipe for 14-24 HP)
Thermistor Detects compressor surface temperature, this switch is activated
(38) R16T (M1C compressor body for 8-12 HP, at surface temperature of 120°C or more to stop the compressor.
M2C compressor body for 14-24 HP)
(39) R17T Thermistor (Box air) Detects the air temperature inside the electrical component box.

42
㻿㼠㼛㼜㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻌䠄㻌㼃㼕㼠㼔㻌㼟㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㻡㻛㻝㻢㻌㼕㼚㻚㻌㻔㻌㻣㻚㻥㼙㼙㻕㻌㼒㼘㼍㼞㼑㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌䠅
㻻㼡㼠㼟㼕㼐㼑
㻱㼘㻚㻌㻯㼛㼙㼜㼛㻚㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㼍㼕㼞㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㼍㼕㼞
RXYQ8/10/12BYM
㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚
㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻡㻱㻕
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻟㻱㻕 (27) 㻾㻠㼀 (9)
(7)
(30)
㻾㻤㼀㻼㼘㼍㼠㼑㻌㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㻱㼤㼏㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼞
㻸㼕㼝㼡㼕㼐㻌㻼㼕㼜㼑㻚
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻌
㻾㼑㼓㼡㼘㼍㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌
(21) (20)㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)
㻾㻢㼀
(29)
㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑
㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏㻱㼘㻚㻌㻯㼛㼙㼜㼛㻚㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻞㻱㻕
(39)
㻲㼡㼟㼕㼎㼘㼑㻌㼜㼘㼡㼓 (6)
5HOHDVH (3) 㻲㼍㼚㻔㻹㻝㻲㻕
YDOYH (24)
(28) 㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀 (15)
㻠㻙㼃㼍㼥㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑 (25) 㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㻼㻯㻮
㻹㻾㻟㼀
㻔㼅㻡㻿㻕 (26) 㻾㻞㼀 (5)
㻳㼍㼟㻌㻼㼕㼜㼑㻚
(13) 㻿㼂㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻝㻱㻕
㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑
㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻟㻿㻕㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㻱㼤㼏㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼞
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻴㻴㼕㼓㼔㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑
㻸㼛㼣㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞 (16) 㻔㻿㻝㻺㻼㻴㻕
(17) 㻔㻿㻝㻺㻼㻸㻕
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻿㼠㼞㼍㼕㼚㼑㼞㻴㼕㼓㼔㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔
㻔㻿㻝㻼㻴㻕
㻭㼏㼏㼡㼙㼡㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 (18) 㻴㻼㻿
㻾㻝㻡㼀
(37)
㻌㻌㻌㻌㻻㼕㼘㻌
㻿㼑㼜㼍㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞 (38)
㻾㻝㻢㼀㻯㼛㼙㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼛㼞
(22)
㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑
㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻠㻿㻕㻵㻺㼂㻝㻹㻝㻯
(14) 㻿㼂㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌 (1)
㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻝㻿㻕
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
(11) 㻿㼂
㻭㼡㼠㼛㼙㼍㼠㼕㼏 (8)
㻾㼑㼒㼞㼕㼓㼑㼞㼍㼚㼠
㻯㼔㼍㼞㼓㼑㻌㼜㼛㼞㼠㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻠㻱㻕
C: 3D144830A
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

SiMT342301E
SiMT342301E

㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻟㻱㻕 (27) 㻾㻠㼀 (9)
RXYQ14/16/18/20BYM
(7)
(30)
(21) (20)㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
(29)
㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑
㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚㻱㼘㻚㻌㻯㼛㼙㼜㼛㻚㻌㻮㼛㼤
(39)
㻲㼡㼟㼕㼎㼘㼑㻌㼜㼘㼡㼓 (4) (3) (6)
5HOHDVH 㻲㼍㼚㻔㻹㻞㻲㻕㻲㼍㼚㻔㻹㻝㻲㻕
YDOYH 㻾㻝㼀
(28) (24)
㻾㻡㼀 (15)
㻠㻙㼃㼍㼥㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻹㻹 (25) 㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㻼㻯㻮
㻔㼅㻡㻿㻕㻾㻟㼀 (26)
㻾㻞㼀 (5)
(13) 㻿㼂㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻝㻱㻕
㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞 (16) 㻔㻿㻝㻺㻼㻴㻕
(17) 㻔㻿㻝㻺㻼㻸㻕
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻴㼕㼓㼔㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻿㼠㼞㼍㼕㼚㼑㼞㻿㼠㼞㼍㼕㼚㼑㼞㻴㼕㼓㼔㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔

㻔㻿㻞㻼㻴㻕㻔㻿㻝㻼㻴㻕
(19) (18)
㻭㼏㼏㼡㼙㼡㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻴㻼㻿㻴㻼㻿
㻾㻝㻟㼀
(37) 㻾㻝㻡㼀 (35)
㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻻㼕㼘㻌
(38) 㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞 (36)
㻾㻝㻢㼀㻯㼛㼙㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼛㼞㻾㻝㻠㼀㻯㼛㼙㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼛㼞
㻹㻞㻯㻵㻺㼂㻞㻵㻺㼂㻝㻹㻝㻯

(14) 㻿㼂 (2) (11) 㻿㼂 (22) (1)
㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑 (12) 㻿㼂
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌
㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻠㻿㻕㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻝㻿㻕
(23) 㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌
㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻞㻿㻕
C: 3D144828A
43
44
RXYQ22/24BYM
㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻟㻱㻕㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻡㻱㻕
(27) 㻾㻠㼀 (9)
(7)
(30) 㻼㼘㼍㼠㼑㻌㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㻱㼤㼏㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼞
㻾㻤㼀
㻾㼑㼓㼡㼘㼍㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌 (4) 㻲㼍㼚㻔㻹㻞㻲㻕
㻾㻝㼀 (24)
(21) (20)㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㻾㻢㼀 (34) 㻹㻾㻝㻜㼀 (32) (31) 㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻢㻱㻕

(29) 㻾㻝㻞㼀㻾㻥㼀 (10)
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑
㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑㻱㼘㻚㻌㻯㼛㼙㼜㼛㻚㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㻱㼤㼏㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼞㻌㻔㻸㼑㼒㼠㻕㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚
(39)
㻲㼡㼟㼕㼎㼘㼑㻌㼜㼘㼡㼓 (6)
5HOHDVH (3) 㻲㼍㼚㻔㻹㻝㻲㻕
(28) YDOYH
㻾㻡㼀 (15) (26) (25) 㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㻼㻯㻮
㻠㻙㼃㼍㼥㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑 (33) 㻹㻾㻟㼀
㻔㼅㻡㻿㻕㻾㻝㻝㼀㻾㻞㼀 (5)
(13) 㻿㼂㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻱㼤㼜㼍㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚
㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻝㻱㻕
㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻟㻿㻕㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㻱㼤㼏㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼞㻌㻔㻾㼕㼓㼔㼠㻕
㻴㼕㼓㼔㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻴㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻸㼛㼣㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻔㻿㻝㻺㻼㻴㻕
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞 (16)
㻔㻿㻝㻺㻼㻸㻕
(17)
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻴㼕㼓㼔㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻌㻴㼕㼓㼔㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻌
㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻿㼠㼞㼍㼕㼚㼑㼞㻿㼠㼞㼍㼕㼚㼑㼞㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔
㻔㻿㻞㻼㻴㻕 (19) (18) 㻔㻿㻝㻼㻴㻕
㻾㻝㻟㼀
(37) 㻾㻝㻡㼀 (35)
㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻻㼕㼘㻌
(38) 㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞 (36)
㻹㻞㻯㻵㻺㼂㻞 (23) 㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑 (22) 㻵㻺㼂㻝㻹㻝㻯

(14) 㻿㼂 (2) (11) 㻿㼂 (1)
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌 (12) 㻿㼂

㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌
C: 3D143015A

SiMT342301E
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

No. in Symbol
piping Name Except Function
diagram FXVQ-N
FXVQ-N
(1) Electronic expansion valve Y1E Y1E Used for gas superheating degree control while in
Y2E (2) cooling or subcooling degree control while in heating.
(2) Suction air thermistor R1T R1T Used for thermostat control.
(3) Indoor heat exchanger (liquid) R2T R2T Used for gas superheating degree control while in
thermistor cooling or subcooling degree control while in heating.
Indoor heat exchanger (gas) Used for gas superheating degree control while in
(4) R3T R3T
thermistor cooling.
(5) Discharge air thermistor — R4T Used for discharge air temperature control.
1. R1T is for remote controller thermistor or optional remote sensor.
2. Y2E is for FXVQ400/500N models only.
 FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A  FXZQ-B
Gas piping Gas piping
connection port connection port
(4) (4)
(3) (3)
Indoor heat exchanger Indoor heat exchanger
(2)
Fan
Fan
(2)
Liquid piping Liquid piping
connection port connection port
Filter (1) Filter Filter (1) Filter

C: 4D024460P C: 4D040157B
 FXCQ-B  FXEQ-A
Gas piping connection port
(4)
Liquid piping connection port
(3)
(4)
(2) Filter (1) Filter
(3)
(1) (2)
Fan
C: 4D118229
Indoor heat exchanger
C: 4D079708D

 FXKQ-MA, FXMQ-M, FXUQ-A, FXHQ-MA, FXHQ-B,  FXDSQ-A

FXAQ-A, FXLQ-MA, FXNQ-MA, FXBQ-P, FXBPQ-P
Gas side
Gas piping
connection port
Liquid side
(4)
(3)
Fan
Filter (1) Filter
(2)
Liquid piping
connection port (3)
(2)
(4) Fan
Filter (1) Filter
C: 4D034245S
C: 4D083843C
 FXDBQ-A, FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXSQ-PA, FXMQ-PA,  FXDQ-TV1C(A)

FXMQ-PV1A *DVVLGH
/LTXLGVLGH
(4)
7KHUPLVWRU
&KHFN9DOYH 6HQVRU 7+
(3) (4)
3UHVVXUH
5HJXODWLQJ
)LOWHU (1) 9DOYH
(OHFWURQLF
H[SDQVLRQ
YDOYH
(2) )DQ
(2)
7KHUPLVWRU
6HQVRU 7+
(1)
(3) 7KHUPLVWRU
6HQVRU 7+ ,QGRRUKHDWH[FKDQJHU
C: 4D132442
C: 4D104913B
 FXDQ-SP  FXDYQ-MA
Gas piping connection port Gas pipe
connection port
Heat exchanger
(4)
Liquid piping connection port
(3)
M
Fan
Filter (1) Filter
(2)
Liquid pipe
(3) connection port
(2) (1)
Filter Filter
(4) Fan
Electronic
expansion valve
C: 4PDA0350
C: 4D090514

 FXMQ-PVM  FXNQ-A2
(4)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
C: 3D117738A
C: 4D081336B
 FXVQ125/200/250N  FXVQ400/500N
Gas piping (5)
(5) connection port
(4)
(4)
(3)
Indoor heat exchanger (3)
Filter
M Capillary
tube
Fan
Distributor
(2)
Solenoid (2)
sv
valve Liquid piping

connection port (1)
Check
valve
(1)
Filter (1) Filter
C: 4D081333C
C: 4D081334C

1.3 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit

FXMQ125/200/250MFV1
Gas pipe
connection port
Heat exchanger
(7)
(6)
(5)
Filter
(3) Capillary
Fan tube
Distributor (4)
(2) Solenoid
valve Liquid pipe
connection port
Check
(1) valve
Filter Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
C: 4D018650D
No. in piping Electric

Name Major Function
diagram symbol
(1) Y1E Electronic expansion valve Used to control the flow rate of refrigerant, and make the
SH control (1) while in cooling.
(2) Y1S Solenoid valve Closed while in cooling.
(3) — Capillary tube Used for gas superheating degree control while in cooling
or subcooling degree control while in heating.
(4) R1T Suction air thermistor Used to turn ON or OFF the thermostat.
(5) R2T Liquid pipe thermistor Used to control the opening degree of electronic
expansion valve under the SC control (2).
Gas pipe thermistor Used to control the opening degree of electronic
(6) R3T
expansion valve under the SH control.
Discharge air thermistor Used to control the electronic expansion valve opening
(7) R4T and thermostat ON/OFF so as to keep the discharge air
temperature at the set temperature.
Note(s) 1. SH control: Superheating control of heat exchanger outlet

2. SC control: Subcooling control of heat exchanger outlet

FXMQ80/140/200/250AFVM
(3)
(2)
(4)
(1)
C: 4D104913B
No. in piping Electric

Name Major Function
diagram symbol
Electronic expansion valve Used to control the flow rate of refrigerant, and make the
(1) Y1E superheating control of heat exchanger outlet while in
cooling.
Liquid pipe thermistor Used to control the opening degree of electronic
(2) R2T expansion valve under the subcooling control of heat
exchanger outlet.
(3) R3T Gas pipe thermistor Used to control the opening degree of electronic
expansion valve under the SH control.
(4) R4T Suction air thermistor Used to turn ON or OFF the thermostat.

Functional Parts Layout SiMT342301E
2. Functional Parts Layout

2.1 RXYQ8B
Front View
Fan motor
(M1F)
Thermistor
(Electrical box air outlet)
(R4T)

Thermistor
Thermistor (Outdoor air) (M1C discharge pipe)

(R1T) (R15T)
Solenoid valve
(Four way valve)
(Y5S)
A
Bird’s Eye View
Thermistor
(Suction pipe before accumulator)
(R5T) Low pressure sensor
(S1NPL)
Electronic expansion valve

(Heat exchanger main)
(Y1E)
Solenoid valve
(Oil separator oil return)
Solenoid valve
(Hot gas bypass) (Y1S)

(Y3S)
High pressure sensor

(S1NPH)
(Refrigerant auto charge)
(Y4E)
High pressure switch (M1C)
Thermistor (S1PH)
(Heat exchanger deicer (main))
(R3T)
Thermistor Thermistor
(Heat exchanger liquid pipe (main)) (M1C compressor body)
(R2T) (R16T)
Crankcase heater Solenoid valve

(Accumulator oil return)
(E1HC)
(Y4S)
Compressor
(M1C)
C: 0P702584C

SiMT342301E Functional Parts Layout
Detail of A
Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve

(Refrigerant cooling air) (Subcooling heat exchanger)
(Y5E) (Y3E)

(Refrigerant cooling IPM)
(Y2E)
Thermistor (Subcooling gas pipe)

(R6T)
Thermistor
(Subcooling liquid pipe)
(R8T)
C: 0P702584C
Inside Electrical Component Box

Thermistor (Box air)
(R17T)
$3
/5
;$
;$
;$
$3 ;$
;$
$3 ;$
;$
;$
C: 1P692915B

2.2 RXYQ10/12B
Front View
Fan motor
(M1F)
Thermistor
(R4T)
Thermistor
Thermistor (Outdoor air)

(M1C discharge pipe)

(R1T) (R15T)
Solenoid valve
(Four way valve)
(Y5S)
A
Bird’s Eye View
Thermistor
(S1NPL)

(Y1E)
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
(Hot gas bypass) (Y1S)
(Y3S)

(S1NPH)
(Y4E)
Thermistor (S1PH)
(Heat exchanger deicer (main))
(R3T)
(Heat exchanger liquid pipe (main)) (M1C compressor body)
(R2T) (R16T)
Crankcase heater Solenoid valve

(E1HC)
(Y4S)
Compressor
(M1C) C: 0P702581C

Detail of A

(Y5E) (Y3E)

(Y2E)

(R6T)
Thermistor
(R8T)
C: 0P702581C

(R17T)
$3
/5
;$
;$
;$
$3 ;$
;$
$3 ;$
;$
;$
C: 1P692915B

2.3 RXYQ14/16B
Front View
Fan motor 2 Fan motor 1

(M2F) (M1F)
Thermistor
(R4T)
Solenoid valve
(Four way valve)
(Y5S)


(S1NPH)
Solenoid valve
(Y4S)
A
Bird’s Eye View
Low pressure sensor

Thermistor (S1NPL)
(R5T)
(Y1E)
Solenoid valve
Thermistor (Outdoor air) (Oil separator oil return 1)
(R1T)
(Y2S)
Solenoid valve Solenoid valve
(Hot gas bypass)
(Oil separator oil return 2)
(Y3S) (Y1S)
Electronic expansion valve High pressure switch (M2C)
(Refrigerant auto charge) (S2PH)
(Y4E)
Thermistor (S1PH)
(R2T) Thermistor (M2C compressor body)
(R16T)
Thermistor
(Heat exchanger deicer (main)) Thermistor (M1C compressor body)
(R3T) (R14T)
(M2C discharge pipe) (M1C discharge pipe)
(R15T) (R13T)
Crankcase heater Crankcase heater
(E2HC) (E1HC)
Compressor 2 Compressor 1
(M2C) (M1C)
C: 0P702599C

Detail of A

(Y5E) (Y3E)

(Y2E)

(R6T)
Thermistor
(R8T)
C: 0P702599C

(R17T)
$3
$3
/5 /5
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
;$
$3 ;$
;$
$3 ;$ $3 ;$ $3 ;$
;$
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
C: 1P692919A

2.4 RXYQ18/20B
Front View

(M2F) (M1F)
Thermistor
(R4T)


(S1NPH)
Solenoid valve
(Y4S)
A
Bird’s Eye View
Thermistor
Solenoid valve (S1NPL)
(Four way valve)
(Y5S)
(Y1E)
Solenoid valve
Thermistor (Outdoor air) (Oil separator oil return 1)
(R1T) (Y2S)
Solenoid valve Solenoid valve
(Hot gas bypass)

(Y3S) (Y1S)
Electronic expansion valve High pressure switch (M2C)
(Refrigerant auto charge) (S2PH)
(Y4E)
Thermistor
(S1PH)
(R2T) Thermistor (M2C compressor body)

(R16T)
Thermistor
(Heat exchanger deicer (main)) Thermistor (M1C compressor body)
(R3T) (R14T)
(R15T) (R13T)
(E2HC) (E1HC)
(M2C) (M1C)
C: 0P702358B

Detail of A

(Y5E) (Y3E)

(Y2E)

(R6T)
Thermistor
(R8T)
C: 0P702358B

(R17T)
$3 $3
/5 /5
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
;$
$3 ;$
;$
$3 ;$ $3 ;$ $3 ;$
;$
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
C: 1P692923B

2.5 RXYQ22/24B
Front View

(M2F) (M1F)
Thermistor
(R4T)
Solenoid valve
(Y2S)
Solenoid valve
(Hot gas bypass)
(Y3S)
Thermistor
(R2T)
Thermistor
(Heat exchanger left deicer)
(R10T)
Thermistor Solenoid valve

(Heat exchanger deicer (main)) (Accumulator oil return)
(R3T) (Y4S)
A
Bird’s Eye View
Thermistor Solenoid valve
(Heat exchanger right gas pipe) (Four way valve) High pressure sensor
(R11T) (Y5S) (S1NPH) Low pressure sensor
Thermistor (S1NPL)
(Heat exchanger left gas pipe) Thermistor
(R12T) (Suction pipe before accumulator)
Thermistor (Outdoor air) (R5T)
(R1T) High pressure switch (M2C)
(S2PH)
(S1PH)
(Heat exchanger left) Solenoid valve
(Y6E) (Oil separator oil return 2)
(Y1S)
(Y1E)
(Heat exchanger left liquid pipe) (M2C compressor body)
(R9T) (R16T)
Electronic expansion valve Thermistor
(Refrigerant auto charge) (M1C compressor body)

(Y4E) (R14T)
(R15T) (R13T)
(E2HC) (E1HC)
(M2C) (M1C)
C: 0P709081C

Detail of A

(Y5E) (Y3E)

(Y2E)

(R6T)
Thermistor
(R8T)
C: 0P709081C

(R17T)
$3
$3
/5 /5
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
;$
$3 ;$
;$
$3 ;$ $3 ;$ $3 ;$
;$
;$ ;$
;$ ;$
C: 1P692923B

Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode SiMT342301E
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode

3.1 RXYQ8/10/12B
Cooling Operation
High temperature, high pressure, gas

High temperature, high pressure, liquid
Low temperature, low pressure
Indoor unit operation
Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
ON OFF ON
Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
control EV: 0 pulse EV: 0 pulse
Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
Thermostat ON Thermostat OFF
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻟㻱㻕㻾㻠㼀
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑
㻲㼡㼟㼕㼎㼘㼑㻌㼜㼘㼡㼓
5HOHDVH 㻲㼍㼚㻔㻹㻝㻲㻕
YDOYH
㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㻼㻯㻮
㻠㻙㼃㼍㼥㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻹㻾㻟㼀
㻔㼅㻡㻿㻕㻾㻞㼀
㻿㼂
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻔㻿㻝㻺㻼㻴㻕
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻔㻿㻝㻼㻴㻕
㻭㼏㼏㼡㼙㼡㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻴㻼㻿
㻾㻝㻡㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
㻿㼂㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌
㻿㼂
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
㻭㼡㼠㼛㼙㼍㼠㼕㼏
C: 3D144830A

SiMT342301E Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
Cooling Oil Return Operation

ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal EV: Normal

control EV: 224 pulses control
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑
YDOYH
㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻿㼂
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻔㻿㻝㻼㻴㻕
㻾㻝㻡㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
㻿㼂
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
C: 3D144830A

Heating Oil Return & Defrost Operation

Fan OFF Fan OFF Fan OFF
ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
control EV: 224 pulses EV: 224 pulses
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑
YDOYH
㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻿㼂
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻔㻿㻝㻼㻴㻕
㻾㻝㻡㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
㻿㼂
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
C: 3D144830A

Heating Operation

ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
㻵㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑
YDOYH
㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻿㼂
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻔㻿㻝㻼㻴㻕
㻾㻝㻡㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
㻿㼂
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
C: 3D144830A

3.2 RXYQ14/16/18/20B
Cooling Operation

ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
YDOYH 㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻠㻙㼃㼍㼥㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻹㻹㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㻼㻯㻮
㻔㼅㻡㻿㻕㻾㻟㼀
㻾㻞㼀
㻿㼂
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸

㻾㻝㻡㼀㻾㻝㻟㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞

㻿㼂㻿㼂
㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑㻿㼂
㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑㻿㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐㻌
C: 3D144828A


ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan

㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
YDOYH 㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻾㻞㼀
㻿㼂
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸


㻿㼂㻿㼂
C: 3D144828A


ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
YDOYH 㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻾㻞㼀
㻿㼂
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸


㻿㼂㻿㼂
C: 3D144828A

Heating Operation

ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑
㻾㻢㼀
YDOYH 㻾㻝㼀
㻾㻡㼀
㻾㻞㼀
㻿㼂
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸


㻿㼂㻿㼂
C: 3D144828A

3.3 RXYQ22/24B
Cooling Operation

ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
㻾㻠㼀
㻼㼘㼍㼠㼑㻌㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㻱㼤㼏㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼞
㻾㻤㼀
㻾㼑㼓㼡㼘㼍㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㻲㼍㼚㻔㻹㻞㻲㻕
㻾㻝㼀
㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㻾㻢㼀㻹㻾㻝㻜㼀㼂㼍㼘㼢㼑㻔㼅㻢㻱㻕
㻾㻝㻞㼀㻾㻥㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
YDOYH
㻾㻡㼀
㻠㻙㼃㼍㼥㻌㼢㼍㼘㼢㼑㻹㻴㼑㼍㼠㻌㼟㼕㼚㼗㻌㻼㻯㻮
㻾㻟㼀
㻔㼅㻡㻿㻕㻾㻝㻝㼀㻾㻞㼀
㻿㼂㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼛㼚㼕㼏
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸
㻹㻞㻯㻵㻺㼂㻞㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑㻯㼍㼜㼕㼘㼘㼍㼞㼥㻌㼠㼡㼎㼑㻵㻺㼂㻝㻹㻝㻯

㻿㼂㻿㼂
㻿㼂
C: 3D143015A


ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan

㻾㻠㼀
㻾㻤㼀
㻾㻝㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
YDOYH
㻾㻡㼀
㻾㻟㼀
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸

㻿㼂㻿㼂
㻿㼂
C: 3D143015A


ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
㻾㻠㼀
㻾㻤㼀
㻾㻝㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
YDOYH
㻾㻡㼀
㻾㻟㼀
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸

㻿㼂㻿㼂
㻿㼂
C: 3D143015A

Heating Operation

ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal
㻾㻠㼀
㻾㻤㼀
㻾㻝㼀
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
YDOYH
㻾㻡㼀
㻾㻟㼀
㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻿㻱㻺㻼㻸

㻿㼂㻿㼂
㻿㼂
C: 3D143015A

SiMT342301E
Part 3
Remote Controller
1. Applicable Models .................................................................................73

2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................75
2.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................75
2.2 BRC1F61................................................................................................77
2.3 BRC1H62 Series ....................................................................................78
2.4 BRC2E61 ...............................................................................................85
2.5 BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series.....................................................88
2.6 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .........................................................................89
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................92
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E63, BRC1F61)...................................92
3.2 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1H62 Series) .........................................93
3.3 Wired Remote Controller (BRC2E61) ....................................................94
3.4 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................95
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................96
4.1 Setting for Signal Receiver PCB ............................................................96
4.2 Setting for BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series ...................................97
4.3 Setting for BRC4M, BRC7M Series........................................................98
4.4 Multiple Settings A/b...............................................................................99
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting................................................100
5.1 BRC1E63, BRC1F61............................................................................100
5.2 BRC1H62 Series ..................................................................................101
5.4 Group No. Setting Example..................................................................102
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu........................................103
6.1 BRC1E63 .............................................................................................103
6.2 BRC2E61 .............................................................................................107
7. Administrator Menu, Installer Menu ....................................................110
7.1 BRC1H62 Series ..................................................................................110
72 Part 3 Remote Controller

SiMT342301E Applicable Models
1. Applicable Models
Wired remote controller
Series Wireless remote controller
Navigation Simplified Stylish
FXFTQ-A
— —
FXFRQ-A —
FXFSQ-A BRC7M634F (1)
BRC1E63 (1)
FXFQ-A BRC7M634K (1)
BRC1H62W/K BRC7M530W (for grid panel)
FXZQ-B
BRC7E530W (for standard panel)
BRC2E61
FXCQ-B BRC1E63 BRC7M65
FXEQ-A BRC4M61
FXKQ-MA BRC4C61
FXDSQ-A BRC1F61 — — BRC4M65
FXDBQ-A
FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND
BRC4C65
FXDQ-T
FXDQ-SP
VRV
indoor unit FXSQ-PA
FXDYQ-MA BRC4C62
FXMQ-PA
BRC4C65
FXMQ-P
FXMQ-M BRC4C62
FXUQ-A BRC7CB58
BRC2E61 BRC1H62W/K
FXHQ-MA BRC7EA63W
FXHQ-B BRC1E63 BRC7M53
FXAQ-A BRC7M675
FXLQ-MA
BRC4C62
FXNQ-MA
FXNQ-A2 BRC4C65
FXVQ-N —
FXBQ-P
BRC4C62
FXBPQ-P
Outdoor-air FXMQ-MF —
processing
unit FXMQ-AF BRC4C65
Heat VKM-GC — —
Reclaim —
Ventilator VAM-H BRC2E61 BRC1H62W/K
Note(s) 1. Some functions are not available depending on the remote controller type. Refer to page 74
for details.
Part 3 Remote Controller 73

Applicable Models SiMT342301E
Function list
FXFSQ-A FXFQ-A
Category Function
BRC1E63 BRC7M BRC1E63 BRC7M
ON/OFF operation ● ● ● ●
Operation mode switching ● ● ● ●
Setting temperature ● ● ● ●
Swing pattern selection ● ● ● ●
Switchable fan speed (Ventilation amount) ● ● ● ●
Display switching function ● — ● —
Basic performance
Backlight function ● ● ● ●
Display automatic OFF ● — ● —
Multilingual correspond ● ● ● ●
Timer function (Time schedule display) ● — ● —
Key lock function ● — ● —
Contrast adjustment ● — ● —
Automatic Eco airflow rate ● ● ● ●
Eco infrared floor temperature sensor ● — — —
Sensing sensor stop mode ● — — —
Sensing sensor low mode ● — — —
Setpoint range set ● — ● —
Setback ● — ● —
Energy saving function
OFF timer (programmed) ● — ● —
Weekly schedule timer ● — ● —
ON/OFF timer — ● — ●
Setting temperature automatic recovery ● — ● —
VRTsmart control ● — — —
VRT control ● — ● —
Active circulation airflow ● — ● —
Forced cooling ON operation ● — ● —
Automatic cooling/heating changeover ● — ● —
Independent up-and-down airflow ● — ● —
Automatic direct air (when sensing presence) ● — — —
Hot start function ● ● ● ●
Draft prevention ● — ● —
Comfortable function
Two selectable temperature sensors ● — ● —
Application for high ceiling ● — ● —
Service contact display ● — ● —
Model name display (indoor/outdoor) ● — ● —
Filter sign/reset ● ● ● ●
Operation time accumulation time display ● — ● —
Operation data display ● — ● —
●: Available
—: Not available

SiMT342301E Names and Functions
2. Names and Functions

2.1 BRC1E63
(1) Mode Selector button (6) Right button

Used to select the operation mode. Used to highlight the next items on the
right-hand side.
(2) Airflow Setting button Display contents are changed to next
Used to indicate the Airflow Rate (Air screen per page.
Volume / Fan Speed) / Airflow Direction
screen. (7) Left button
Used to highlight the next items on the
(3) Menu/Enter button left-hand side.
Used to indicate the Main menu. Display contents are changed to
(For details of Main menu, refer to the previous screen per page.
operation manual.)
Used to enter the selected item. (8) ON/OFF button
Press to start the system.
(4) Up button Press this button again to stop the
Used to increase the set temperature. system.
Used to highlight the item above the
current selection. (9) Operation lamp (Green)
(The highlighted items will be scrolled This lamp lights up during operation. The
through when the button is pressed lamp blinks if an error occurs.
continuously.)
Used to change the selected item. (10) Cancel button
Used to return to the previous screen.
(5) Down button Press and hold this button for 4
Used to decrease the set temperature. seconds or longer to display Service
Used to highlight the item below the Settings menu.
current selection.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled (11) LCD (with backlight)
through when the button is pressed The backlight will be lit for about 30
continuously.) seconds by pressing any button.
Used to change the selected item.

Names and Functions SiMT342301E
Mode Access Operation

On power-up, the message Checking the connection. Please stand by. will be displayed on
the remote controller screen. Then that message will disappear and the basic screen will be
displayed. To access a mode from the basic screen, refer to the figure below.
When any of the operation buttons is pressed, the backlight will come on and remains lit for
about 30 seconds. Be sure to press a button while the backlight is on (this does not apply to the
On/Off button.)
Main Menu
• Circulation airflow
• Airflow direction
• Individual air direction
• Quick start
• Ventilation
• Energy saving options
• Schedule
• Filter auto clean
Main Menu screen • Maintenance information
• Configuration
• Current settings
• Clock & Calendar
Press Press Cancel • Language
Menu/Enter button once.
button once.
Basic Screen
• Operation mode changeover
 The items on each menu vary
• Temperature setting
depending on the connected
• Airflow rate
models.
• Airflow direction
• Menu display
• Confirmation of each setting
• On
• Off
• Cancel Basic screen
• Operation lamp
Press Cancel button Press Cancel
for 4 seconds or more. button once.
Press Cancel
button once.
Press Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more.
Service Settings screen Maintenance Menu screen
Service Settings Menu Maintenance Menu

• Test Operation • Model name
• Maintenance contact • Operation hours
• Field settings • Indoor unit status
• Demand • Outdoor unit status
• Min setpoints differential • Forced defrost
• External input interlock • Error display
• Group address • Swap unit No.
• Indoor unit AirNet address • Addressed sensor value
• Outdoor unit AirNet address
• Error history
• Indoor unit status
• Outdoor unit status
• Forced fan ON
• Switch main sub controller
• Filter indicator
• Test filter auto clean
• Brush/Filter ind
• Disable filter auto clean

2.2 BRC1F61
(6) Left button

Used to highlight the next items on the
left-hand side.
Display contents are changed to
previous screen per page.
(7) Right button

Used to highlight the next items on
the right-hand side.
Display contents are changed to
next screen per page.
the setting item selected.
(8) ON/OFF button
Press this button to start the system.
set temperature. Press this button again to stop the
system.
(9) Operation lamp (Green)

This lamp lights up during operation. The
lamp blinks if an error occurs.
(10) Cancel button

Used to return to the previous screen.
set temperature.
(11) LCD (with backlight)
The backlight will be lit for about 30
seconds by pressing any button.
If 2 remote controllers are used to
control a single indoor unit, the
backlight of the remote controller
accessed first will be lit.
(Button operation can also be
performed on the remote controller
with backlight off.)

2.3 BRC1H62 Series

2.3.1 Button Locations and Descriptions
a
b - + d
a ON/OFF button
• Press this button to turn on the system.
• Press this button again to turn off the system.
b Status indicator (LED)
• During operation, the light ring around the display lights up blue/red/green.
Lights up blue: Operating, Blinks red: Error is occurring, Lights up/blinks green: Bluetooth connecting
c LCD
• Displays the current setpoint and air conditioner operation status.
d NAVIGATE/ADJUST button
• Navigate right.
• Adjust a setting.
e SELECT/ACTIVATE/SET button
• From the home screen, enter the user menu.
• From the user menu, enter one of the submenus.
• From their respective submenu, activate an operation/ventilation mode.
f NAVIGATE/ADJUST button
• Navigate left.
• Adjust the setting.

2.3.2 Overview of Screens

How to display the screen
The following is just an example. The items available for setting vary depending on the
indoor unit you are using. If there is no button operation for about 10 seconds, the screen
returns to the home screen.
Home screen User menu
Press
30 ˚C
28 ˚C
Select
press .
, then
This screen is a
menu for the user.
See the next page
Select , then for items which can
Select , then press . press . be selected.
Press and hold Press

for 5 seconds.
Administrator menu Information screen Installer menu

Sensor view
12:34
30 ˚C
32 ˚C
1050PPM
A3-01 (Unit 00) This screen is a
This screen is a menu
for the administrator. menu for the installer.
This screen displays the sensor values.
See the next page for See the next page
If there are no sensors, a horizontal bar (“–”) is
items which can be for items which can
displayed.
selected. be selected.
Choose which items are displayed by setting from
the remote controller.
This screen is not displayed by factory default. If it
is not displayed, the icon view will be shown
instead.
Press and hold Press / Press

and for 5 seconds. (in that order) and
Icon view hold them for
10 seconds.
12:34
A3-01 (Unit 00)
This screen displays the time and the status of the

remote controller and the system. If an error
occurs, the error code is displayed.

2.3.3 Setting Screen List

Setting list User Administrator Installer
Icon Name Description menu menu menu
Depends on
Operation Mode Operation mode setting h
current setting
Depends on
Fan Speed Airflow rate setting h
current setting
Depends on
Airflow Direction Airflow direction 1 setting h
current setting
Depends on
Vertical Airflow Airflow direction 2 setting h
current setting
Depends on
Ventilation Mode Ventilation mode setting h
current setting
Depends on
Ventilation Rate Ventilation rate setting h
current setting
LED brightness adjustment

Adjust LED (ON) h
when backlight lights up
LED brightness adjustment
Adjust LED (OFF) when backlight lights up h
dimly
Sign Reset Filter sign reset h
Celsius/Fahrenheit
Celsius/Fahrenheit h
changeover
Setpoint setting when in

Setpoint h
auto operation mode
Bluetooth Setting Bluetooth setting h h
Backlight Backlight brightness setting h h
Contrast Contrast setting h h
Clock Setting Clock setting h h
About Administrator information h h
Administrator password
Admin Password h
setting
Installer Password Installer password setting h
Field Setting Field Setting h
R/C Setting R/C Setting h
Address Setting Address Setting h
Forced Fan ON Forced Fan ON Setting h
Rel Master Control Release changeover master h

2.3.4 Names and Functions

Home screen Screen display explanation
a OFF
f • Displayed when operation is stopped.
a g
b Error/Filter/Test/Streamer icon
b 30 ˚C h •
c i are displayed.
OFF
d
e 28 j
k
• The streamer icon is displayed
when Mold Proof operation is active.
c Centralized Control
• Displayed when under centralized
l
management.
Information screen d Operation mode
• Displays the current operation mode.
m
e Ventilation mode
q 12:34 n f Room temperature
• Displays the current room temperature.
o
g Setback
• Blinks during setback operation.
A3-01 (Unit 00) p • Displayed during setback setting.
Icon view h Bluetooth*
• Indicates that the controller is
m communicating with a mobile
q device, for use with the app.
12:34 n
30 ˚C i Changeover Under Control
32 ˚C r • Displayed when controller is unauthorized
1050PPM to select heating/cooling operation.
A3-01 (Unit 00) p j Fahrenheit/Celsius
• Depending on the setting, Fahrenheit/
Sensor view Celsius display can be selected.
User menu/Administrator menu/Installer menu k Air Purifying
l Set temperature
• Displays setpoint temperature.
m Clock (24 hours time display)
s n MAIN/SUB remote controller sign
• : Main controller
: Sub controller
User menu o Status
•
p Error display
• If an error occurs, the icon, an error
s code and unit number are displayed.
q Information icon
r Sensor values
Administrator menu/Installer menu • If there are no sensors, a horizontal
bar (“–”) is displayed.
* The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
s Settings menu icon
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and use of such marks by
Daikin industries, LTD. is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
INFORMATION
Depending on the connected model, some items may not be displayed.
The controller is equipped with a power-saving function that darkens the display if there is no operation for a certain
period of time. To make the screen light up again, press one of the buttons.
Note that pressing one of the buttons will only make the display bright again, not cause remote controller operation.

2.3.5 Information Screen

The functions of the connected indoor unit are displayed as icons.
How to display the information screen
Home screen
Press and hold on the Home screen for 5 seconds.
30 ˚C
28 ˚C
Information screen
Sensor view Icon view The screen switches to the
Information screen.
12:34 12:34 Only displayed when sensor
30 ˚C view is enabled.
32 ˚C When enabled:
1050PPM The screen switches from
A3-01 (Unit 00) the home screen to the
sensor view screen.
When disabled:
The screen switches from
the home screen to the icon
view screen.
How to exit the information screen

Information screen
Sensor view Icon view Press or there is no
button operation for about
12:34 12:34 10 seconds, the screen
30 ˚C returns to the home screen.
32 ˚C Only displayed when sensor
1050PPM view is enabled.
A3-01 (Unit 00) When enabled:
the home screen to the
sensor view screen.
When disabled:
the home screen to the icon
view screen.

About icons on the information screen

The items displayed vary depending on the indoor unit you are using.
Icon Name Description

Information Indicates an information screen.
MAIN/SUB remote Displayed when used as the MAIN/SUB remote controller.

controller 1=main, 2=sub
Bluetooth* Indicates that the controller is communicating with a

mobile device, for use with the app.
Setback Indicates that the indoor unit is operating under setback

conditions.
A function to keep the room comfortable when the a/c is
off by automatically turning on the unit when the
temperature exceeds setback setpoint.
Centralized Control Indicates that the system is controlled by central control
equipment (optional accessory) and that control of the
system by the controller is limited.
Changeover Under Displayed:
Control (VRV only) The remote controller does not have master control.
Unable to select heating/cooling operation.
* Immediately after the start of operation, this icon may not
be displayed on the information screen even if the
remote controller does not have master control. If you
want to check if the remote controller has master control,
confirm on the home screen.
Blinking:
None of the remote controllers in the system have master
control.
Can be set as the master controller during this time.
Not Displayed:
The remote controller has master control.
Able to select heating/cooling operation.
Backup Indicates that backup operation is being carried out.
Energy savings Indicates that the system’s energy consumption is being

limited, and that it is running with restricted capacity.
Test operation Indicates that Test Operation mode is active.
Defrost/Hot start Indicates that the defrost/hot start mode is active.
Self-cleaning filter Indicates that self-cleaning filter operation is active.

operation

Icon Name Description

24-hour ventilation Indicates that 24-hour ventilation is set.
* May not be displayed even if connected to a unit with
this function.
Night purge Indicates that night purge is set.
Ventilating standby Indicates that ventilating operation has been stopped

temporarily. (In order to reduce energy loss, ventilating
operation is stopped immediately after cooling or heating
operation starts).
Ventilating Indicates that ventilating operation is being carried out
operation even when operation is stopped, if 24-hour ventilation and
night purge are set.
Pre Vent (Fresh-up) Indicates that ventilating is being carried out powerfully
due to a large difference in the incoming airflow rate and
exhaust airflow rate.
Outdoor Indicates the type of sensor value.
temperature
Room temperature
Room humidity
Outdoor humidity
CO2 concentration
Warning Indicates that an error occurred, or that an indoor unit

component needs to be maintained.
* The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and use of such marks by Daikin industries, LTD. is under license. Other trademarks and trade
names are those of their respective owners.

2.4 BRC2E61
2.4.1 Button Locations and Descriptions
1. ON/OFF button
2. Operation lamp
(Green)
3. Mode Selector
button
6. Temperature
4. Display (LCD) Setting button
5. Fan Speed Control

button
Adjustment button
1. ON/OFF button 6. Temperature Setting button

• Press this button and the system will start. Press this button to set the temperature.
• Press this button again and the system will
stop. : Each press raises the
set temperature by 1°C
2. Operation lamp (Green)
• This lamp lights up during operation. : Each press lowers the
• This lamp blinks if a malfunction occurs. set temperature by 1°C
The variable temperature range is 16°C to 32°C.
3. Mode Selector button
Press this button to select the operation mode 7. Airflow Direction Adjustment
of your preference. button
• Available modes vary with the connected model.
4. Display (LCD)
• If swing mode is not available on the model
Shows the status and detail of operation. (Duct model for example),
may be displayed for 3 seconds when this
5. Fan Speed Control button button is pressed.
Press this button to select the fan speed of
your preference.

2.4.2 Basic Screen

6
1 7
1. DISPLAY (CHANGEOVER 5. DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE)

UNDER CONTROL) This display shows the set temperature.
It is impossible to changeover Heat/Cool Only given during a Cooling operation or
with the remote controller when it shows Heating operation.
this display.
6. DISPLAY (DEFROST/HOT
2. DISPLAY (OPERATION START)
MODE) Indicates that defrost or hot start (during
This display shows current OPERATION which the fan is stopped until the
MODE. is not available in outdoor temperature of air supply rises enough at
units specially designed for cooling only. the start of a Heating operation) is in
is reserved only for outdoor units progress.
capable of heat recovery.
7. DISPLAY (UNDER CENTRALIZED
3. DISPLAY (MALFUNCTION) CONTROL)
Indicates malfunction and blinks if the unit When this display shows, the system is
stops operating due to malfunction. UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
(This is not a standard specification)
4. DISPLAY (NON FUNCTION
DISPLAY)
If the particular function is not available,
pressing the button may display the
words for a few seconds.
When running multiple units
simultaneously, the message
will only be appear if none of the indoor
units is equipped with the function. If even
on unit is equipped with the function, the
display will not appear.

10
11
12
8 13
8. DISPLAY (UNIT NO. MODE) 11. DISPLAY (AIRFLOW DIRECTION)

During field setting (setting per indoor The display shows when the airflow
unit during group control function), the direction and swing are set. This icon is
display shows the selected unit no. not displayed if the indoor unit does not
have a function to set airflow directions.
9. DISPLAY (VENTILATION/AIR
CLEANING) 12. DISPLAY (TIMER MODE
This display shows that the total heat ON/OFF)
exchange and the air cleaning unit are in The display shows when the timer
operation. (These are optional function of the remote controller is set to
accessories). ON/OFF.
10. DISPLAY (AIRFLOW RATE 13. DISPLAY (GROUP NO.)

[AIRFLOW LEVEL/FAN SPEED]) During field setting, the display shows the
The display shows the airflow rate [Lv.1, mode no. function concerned.
Lv.2, Lv.3, Lv.4, Lv.5 and Auto] that is set
for the indoor unit.
The airflow rate will not be displayed if the
indoor unit does not have airflow rate
control function and the number of
available fan speeds may differ
depending on the indoor unit
specifications.

2.5 BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series

1 ON OFF
8
3 H M L
DOWN 10
C ON OFF
6 UP
TEMP
FAN M L TIME
H
11
4 C
hr. UP
hr. 9 FAN
DOWN
2 13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
5 TIMER 12
TEST hr.
MODE 15
7
SWING 14
TEST 16
TEST
17
DISPLAY (SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

1
This lights up when a signal is being transmitted. 9 Press this button to select the fan speed, HIGH or
LOW, of your choice.
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE) TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
2
This display shows the current OPERATION Use this button for setting temperature (Operates
10
MODE. with the front cover of the remote controller
H•L•M closed.)
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE)
3 ˚C PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
This display shows the set temperature. Use this button for programming start and/or stop
11
DISPLAY (PROGRAMMED TIME) time. (Operates with the front cover of the remote
hr. hr.
4 controller opened.)
This display shows programmed time of the
12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
system start or stop.
13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
5 DISPLAY (AIR FLOW FLAP)
14 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED) OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
6 15
The display shows the set fan speed. Press this button to select operation mode.
DISPLAY TEST (INSPECTION/ TEST) 16 FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
7 When the INSPECTION/TEST button is pressed, INSPECTION/TEST BUTTON
the display shows the system mode is in. 17 This button is used only by qualified service
ON/OFF BUTTON persons for maintenance purposes.
8 Press the button and the system will start. Press
the button again and the system will stop.

2.6 BRC4M, BRC7M Series

2.6.1 Remote Controller
13
2
1
6
3
7 4
8
5
9
10
11
12
18
17
15
14
16 19
20
DISPLAY (SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

1 10
This blinks when a signal is being transmitted. Press this button to select the fan speed.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
DISPLAY (OPERATION MODE) 11
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
2 This display shows the current OPERATION BACKLIGHT BUTTON
MODE. Operation modes supported depend 12
on the model that is connected. Press this button to turn the backlight on or off.
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
DISPLAY NOT AVAILABLE (displayed when 13
operation is not supported) This sends the signals to the indoor unit.
3 When a button for a function that is not PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
supported on the connected model is pressed, 14 Use this button for programming “START and/
this displays for 2 seconds. or STOP” time.
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE) 15 TIMER MODE ON/OFF BUTTON

4 16 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
This display shows the set temperature.
17 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
DISPLAY (PROGRAMMED TIME)
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
5 This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME of
the air conditioner start or stop. Press this button to select OPERATION
18 MODE. (COOLING), (HEATING),
6 DISPLAY (AIRFLOW BLADE) (AUTOMATIC), (FAN),
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED) (PROGRAM DRY).
7
The display shows the set fan speed. FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
DISPLAY (INSPECTION) 19 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in the
When the INSPECTION BUTTON is pressed, operation manual attached to the indoor unit.
8
the display shows the system mode is in. INSPECTION BUTTON
Do not operate this button during normal use. This button is used only by qualified service
20
ON/OFF BUTTON persons for maintenance purposes.
Do not operate this button during normal use.
9 Press the button and the air conditioner will
start. Press the button again and the air
conditioner will stop.

2.6.2 How to Check Initial Set Value

Press the INSPECTION button to check the initial set value.
Press the INSPECTION button twice to return to the normal mode.
Initial set value
Indoor unit model type Initial set value

Round flow cassette with sensing FXFSQ-A 3111
Round flow cassette FXFQ-A 3110
Compact multi flow cassette 2110
FXZQ-B 2111 ()
Double flow cassette FXCQ-B 3110
Single flow cassette FXEQ-A 3130
3D airflow duct with sensing FXDSQ-A 3131
Ceiling suspended FXHQ-B 2010
Wall mounted FXAQ-A 1110
 when sensor kit BRYQ60AAW is installed

2.6.3 How to Change the Initial Set Value

Available functions on the remote controllers are differ according to the indoor unit type applied.
Refer to the following procedure and conduct initial set according to the combination of the
indoor unit.
1. The initial setting indication is displayed at the first time of the battery insertion.
2. Check the model name of the model nameplate, which is stuck on the indoor unit body.
Refer to the aforementioned table to find the corresponding 4-digit initial setting value.
3. Press the SELECT button to change the blinking digit.

4. Press the RESERVE button to determine the blinking digit and move to the right digit.
Press the CANCEL button to move to the left digit.
Press the RESERVE button.
Press the CANCEL button.

blinking
5. The initial set value is determined when the digit at the far right is determined.
Then the screen return to normal mode display.
6. Once the initial setting is determined, the initial setting indication will not be displayed by
battery insertion.
If the current initial setting needs to be reset, insert the battery while pressing the
TEMPERATURE lower button and the MODE button.
After a few seconds of pressing, the initial setting indication is displayed again.

Main/Sub Setting SiMT342301E
3. Main/Sub Setting
Main/Sub setting is necessary when 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers. The
remote controllers are set at factory to Main, so you have to change one remote controller from
Main to Sub. To change a remote controller from Main to Sub, proceed as follows:
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E63, BRC1F61)

3.1.1 Field Settings
The designation of the main and sub remote controllers can be swapped. Note that this change
requires turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Basic screen
is displayed.
Select Main RC or
Press and hold Press the Cancel Sub RC using the
the Cancel button once. / (Up/Down)
button for 4 buttons, and then
seconds or more. press the
Select Switch Main Sub Menu/Enter button.
Controller and press the Press the
Service Menu/Enter button. Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is Item 2 is
settings menu displayed. displayed.
Press the Cancel button.
is displayed.
3.1.2 When an Error Occurred

U5: there are 2 main remote controllers when power is turned ON
Change the setting from Main to Sub on the remote controller you want to be Sub.
U8: there are 2 sub remote controllers when power is turned ON
Change the setting from Sub to Main on the remote controller you want to be Main.
How to confirm Main/Sub setting

The Main/Sub setting of the remote controller is displayed on the bottom of the screen while
Checking the connection. Please stand by. is displayed.
Checking the connection.

Please stand by.
Confirm the remote controller
Main/Sub setting after power
Main RC
is turned ON.
How to change Main/Sub setting

You may change the Main/Sub setting of the remote controller while Checking the connection.
Please stand by. is displayed by pressing and holding the Mode Selector button for 4 seconds
or longer.
Error Code: U5
Checking the connection. Checking the connection.
Please stand by. Please stand by. Fan
Press and hold for 4 seconds
or longer the Mode Selector
button of sub remote
Main RC Sub RC
controller side.
Note(s) 1. It is not possible to change the Main/Sub setting from Main to Sub when only one remote
controller is connected.
2. When 2 remote controllers are being used, it is not possible to change the setting from Main
to Sub if one of the remote controllers is already set as Main.

SiMT342301E Main/Sub Setting
3.2 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1H62 Series)

3.2.1 Main and Sub Controller
b
a Outdoor unit
b Indoor unit
a c Main remote controller
c d d Sub remote controller
• On the information screen, main/sub status is indicated by the following icons:
Icon Description
Main
Sub
INFORMATION
It is only possible to use a main and a sub controller of the same type.
INFORMATION
When digital input adapter BRP7A5* is part of the system, it is not possible to connect a second
controller. Connecting a second controller when the system already contains the adapter will cause
the adapter to go into error mode.
INFORMATION
If a sub controller does not display the home screen 2 minutes after its designation, turn off the power
and check the wiring.
INFORMATION
After re-designating a controller, the system requires a power reset.
INFORMATION
The following functions are not available for sub controllers:
• “Auto” operation mode
• Individual airflow direction
• Filter auto clean
• Setback temperature setpoints
• Draft prevention

Main/Sub Setting SiMT342301E
3.2.2 Designating a Controller as Main or Sub

Prerequisite: A remote controller is already connected to the indoor unit.
Connect a second controller.

After turning on the power, perform setting of the second controller.
Result: It will start up automatically.
Home screen
Wait for a U5 or U8 error code to appear on the screen.
U5 Screen display explanation
1 main
1 2 sub
Home screen
When the U5 error code appears, press and hold until
“2” appears on the screen.
When the U8 error code appears, press and hold until
2 “1” appears on the screen.
Result:
A controller displaying 1 is set as main, and a controller
displaying 2 is set as sub.
INFORMATION
If sub remote controller is not set at power-on in the case of one indoor unit controlled by two remote
controllers, Error Code: U5 is displayed in the connection checking screen.
If the sub remote controller does not display the home screen two minutes after its designation, turn
off the power and check the wiring.
3.3 Wired Remote Controller (BRC2E61)

Step Action
Insert a screwdriver in the recess of lower case to remove the upper case (2 points).
Remote controller PCB is installed Upper case

on the upper case.
1 Take care not to damage the PCB Screwdriver
with the screwdriver.
Lower case
Take care that dust or moisture does Insert and twist the
not touch the PCB. screwdriver lightly for removal.
Be sure to set the sub remote controller by changing the SS1 switch on the side of the PCB from the
MASTER to the SLAVE position.
SS1 MASTER
SS1 MASTER
2
(1)
SS1 MASTER
(2)
SLAVE
SLAVE
SLAVE
(1) Factory set: MASTER (2) Move to SLAVE

SiMT342301E Main/Sub Setting
3.4 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together

When using both a wired and a wireless remote controller for 1 indoor unit, the wired controller
should be set to Main. Therefore, the Main/Sub switch (SS1) of the signal receiver PCB must be
set to Sub.
Main/Sub Main Sub
Main/Sub switch S S
(SS1) M M
The side painted black indicates

the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2

Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller SiMT342301E
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller

If setting multiple wireless remote controllers to operate in one room, perform address setting
for the receiver and the wireless remote controller.
(This includes an individual remote controller control using the group operation.)
(For the wiring for the group operation, please refer to the installation manual attached to the
indoor unit and technical guide.)
4.1 Setting for Signal Receiver PCB

The address for the receiver is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting, set the wireless
address switch (SS2) on the signal receiver PCB according to the table below.
Unit No. No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
3
Wireless address 3
3
switch (SS2)
2
2
2
1
1
1
The side painted black indicates
the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2

SiMT342301E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
4.2 Setting for BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series

The address for the wireless remote controller is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Press FILTER SIGN RESET button and INSPECTION/TEST button at the same time for 4
seconds to enter field setting mode. (SETTING is indicated on the display.)
2. Press FAN button and select A or b. Each time the button is pressed, the display switches
between A and b.
3. Press UP button or DOWN button to select an address from 1-3 as same as the receiver.
Address can be set from 1-6, but the receiver does not work with addresses 4-6.
4. Press RESERVE button to confirm the setting.

5. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 1 second to return to normal mode.
UP button
Field setting mode DOWN button
FAN button
RESERVE button
Address
Multiple setting
FILTER SIGN RESET button
INSPECTION/TEST button

Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller SiMT342301E
4.3 Setting for BRC4M, BRC7M Series

The address for the wireless remote controller is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Press the FILTER SIGN RESET button and the INSPECTION button for at least 4 seconds
to enter the Field Setting mode.
(SETTING is indicated on the display.)
2. Press the SELECT button and select a multiple setting (A/b). Each time the button is
pressed the display switches between A and b.
3. Press the TEMP buttons to set the address.
Address can be set from 1 to 6, but set it to 1-3 and to the same address as the receiver.
(The receiver does not work with address 4-6.)
4. When the RESERVE button is pressed, the setting is confirmed and the usual display
returns.
Address
Multiple setting
2
4

SiMT342301E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
4.4 Multiple Settings A/b

The command such as operation mode or temperature setting by this remote controller will be
rejected when the target indoor unit operation is restricted as by an external control such as
centralized control.
Since the setting acceptance is hard to discriminate with such circumstances there are two
setting options provided to enable discriminating by a beeping sound according to the operation:
“A: Standard” or “b: Multi System”. Set the setting according to the customer's intention.
Remote Controller Indoor Unit
Multiple Display on Behavior to the remote controller operation Other than the left
setting remote controller when the functions are restricted as by an
external control.
A: Standard All items Accepts the functions except restricted. Accepts all items
(factory set) displayed. (Sounds one long beep or three short transmitted (Sounds two
beeps) short beeps)
There may be a difference from the indoor The remote controller
unit status with remote controller display. display agrees with the
indoor unit status.
b: Multi Display only <When some restricted functions are
System items included in the transmitted items>
transmitted for a Accepts the functions except restricted.
while. (Sounds one long beep or three short
beeps)
There may be a difference from the indoor
unit status with remote controller display.
<When no restricted function is

included>
Accepts all items transmitted (Sounds two
short beeps)
The remote controller display agrees with
the indoor unit status.

Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiMT342301E
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting

5.1 BRC1E63, BRC1F61
Group No. Setting (Group)
Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Service Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Group) button once.
and then press
the Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
Note: the / (Up/Down) button.
This menu appears only when a buttons, and then
centralized controller is connected. press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Group No. Setting (Unit)

Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Service Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Unit) button once.
and then press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
the / (Up/Down) button.
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.

SiMT342301E Centralized Control Group No. Setting
5.2 BRC1H62 Series

Group Address
• Assign the group address and unit number for centralized control.
• The group and unit address can only be set when a centralized controller is connected.
This menu is only visible when a centralized controller is connected.
• The group and unit address can be “set” and “released”.
NOTICE
Don’t forget to release the group address before disconnecting the centralized controller because the
menu will not be accessible afterwards.
For BRC1H series, group address setting cannot be set via the remote controller. Please set the
group address setting via smartphone application as follows.
- Installer setting - Installer setting - Installer setting
- RC settings - RC settings - RC settings
- Maintenance - Maintenance - Maintenance
Main Group
Set the indoor unit group address. Set the group address on a per-
After all settings are complete, press group basis.
the “Send to RC” button. * Set a group address only for the MAIN
unit.
Unit
Set the group address on a per-unit
basis.
Force operation of the fan of the unit

number whose icon has been tapped.
You can confirm the location of the
device on which you are performing
You can switch between setting the
settings.
indoor unit group address for each
group, or for each unit.

Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiMT342301E

Group No. setting by wireless remote controller for centralized control
1. When in the normal mode, press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds or more to enter
field setting mode.
2. Set mode No. 00 with MODE button.
3. Set the group No. for each group with UP button or DOWN button.
4. Enter the selected group numbers by pressing RESERVE button.
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST button and return to the normal mode.
UP button
Mode No.
RESERVE button
MODE button
Group No.
INSPECTION/TEST
button
5.4 Group No. Setting Example
Central Remote
Controller
Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor
F1 F2
F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
Group Control by Remote Controller
1-00 Main RC RC Sub RC
(automatic unit address)
1-01 1-02
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
No Remote Controller
RC
1-03
1-04
Caution When turning the power supply on, the unit may often not accept any operation while 88 is
displaying after all indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal
display. This is not an operative fault.

SiMT342301E Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu

6.1 BRC1E63
Operating the remote controller allows service data to be acquired and various services to be
set.
Basic
screen is
displayed.
Press and
hold the Press the Cancel
Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds Select an item from Service Select the desired item from
or more. settings menu and press the Item 2 sub menu, and
Menu/Enter button. press Menu/Enter button.
Service
Press the Item 2 is Item 3 is
settings menu
Cancel displayed. displayed.
is displayed. Press Cancel button. Press Cancel button.
button.
Press and
hold the
Cancel button
for 4 seconds
or more. Select the desired item from the
Maintenance menu, and then Select the desired Unit No.
Maintenance press the Menu/Enter button. using the / (Up/Down)
Item 2 is
menu is buttons. The corresponding
displayed. data will be displayed.
displayed. Press the Cancel button.

Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu SiMT342301E
6.1.1 Service Settings Menu

Service settings menu Item 2 Remarks
Test Operation — —
Maintenance Contact None —
Maintenance Contact —, 0 to 9 (in order)
Field Settings Indoor Unit No. —
Mode No. —
First Code No. —
Second Code No. —
Demand Enable/Disable Enable, Disable
Settings 40%, 70%
Start time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Ending time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Min setpoints Differential None, Single SP, 0 to 8°C —
Group Address Group Address (Group) Gr Addr. Set
Group Address (Unit) Unit No., Gr Addr. Set
Indoor unit Airnet Address Unit No., Address Set —
Outdoor unit Airnet Address Unit No., Address Set —
Error History RC Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 10 errors received by the remote
controller can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 5 errors from the indoor unit error
record can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Status Unit No. —
Th1 Suction air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
Th3 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor
Th4 Discharge air thermistor
Th5 —
Th6 —
Outdoor Unit Status Unit No. —
Th1 Outdoor air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
Th3 Discharge pipe thermistor
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Forced Fan ON Unit No. —
Switch Main Sub controller — —
Filter Indicator — —
Test Filter Auto Clean — —
Brush / Filter Ind — —
Disable Filter Auto Clean No, Yes —

6.1.2 Maintenance Menu

Maintenance Item 2 Remarks
Menu
Model Name Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Indoor unit The model names are displayed.
(A model code may be displayed instead, depending on
Outdoor unit the particular model.)
R-32 mark display —
Operation Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Hours
Indoor unit operation hours All of these are displayed in hours.
Indoor fan operation hours
Indoor unit energized hours
Outdoor unit operation hours
Outdoor fan 1 operation hours
Outdoor fan 2 operation hours
Outdoor compressor 1
operation hours
Outdoor compressor 2
operation hours
Indoor Unit Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Status
FAN Fan tap
Speed Fan speed (rpm)
FLAP Airflow direction
EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
MP Drain pump ON/OFF
EH Electric heater ON/OFF
Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
TBF Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
FLOAT FLOAT SWITCH ON/OFF
T1/T2 T1/T2 input from outside ON/OFF
Th1 Suction air thermistor 1
Th2 Indoor liquid pipe thermistor
Th3 Indoor gas pipe thermistor
Th4 Discharge air thermistor 2
Th5 Infrared floor sensor 3
Th6 Control temperature 4
Outdoor Unit Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Status
FAN step Fan tap
COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
Pe Low pressure (MPa)
Pc High pressure (MPa)
Th1 —
Th2 —
Th3 —
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Error Display Display error ON Displays the error on the screen.
Display error OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
Display warning ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error occurs.
Display warning OFF No warning is displayed.
Swap Unit Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
No.
Transfer Unit No.

Maintenance
Item 2 Remarks
Menu
Addressed Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the unit number you want to check.
Sensor
Value Code
00: Remote controller thermistor (°C)
01: Suction air thermistor (°C) 5
02: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (°C)
03: Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (°C)
04: Indoor unit address No.
05: Outdoor unit address No.
06: BS unit address No.
07: Zone control address No.
08: Cooling/Heating batch address No.
09: Demand/low-noise address No.
22: Displays presence detection rate (%) (see 7) in Area 1
(see 6). Display value × 10%. Displays 15 for units with
no sensing type mounted.
26: Infrared sensor (°C) (See 8). Displays – for units with
Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based on the
Unit No. and Code selected.
1: Displays suction air temperature after correction for all models.
2: Displays temperature only for applicable models.
3: Displays floor temperature used for control (including correction) when the sensor kit is
connected.
4: Displays control temperature (temperature near the person when the sensor kit is
connected).
5: Displays suction air temperature after correction when the sensor kit is connected.
6: Areas mean four areas shown on the below.
7: For presence detection rate (%), human motion is recognized by digital output ranging from
0 to 5 V. (5 V is output when no presence is detected, and 0 V is output when presence is
detected.)
4
1 3
2
Detection areas of presence sensor
(Corresponding to the punched mark
80 cm above the floor on the inner frame of the panel:
~)
Reference
(1) 0% detection rate: Presence is not detected at all.
(2) 25% detection rate: Presence is detected, but the sensor does not recognize presence.
(3) 50% detection rate: The sensor recognizes presence (small motion).
(4) 75% detection rate: The sensor recognizes presence (large motion).
(5) 100% detection rate: The sensor constantly outputs 0 V. Continuing this condition will
display an error.
8: Directly displays a measured value sent from the adaptor PCB.

6.2 BRC2E61
Reference Refer to page 155 for the field setting.
6.2.1 Service Mode 1

[Mode No. 40 to 47]
[Field setting mode screen]
(1) At the field setting mode screen press

and hold both the Mode Selector
button ( ) and the Temperature
Setting (down) button ( ) for 4
seconds or longer. Service setting
Press and hold mode 1 menu is displayed.
2 buttons for
4 seconds or longer.
[Service mode 1 screen]
(2) Same as the field setting mode, select

the desired “Mode No.”, by pressing
the Airflow Direction Adjustment button
( ).
(3) After all setting changes are

completed, press both the Mode
Selector button ( ) and the
Temperature Setting (down) button ( )
for 1 second to return to the basic
screen.

6.2.2 Service Mode 2

[Mode No. 50 to 59]
(1) At service mode 1 screen press and

hold both the Mode Selector button
( ) and the Temperature Setting
(down) button ( ) for 4 seconds or
longer. Service setting mode 2 menu is
Press and hold displayed.
2 buttons for
4 seconds or longer.
(2) Same as the field setting mode, select
the desired “Mode No.”, by pressing
( ).
(3) After all setting changes are

completed, press both the Mode
Temperature Setting (down) button
( ) for 1 second to return to the basic
screen.
[Service mode 2 screen] (4) If you want to control Mode No. 60 to

65 at the service mode 2 screen, press
and hold the Mode Selector button ( ) ,
the Fan Speed Control button ( ) and
the Temperature Setting (up) button
( ) simultaneously for 4 seconds or
Press and hold longer.
3 buttons for (3 buttons total).
4 seconds or longer. Service setting mode 3 menu is
displayed.
(5) You can change the Mode No. up to
65 by pressing the Airflow Direction
Adjustment button ( ) only after
carrying out procedure (4).

Mode number
UP button
DOWN button
RESERVE button
MODE button
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter field setting
mode.
2. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds to enter service mode.
3. Press MODE buttons to select a desired mode number. (43, 44, 45)
4. Carry out the necessary setting for each mode with UP button or DOWN button.
5. Press RESERVE button to confirm the setting.
6. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to return to normal mode.
Mode Function Content and Operation Method Example of Remote Controller Display
No.
43 Forced Fan Turns the fan ON for each unit
ON individually.
44 Individual Sets fan speed and airflow

Setting direction for each unit individually
when using group control.
Settings are made using the airflow
direction adjustment and fan speed
adjustment buttons.
45 Unit No. Changes unit No.

Change
Set the unit No. after changing with
the programming time up-down
button.

Administrator Menu, Installer Menu SiMT342301E
7. Administrator Menu, Installer Menu

7.1 BRC1H62 Series
Refer to page 80 for details.

SiMT342301E
Part 4
Functions and Control
1. Operation Flowchart............................................................................113
2. Stop Control ........................................................................................114
2.1 Stop due to Error ..................................................................................114
2.2 When System is in Stop Control...........................................................114
2.3 Sub Unit Stops during Master Unit Control ..........................................114
3. Standby Control ..................................................................................115
3.1 Restart Standby....................................................................................115
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control....................................................................115
4. Startup Control ....................................................................................116
4.1 Startup Control in Cooling ....................................................................116
4.2 Startup Control in Heating ....................................................................116
5. Basic Control.......................................................................................117
5.1 Normal Control .....................................................................................117
5.2 Compressor PI Control.........................................................................118
5.3 Compressor Step Control.....................................................................119
5.4 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control.................................................123
5.5 Step Control of Outdoor Unit Fans .......................................................124
6. Protection Control ...............................................................................125
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control.........................................................125
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control..........................................................126
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .......................................................126
6.4 Inverter Protection Control ...................................................................127
7. Special Control....................................................................................128
7.1 Pump Down Residual Control ..............................................................128
7.2 Oil Return Operation ............................................................................129
7.3 Defrost Operation .................................................................................131
7.4 Outdoor Unit Rotation...........................................................................132
8. Other Control.......................................................................................133
8.1 Backup Operation.................................................................................133
8.2 Heating Operation Prohibition ..............................................................133
9. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) ...........................................................134
9.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature..............................134
9.2 Thermostat Control...............................................................................135
9.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ............................................................138
9.4 Airflow Direction Control.......................................................................139
9.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A only) ....................140
9.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A only).......................140
9.7 Drain Pump Control..............................................................................141
9.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control..............................................................143
9.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ................................................144
9.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................145
9.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A only)....146
Part 4 Functions and Control 111

SiMT342301E
9.12 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)......................................147

9.13 Heater Control ......................................................................................148
9.14 Streamer Operation..............................................................................148
112 Part 4 Functions and Control

SiMT342301E Operation Flowchart
1. Operation Flowchart
For detailed description of each function in the flow below, refer to the details on related function
on the following pages.
Stop control
(1) Stop due to error
(2) When system is in stop control
(3) Sub unit stops during master unit control
Special control
Standby control
(1) Restart standby
(2) Crankcase heater control
(1) Pump down residual operation
Thermostat ON
Thermostat OFF
Startup control
(include pressure equalization before startup)
(1) Startup control in cooling
(2) Startup control in heating
Thermostat OFF
Abnormality
End of
startup
control
Basic control
(1) Normal control
(2) Compressor PI control Conditions met for oil return
(3) Operation priority and rotation of (2) Oil return operation (note 1)
compressors End of oil return operation
(4) Compressor step control
(5) Electronic expansion valve PI control
(6) Step control of outdoor fans Conditions met for defrosting
(3) Defrost operation (note 1)
Protection control End of defrost operation
(1) High pressure protection control
(2) Low pressure protection control Conditions met for outdoor unit rotation
(3) Discharge pipe protection control (4) Outdoor unit rotation
(4) Inverter protection control
End of outdoor unit rotation
Note(s) 1. If the indoor unit stops or the thermostat turns OFF while in oil return operation or defrost
operation, pump down residual operation is performed on completion of the oil return
operation or defrost operation.

Stop Control SiMT342301E
2. Stop Control
2.1 Stop due to Error
In order to protect compressors, if any of the abnormal state occurs, the system will make stop
with thermostat OFF and the error will be determined according to the number of retry times.
(Refer to Error Codes and Descriptions on page 236 for the items to determine the error.)
2.2 When System is in Stop Control

The four way valves retain the condition (ON) when heating operation is stopped.
2.3 Sub Unit Stops during Master Unit Control

When sub unit is stopped (because of low demand), conditions for this units are set same as
system stop. System stops until this unit is required to operate (increase of load).

SiMT342301E Standby Control
3. Standby Control
3.1 Restart Standby
Used to forcedly stop the compressor for a period of 2 minutes, in order to prevent the frequent
ON/OFF of the compressor and equalize the pressure within the refrigerant system.
In addition, the outdoor fan carry out the residual operation for a while to accelerate pressure
equalizing and to suppress migration of the refrigerant to the evaporator.
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control

In order to prevent the refrigerant from migrating into the compressor oil while not operating,
outdoor air temperature, compressor body temperature, etc., are used to control the crankcase
heater.
HTdi_stop: HTdi value measured while the compressor is stopped
• Ta > 23.5°C
& • HTdi_stop – Ta ≤ 10°C
• (Ti – 10) – Ta ≤ 10°C
• 18.5°C < Ta ≤ 23.5°C
& • HTdi_stop ≤ 33.5°C
OR • (Ti – 10) ≤ 33.5°C
• Ta ≤ 18.5°C
& • HTdi_stop – Ta ≤ 15°C
• (Ti – 10) – Ta ≤ 15°C
• Ta ≤ 10°C
Crankcase heater OFF Crankcase heater ON
Compressor operates

Startup Control SiMT342301E
4. Startup Control
This control is used to equalize the pressure in the suction and discharge sides of the
compressor prior to the startup of the compressor, thus reducing startup loads. Furthermore, the
inverter is turned ON to charge the capacitor.
To avoid stresses to the compressor due to liquid refrigerant return or else after the startup, the
following control is made and the position of the four way valve is also determined. Start both
the master and the sub units simultaneously to position the four way valve.
DSH: Discharge pipe superheating degree
Pc: High pressure sensor detection value
Pe: Low pressure sensor detection value
Ta: Outdoor air temperature
4.1 Startup Control in Cooling

Rotation speed step up
5 sec. interval
E
D
C
B
A
0 rps
Compressor motor
(M1C) (M2C) 3,000 pulse (fully open)
0 pulse
Electronic expansion
valve (Y1E) (Y6E)
Ta < 20°C: OFF +1 step/15 sec. (Pc > 2.16 MPa)
Step 4 Ta ≥ 20°C: Step 4 –1 step/15 sec. (Pc < 1.77 MPa)
Fan motor
(M1F + M2F)
Pc – Pe > 0.17 MPa EV indoor opening

OR
Tcmax > 48°C
4.2 Startup Control in Heating

Rotation speed step up
5 sec. interval
E
D
C +F/10 sec.
B
A A
0 rps
Compressor motor
(M1C) (M2C) Initial PI control
opening
0 pulse
valve (Y1E) (Y6E) Maximum step
Step 1
Fan motor
(M1F + M2F)
Pc – Pe > 0.17 MPa Pcmax > 2.45 MPa
Frequency RXYQ14/16B RXYQ18/20B RXYQ22/24B

RXYQ8B RXYQ10/12B
(rps) M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C
A 26 15 26 26 26 15 15 15
B 37 23 37 37 37 23 23 23
C 45 28 45 45 45 28 28 28
D 60 37.3 60 60 60 37.3 37.3 37.3
E 82 51.4 82 82 82 51.4 51.4 51.4
F 10 6.2 5 5 3.8 3.8 6.8 6.8

SiMT342301E Basic Control
5. Basic Control
5.1 Normal Control
Function
Part name Electric symbol
Normal cooling Normal heating
Compressor motor PI control, High pressure protection, PI control, High pressure protection,
M1C, M2C Low pressure protection, Td protection, Low pressure protection, Td protection,
Inverter protection Inverter protection
Fan motor M1F, M2F Cooling fan control Maximum step
Electronic expansion valve Subcooling degree control Superheating degree control
Y1E
(Heat exchanger main) (Subcooling degree control in low load)
Electronic expansion valve Subcooling degree control (0 pulse in Superheating degree control (0 pulse in
Y6E
(Heat exchanger sub) low load) low load)
Electronic expansion valve Cooling refrigerant control Cooling refrigerant control
(Refrigerant cooling IPM) Y2E
Electronic expansion valve Superheating degree control (discharge Superheating degree control (discharge
Y3E
(Subcooling heat exchanger) pipe protection) pipe protection)
Electronic expansion valve Minimum pulse Minimum pulse
Y4E
Electronic expansion valve Cooling refrigerant control Cooling refrigerant control
(Refrigerant cooling air) Y5E
Solenoid valve ON ON
Y1S, Y2S
Solenoid valve (Hot gas ON OFF
Y3S
bypass)
Solenoid valve ON ON
(Accumulator oil return) Y4S
Solenoid valve OFF ON

Y5S
(Four way valve)

Basic Control SiMT342301E
5.2 Compressor PI Control

In order to provide a steady capacity, the compressor capacity is controlled to achieve
temperature Te (or Tc) during cooling (or heating) operation.
During cooling (or heating) operation
The compressor capacity is controlled so Te (or Tc) approaches TeS (or TcS) (target value of
temperature).
1. VRTsmart Control
 When all the connected indoor units are VRTsmart control applicable models
The required capacity is calculated based on the operation condition of each individual indoor
unit and this data is transmitted to the outdoor unit. The outdoor unit adjusts the refrigerant
temperature of the whole system to an adequate value according to the indoor unit that needs
the most capacity.
In case of target evaporation (or condensation) temperature adjustment, first the capacity is
adjusted by changing the indoor unit airflow to L tap. If the capacity is still too much, the target
evaporation (or condensation) temperature is elevated further to adjust.
2. VRT Control
 When one or more of the connected indoor units are not VRTsmart control applicable
models
If the required capacity becomes low (or high) in all indoor units (Room temperature Th1 - set
temperature), the target evaporation (or condensation) temperature is elevated further to adjust.
In the outdoor unit, the difference of temperature (∆T) in all indoor units is checked and the set
temperature is changed. Unlike VRTsmart control, there is no airflow control of the indoor units.
3. Te fix Control (for cooling)

The target evaporation temperature is not changed.
Te value (Set in mode 2-8)
Standard
(Factory setting) High
6 7 8 9 10 11
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TeS: Te target value (varies according to Te setting, compressor operation frequency, etc.)
4. Tc fix Control (for heating)

The target condensation temperature is not changed.
Tc value (Set in mode 2-9)
High
Low Standard
(Factory setting)
41 43 46
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
TcS: Tc target value (varies according to Tc setting)

5.3 Compressor Step Control

The compressor operation varies in the following steps according to information in Compressor
PI Control on page 118.
Depending on the operating conditions of compressors, the compressors may run in patterns
other than the following.
RXYQ8B RXYQ10/12B
Step Step Step Step Step Step
rps rps rps rps rps rps
No. No. No. No. No. No.
1 15.0 67 37.5 133 93.9 1 15.0 67 39.9 133 99.9
2 15.2 68 38.0 134 95.2 2 15.2 68 40.5 134 101.3
3 15.4 69 38.6 135 96.6 3 15.4 69 41.0 135 102.7
4 15.6 70 39.1 136 97.9 4 15.6 70 41.6 136 104.2
5 15.8 71 39.7 137 99.3 5 15.9 71 42.2 137 105.6
6 16.0 72 40.2 138 100.7 6 16.2 72 42.8 138 107.1
7 16.2 73 40.8 139 102.1 7 16.5 73 43.4 139 108.6
8 16.4 74 41.3 140 103.5 8 16.8 74 44.0 140 110.1
9 16.7 75 41.9 141 105.0 9 17.1 75 44.6 141 111.7 ←RXYQ10B Cooling upper limit
10 16.9 76 42.5 142 106.4 10 17.4 76 45.2 142 113.2
11 17.2 77 43.1 143 107.9 11 17.7 77 45.8 143 114.8
12 17.4 78 43.7 144 109.4 12 18.0 78 46.5 144 117.9
13 17.7 79 44.3 145 111.0 13 18.3 79 47.1 145 118.0
14 17.9 80 44.9 146 112.5 14 18.6 80 47.8 146 119.7 ←RXYQ10B Heating upper limit
15 18.2 81 45.6 147 114.1 15 19.0 81 48.5 147 121.4
16 18.4 82 46.2 148 115.7 16 19.4 82 49.1 148 123.1 ←RXYQ12B Cooling upper limit
17 18.7 83 46.9 149 117.3 17 19.8 83 49.8 149 124.8
18 18.9 84 47.5 150 119.0 18 20.1 84 50.5 150 127.3
19 19.2 85 48.2 151 120.6 19 20.5 85 51.2 151 128.3
20 19.4 86 48.8 152 122.3 20 20.7 86 52.0 152 130.1 ←RXYQ12B Heating upper limit
21 19.7 87 49.5 153 124.0 21 21.0 87 52.7
22 20.0 88 50.2 154 125.8 22 21.3 88 53.4
23 20.3 89 50.9 155 127.5 23 21.6 89 54.2
24 20.6 90 51.6 156 129.3 24 21.9 90 54.9
25 20.9 91 52.3 157 131.1 25 22.2 91 55.7
26 21.2 92 53.1 158 133.0 26 22.5 92 56.5
27 21.5 93 53.8 159 134.8 27 22.9 93 57.3
28 21.8 94 54.6 160 136.7 28 23.2 94 58.1
29 22.1 95 55.3 161 138.6 29 23.5 95 58.9
30 22.4 96 56.1 30 23.8 96 59.7
31 22.7 97 56.9 31 24.2 97 60.5
32 23.0 98 57.7 32 24.5 98 61.4
33 23.3 99 58.5 33 24.9 99 62.3
34 23.6 100 59.3 34 25.2 100 63.1
35 24.0 101 60.1 35 25.5 101 64.0
36 24.3 102 61.0 36 25.9 102 64.9
37 24.7 103 61.8 37 26.3 103 65.8
38 25.0 104 62.7 38 26.6 104 66.8
39 25.4 105 63.6 39 27.0 105 67.7
40 25.7 106 64.5 40 27.4 106 68.6
41 26.1 107 65.4 41 27.8 107 69.6
42 26.4 108 66.3 42 28.1 108 70.6
43 26.8 109 67.2 43 28.5 109 71.6
44 27.2 110 68.2 44 29.0 110 72.6
45 27.6 111 69.1 45 29.4 111 73.6
46 28.0 112 70.1 46 29.8 112 74.6
47 28.4 113 71.1 47 30.2 113 75.7
48 28.8 114 72.1 48 30.6 114 76.7
49 29.2 115 73.1 49 31.0 115 77.8
50 29.6 116 74.1 50 31.5 116 78.9
51 30.0 117 75.1 51 31.9 117 80.0
52 30.4 118 76.2 52 32.4 118 81.1
53 30.8 119 77.2 53 32.8 119 82.2
54 31.3 120 78.3 54 33.3 120 83.4
55 31.7 121 79.4 55 33.8 121 84.5
56 32.2 122 80.5 56 34.2 122 85.7
57 32.6 123 81.7 57 34.7 123 86.9
58 33.1 124 82.8 58 35.2 124 88.1
59 33.5 125 84.0 59 35.7 125 89.4
60 34.0 126 85.2 60 36.2 126 90.6
61 34.5 127 86.4 61 36.7 127 91.9
62 35.0 128 87.6 62 37.2 128 93.2
63 35.5 129 88.8 63 37.7 129 94.5
64 36.0 130 90.1 64 38.3 130 95.8
65 36.5 131 91.3 65 38.8 131 97.2
66 37.0 132 92.6 66 39.3 132 98.5

RXYQ14/16B
Step Step up (rps) Step down (rps) Step Step up (rps) Step down (rps) Step Step up (rps) Step down (rps)
No. M1C M2C M1C M2C No. M1C M2C M1C M2C No. M1C M2C M1C M2C
1 15.0 0.0 15.0 0.0 76 22.5 25.1 22.5 25.1 151 63.9 71.3 63.9 71.3
2 15.3 0.0 15.3 0.0 77 22.8 25.5 22.8 25.5 152 64.8 72.3 64.8 72.3
3 15.7 0.0 15.7 0.0 78 23.1 25.8 23.1 25.8 153 65.7 73.3 65.7 73.3
4 16.0 0.0 16.0 0.0 79 23.5 26.2 23.5 26.2 154 65.6 74.4 65.6 74.4
5 16.4 0.0 16.4 0.0 80 23.8 26.5 23.8 26.5 155 66.5 75.4 66.5 75.4
6 16.7 0.0 16.7 0.0 81 24.2 26.9 24.2 26.9 156 67.4 76.5 67.4 76.5
7 17.1 0.0 17.1 0.0 82 24.5 27.3 24.5 27.3 157 68.4 77.5 68.4 77.5
8 17.4 0.0 17.4 0.0 83 24.8 27.7 24.8 27.7 158 69.3 78.6 69.3 78.6
9 17.8 0.0 17.8 0.0 84 25.2 28.1 25.2 28.1 159 70.3 79.7 70.3 79.7
10 18.1 0.0 18.1 0.0 85 25.5 28.5 25.5 28.5 160 71.3 80.8 71.3 80.8
11 18.5 0.0 18.5 0.0 86 25.9 28.9 25.9 28.9 161 72.3 82.0 72.3 82.0
12 18.8 0.0 18.8 0.0 87 26.2 29.3 26.2 29.3 162 73.3 83.1 73.3 83.1
13 19.2 0.0 19.2 0.0 88 26.6 29.7 26.6 29.7 163 74.3 84.3 74.3 84.3
14 19.5 0.0 19.5 0.0 89 27.0 30.1 27.0 30.1 164 75.4 85.5 75.4 85.5
15 19.9 0.0 19.9 0.0 90 27.4 30.5 27.4 30.5 165 76.4 86.7 76.4 86.7
16 20.2 0.0 20.2 0.0 91 27.8 30.9 27.8 30.9 166 77.5 87.9 77.5 87.9
17 20.6 0.0 20.6 0.0 92 28.1 31.4 28.1 31.4 167 78.6 89.1 78.6 89.1
18 20.9 0.0 20.9 0.0 93 28.5 31.8 28.5 31.8 168 79.7 90.4 79.7 90.4
19 21.3 0.0 21.3 0.0 94 28.9 32.3 28.9 32.3 169 80.8 91.6 80.8 91.6
20 21.6 0.0 21.6 0.0 95 29.3 32.7 29.3 32.7 170 81.9 92.9 81.9 92.9
21 22.0 0.0 22.0 0.0 96 29.7 33.2 29.7 33.2 171 83.1 94.2 83.1 94.2
22 22.3 0.0 22.3 0.0 97 30.2 33.6 30.2 33.6 172 84.2 95.5 84.2 95.5
23 22.7 0.0 22.7 0.0 98 30.6 34.1 30.6 34.1 173 85.4 96.9 85.4 96.9
24 23.0 0.0 23.0 0.0 99 31.0 34.6 31.0 34.6 174 86.6 98.2 86.6 98.2
25 23.4 0.0 23.4 0.0 100 31.4 35.1 31.4 35.1 175 87.8 99.6 87.8 99.6
26 23.7 0.0 23.7 0.0 101 31.9 35.6 31.9 35.6 176 89.0 101.0 89.0 101.0
27 24.1 0.0 24.1 0.0 102 32.3 36.1 32.3 36.1 177 90.3 102.4 90.3 102.4
28 24.4 0.0 24.4 0.0 103 32.8 36.6 32.8 36.6 178 91.5 103.9 91.5 103.9
29 24.8 0.0 24.8 0.0 104 33.2 37.1 33.2 37.1 179 92.8 105.3 92.8 105.3
30 25.1 0.0 25.1 0.0 105 33.7 37.6 33.7 37.6 180 94.1 106.8 94.1 106.8
31 25.5 0.0 25.5 0.0 106 34.2 38.1 34.2 38.1 181 95.5 108.3 95.5 108.3
32 25.8 0.0 25.8 0.0 107 34.6 38.7 34.6 38.7 182 96.8 109.8 96.8 109.8
33 26.2 0.0 26.2 0.0 108 35.1 39.2 35.1 39.2 183 98.1 111.3 98.1 111.3
34 26.5 0.0 26.5 0.0 109 35.6 39.8 35.6 39.8 184 99.5 112.9 99.5 112.9
35 26.9 0.0 26.9 0.0 110 36.1 40.3 36.1 40.3 185 100.9 114.5 100.9 114.5
36 27.3 0.0 27.3 0.0 111 36.6 40.9 36.6 40.9 186 102.3 116.1 102.3 116.1
37 27.7 0.0 27.7 0.0 112 37.2 41.4 37.2 41.4 187 103.7 117.7 103.7 117.7
38 28.1 0.0 28.1 0.0 113 37.7 42.0 37.7 42.0 188 105.2 119.4 105.2 119.4 ←RXYQ14B Cooling/Heating upper limit
39 28.5 0.0 28.5 0.0 114 38.2 42.6 38.2 42.6 189 106.7 121.0 106.7 121.0
40 28.9 0.0 28.9 0.0 115 38.7 43.2 38.7 43.2 190 108.2 122.7 108.2 122.7
41 29.3 0.0 29.3 0.0 116 39.3 43.8 39.3 43.8 191 109.7 124.4 109.7 124.4
42 29.7 0.0 29.7 0.0 117 39.8 44.4 39.8 44.4 192 111.2 126.2 111.2 126.2
43 30.1 0.0 15.0 15.0 118 40.4 45.0 40.4 45.0 193 112.8 127.9 112.8 127.9
44 30.5 0.0 15.2 15.3 119 41.0 45.7 41.0 45.7 194 114.4 129.7 114.4 129.7
45 30.9 0.0 15.3 15.6 120 41.5 46.3 41.5 46.3 195 116.0 131.5 116.0 131.5
46 31.4 0.0 15.5 15.9 121 42.1 47.0 42.1 47.0 196 117.6 133.4 117.6 133.4
47 31.8 0.0 15.6 16.2 122 42.7 47.6 42.7 47.6 197 119.3 135.2 119.3 135.2
48 32.3 0.0 15.8 16.5 123 43.3 48.3 43.3 48.3 198 120.9 137.1 120.9 137.1 ←RXYQ16B Cooling upper limit
49 32.7 0.0 15.9 16.8 124 43.9 49.0 43.9 49.0 199 122.6 139.0 122.6 139.0
50 33.2 0.0 16.1 17.1 125 44.5 49.7 44.5 49.7 200 125.4 140.0 125.4 140.0
51 33.6 0.0 16.2 17.4 126 45.1 50.4 45.1 50.4 201 129.1 140.0 129.1 140.0
52 34.1 0.0 16.4 17.7 127 45.8 51.1 45.8 51.1 202 132.8 140.0 132.8 140.0
53 34.6 0.0 16.6 18.0 128 46.4 51.8 46.4 51.8 203 136.7 140.0 136.7 140.0
54 35.1 0.0 16.8 18.3 129 47.1 52.5 47.1 52.5 204 140.0 140.0 140.0 140.0 ←RXYQ16B Heating upper limit
55 35.6 0.0 17.0 18.6 130 47.7 53.3 47.7 53.3
56 36.1 0.0 17.2 18.9 131 48.4 54.0 48.4 54.0
57 36.6 0.0 17.4 19.2 132 49.1 54.8 49.1 54.8
58 37.1 0.0 17.6 19.5 133 49.8 55.5 49.8 55.5
59 37.6 0.0 17.8 19.8 134 50.4 56.3 50.4 56.3
60 38.1 0.0 18.0 20.1 135 51.1 57.1 51.1 57.1
61 38.7 0.0 18.3 20.4 136 51.8 57.9 51.8 57.9
62 39.2 0.0 18.5 20.7 137 52.6 58.7 52.6 58.7
63 39.8 0.0 18.8 21.0 138 53.3 59.5 53.3 59.5
64 40.3 0.0 19.0 21.3 139 54.1 60.4 54.1 60.4
65 40.9 0.0 19.3 21.6 140 54.8 61.2 54.8 61.2
66 41.4 0.0 19.5 21.9 141 55.6 62.1 55.6 62.1
67 42.0 0.0 19.8 22.2 142 56.4 62.9 56.4 62.9
68 42.6 0.0 20.1 22.5 143 57.2 63.8 57.2 63.8
69 20.4 22.8 20.4 22.8 144 58.0 64.7 58.0 64.7
70 20.7 23.1 20.7 23.1 145 58.8 65.6 58.8 65.6
71 21.0 23.4 21.0 23.4 146 59.6 66.5 59.6 66.5
72 21.3 23.7 21.3 23.7 147 60.4 67.5 60.4 67.5
73 21.6 24.1 21.6 24.1 148 61.3 68.4 61.3 68.4
74 21.9 24.4 21.9 24.4 149 62.1 69.4 62.1 69.4
75 22.2 24.8 22.2 24.8 150 63.0 70.3 63.0 70.3

RXYQ18/20B
1 15.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 76 41.2 0.0 19.1 18.5 151 58.8 53.8 58.8 53.8
2 15.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 77 41.6 0.0 19.5 18.8 152 59.6 54.6 59.6 54.6
3 15.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 78 41.9 0.0 19.8 19.0 153 60.4 55.4 60.4 55.4
4 16.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 79 42.3 0.0 20.2 19.3 154 61.3 56.3 61.3 56.3
5 16.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 80 42.6 0.0 20.5 19.5 155 62.1 57.1 62.1 57.1
6 16.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 81 43.0 0.0 20.9 19.8 156 63.0 58.0 63.0 58.0
7 17.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 82 43.3 0.0 21.2 20.0 157 63.8 58.8 63.8 58.8
8 17.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 83 43.7 0.0 21.6 20.3 158 64.7 59.7 64.7 59.7
9 17.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 84 44.0 0.0 21.9 20.5 159 65.6 60.6 65.6 60.6
10 18.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 85 44.4 0.0 22.3 20.8 160 66.5 61.5 66.5 61.5
11 18.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 86 22.7 21.1 22.7 21.1 161 67.5 62.5 67.5 62.5
12 18.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 87 23.1 21.4 23.1 21.4 162 68.4 63.4 68.4 63.4
13 19.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 88 23.4 21.6 23.4 21.6 163 69.4 64.4 69.4 64.4
14 19.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 89 23.8 21.9 23.8 21.9 164 70.3 65.3 70.3 65.3
15 19.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 90 24.2 22.2 24.2 22.2 165 71.3 66.3 71.3 66.3
16 20.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 91 24.6 22.5 24.6 22.5 166 72.3 67.3 72.3 67.3
17 20.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 92 25.0 22.8 25.0 22.8 167 73.3 68.3 73.3 68.3
18 20.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 93 25.4 23.1 25.4 23.1 168 74.3 69.3 74.3 69.3
19 21.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 94 25.8 23.4 25.8 23.4 169 75.4 70.4 75.4 70.4
20 21.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 95 26.3 23.8 26.3 23.8 170 76.4 71.4 76.4 71.4
21 22.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 96 26.7 24.1 26.7 24.1 171 77.5 72.5 77.5 72.5
22 22.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 97 27.1 24.4 27.1 24.4 172 78.6 73.6 78.6 73.6
23 22.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 98 27.5 24.7 27.5 24.7 173 79.7 74.7 79.7 74.7
24 23.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 99 28.0 25.1 28.0 25.1 174 80.8 75.8 80.8 75.8
25 23.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 100 28.4 25.4 28.4 25.4 175 81.9 76.9 81.9 76.9
26 23.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 101 28.9 25.8 28.9 25.8 176 83.1 78.1 83.1 78.1
27 24.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 102 29.3 26.1 29.3 26.1 177 84.3 79.3 84.3 79.3
28 24.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 103 29.8 26.5 29.8 26.5 178 85.4 80.4 85.4 80.4
29 24.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 104 30.3 26.9 30.3 26.9 179 86.7 81.7 86.7 81.7
30 25.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 105 30.7 27.2 30.7 27.2 180 87.9 82.9 87.9 82.9
31 25.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 106 31.2 27.6 31.2 27.6 181 89.1 84.1 89.1 84.1
32 25.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 107 31.7 28.0 31.7 28.0 182 90.4 85.4 90.4 85.4
33 26.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 108 32.2 28.4 32.2 28.4 183 91.6 86.6 91.6 86.6
34 26.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 109 32.7 28.8 32.7 28.8 184 92.9 87.9 92.9 87.9
35 26.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 110 33.2 29.2 33.2 29.2 185 94.2 89.2 94.2 89.2
36 27.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 111 33.7 29.6 33.7 29.6 186 95.6 90.6 95.6 90.6
37 27.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 112 34.2 30.0 34.2 30.0 187 96.9 91.9 96.9 91.9
38 27.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 113 34.7 30.4 34.7 30.4 188 98.3 93.3 98.3 93.3
39 28.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 114 35.3 30.9 35.3 30.9 189 99.7 94.7 99.7 94.7
40 28.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 115 35.8 31.3 35.8 31.3 190 101.1 96.1 101.1 96.1
41 29.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 116 36.3 31.7 36.3 31.7 191 102.5 97.5 102.5 97.5
42 29.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 117 36.9 32.2 36.9 32.2 192 104.0 99.0 104.0 99.0
43 29.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 118 37.4 32.6 37.4 32.6 193 105.4 100.4 105.4 100.4
44 30.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 119 38.0 33.1 38.0 33.1 194 106.9 101.9 106.9 101.9
45 30.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 120 38.6 33.6 38.6 33.6 195 108.4 103.4 108.4 103.4
46 30.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 121 39.1 34.1 39.1 34.1 196 110.0 105.0 110.0 105.0
47 31.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 122 39.6 34.6 39.6 34.6 197 111.5 106.5 111.5 106.5
48 31.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 123 40.2 35.2 40.2 35.2 198 113.1 108.1 113.1 108.1
49 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 124 40.7 35.7 40.7 35.7 199 114.7 109.7 114.7 109.7
50 32.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 125 41.3 36.3 41.3 36.3 200 116.4 111.4 116.4 111.4
51 32.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 126 41.8 36.8 41.8 36.8 201 118.0 113.0 118.0 113.0
52 32.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 127 42.4 37.4 42.4 37.4 202 119.7 114.7 119.7 114.7
53 33.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 128 43.0 38.0 43.0 38.0 203 121.4 116.4 121.4 116.4
54 33.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 129 43.5 38.5 43.5 38.5 204 123.1 118.1 123.1 118.1 ←RXYQ18B Heating upper limit
55 33.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 130 44.1 39.1 44.1 39.1 205 124.9 119.9 124.9 119.9 ←RXYQ18B Cooling upper limit
56 34.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 131 44.7 39.7 44.7 39.7 206 126.6 121.6 126.6 121.6
57 34.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 132 45.3 40.3 45.3 40.3 207 128.4 123.4 128.4 123.4
58 34.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 133 46.0 41.0 46.0 41.0 208 130.3 125.3 130.3 125.3
59 35.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 134 46.6 41.6 46.6 41.6 209 132.1 127.1 132.1 127.1
60 35.6 0.0 15.0 15.0 135 47.2 42.2 47.2 42.2 210 134.0 129.0 134.0 129.0
61 36.0 0.0 15.1 15.1 136 47.9 42.9 47.9 42.9 211 135.9 130.9 135.9 130.9
62 36.3 0.0 15.3 15.3 137 48.5 43.5 48.5 43.5 212 137.9 132.9 137.9 132.9
63 36.7 0.0 15.5 15.5 138 49.2 44.2 49.2 44.2 213 140.0 134.8 140.0 134.8
64 37.0 0.0 15.8 15.8 139 49.9 44.9 49.9 44.9 214 140.0 140.0 140.0 140.0 ←RXYQ20B Cooling/Heating upper limit
65 37.4 0.0 16.0 16.0 140 50.6 45.6 50.6 45.6
66 37.7 0.0 16.2 16.2 141 51.3 46.3 51.3 46.3
67 38.1 0.0 16.5 16.5 142 52.0 47.0 52.0 47.0
68 38.4 0.0 16.7 16.7 143 52.7 47.7 52.7 47.7
69 38.8 0.0 17.0 17.0 144 53.4 48.4 53.4 48.4
70 39.1 0.0 17.2 17.2 145 54.1 49.1 54.1 49.1
71 39.5 0.0 17.5 17.4 146 54.9 49.9 54.9 49.9
72 39.8 0.0 17.8 17.6 147 55.6 50.6 55.6 50.6
73 40.2 0.0 18.2 17.9 148 56.4 51.4 56.4 51.4
74 40.5 0.0 18.5 18.1 149 57.2 52.2 57.2 52.2
75 40.9 0.0 18.8 18.3 150 58.0 53.0 58.0 53.0

RXYQ22/24B
1 15.0 0.0 15.0 0.0 76 43.0 0.0 19.0 24.0 151 58.5 63.6 58.5 63.6
2 15.2 0.0 15.2 0.0 77 43.6 0.0 19.2 24.4 152 59.4 64.4 59.4 64.4
3 15.4 0.0 15.4 0.0 78 44.3 0.0 19.5 24.7 153 60.3 65.3 60.3 65.3
4 15.6 0.0 15.6 0.0 79 44.9 0.0 19.9 24.9 154 61.2 66.2 61.2 66.2
5 15.8 0.0 15.8 0.0 80 45.5 0.0 20.2 25.2 155 62.0 67.1 62.0 67.1
6 16.0 0.0 16.0 0.0 81 46.1 0.0 20.5 25.5 156 63.0 68.0 63.0 68.0
7 16.3 0.0 16.3 0.0 82 46.8 0.0 20.9 25.9 157 63.9 68.9 63.9 68.9
8 16.5 0.0 16.5 0.0 83 47.5 0.0 21.2 26.2 158 64.8 69.8 64.8 69.8
9 16.7 0.0 16.7 0.0 84 48.1 0.0 21.5 26.5 159 65.8 70.8 65.8 70.8
10 17.0 0.0 17.0 0.0 85 48.8 0.0 21.9 26.9 160 66.7 71.7 66.7 71.7
11 17.2 0.0 17.2 0.0 86 49.5 0.0 22.2 27.2 161 67.5 72.5 67.5 72.5
12 17.5 0.0 17.5 0.0 87 50.2 0.0 22.5 27.6 162 68.4 73.5 68.4 73.5
13 18.0 0.0 18.0 0.0 88 50.9 0.0 22.9 27.9 163 69.4 74.5 69.4 74.5
14 18.2 0.0 18.2 0.0 89 51.6 0.0 23.3 28.3 164 70.4 75.5 70.4 75.5
15 18.5 0.0 18.5 0.0 90 52.3 0.0 23.6 28.6 165 71.4 76.5 71.4 76.5
16 18.7 0.0 18.7 0.0 91 53.0 0.0 24.0 29.0 166 72.5 77.5 72.5 77.5
17 19.0 0.0 19.0 0.0 92 53.8 0.0 24.4 29.4 167 73.5 78.5 73.5 78.5
18 19.2 0.0 19.2 0.0 93 54.5 0.0 24.7 29.7 168 74.6 79.6 74.6 79.6
19 19.5 0.0 19.5 0.0 94 55.3 0.0 25.1 30.1 169 75.7 80.7 75.7 80.7
20 19.8 0.0 19.8 0.0 95 56.0 0.0 25.5 30.5 170 76.8 81.8 76.8 81.8
21 20.1 0.0 20.1 0.0 96 56.8 0.0 25.9 30.9 171 77.9 82.9 77.9 82.9
22 20.4 0.0 20.4 0.0 97 57.6 0.0 26.3 31.3 172 79.0 84.0 79.0 84.0
23 20.6 0.0 20.6 0.0 98 58.4 0.0 26.7 31.7 173 80.1 85.2 80.1 85.2
24 20.9 0.0 20.9 0.0 99 59.2 0.0 27.1 32.1 174 81.3 86.3 81.3 86.3
25 21.2 0.0 21.2 0.0 100 60.1 0.0 27.5 32.5 175 82.5 87.5 82.5 87.5
26 21.5 0.0 21.5 0.0 101 60.9 0.0 27.9 33.0 176 83.7 88.7 83.7 88.7
27 21.8 0.0 21.8 0.0 102 61.8 0.0 28.4 33.4 177 84.9 89.9 84.9 89.9
28 22.1 0.0 22.1 0.0 103 62.6 0.0 28.8 33.8 178 86.1 91.1 86.1 91.1
29 22.5 0.0 22.5 0.0 104 63.5 0.0 29.2 34.2 179 87.4 92.4 87.4 92.4
30 22.8 0.0 22.8 0.0 105 29.7 34.7 29.7 34.7 180 88.6 93.6 88.6 93.6
31 23.1 0.0 23.1 0.0 106 30.1 35.1 30.1 35.1 181 89.9 94.9 89.9 94.9
32 23.4 0.0 23.4 0.0 107 30.6 35.6 30.6 35.6 182 91.2 96.2 91.2 96.2
33 23.7 0.0 23.7 0.0 108 31.0 36.0 31.0 36.0 183 92.5 97.5 92.5 97.5
34 24.1 0.0 24.1 0.0 109 31.5 36.5 31.5 36.5 184 93.8 98.9 93.8 98.9
35 24.4 0.0 24.4 0.0 110 32.0 37.0 32.0 37.0 185 95.1 100.2 95.1 100.2
36 24.8 0.0 24.8 0.0 111 32.5 37.5 32.5 37.5 186 96.5 101.6 96.5 101.6
37 25.1 0.0 25.1 0.0 112 33.0 38.0 33.0 38.0 187 97.9 103.0 97.9 103.0
38 25.5 0.0 25.5 0.0 113 33.5 38.5 33.5 38.5 188 99.3 104.4 99.3 104.4
39 25.8 0.0 25.8 0.0 114 34.0 39.0 34.0 39.0 189 100.7 105.8 100.7 105.8
40 26.2 0.0 26.2 0.0 115 34.5 39.5 34.5 39.5 190 102.2 107.2 102.2 107.2
41 26.5 0.0 26.5 0.0 116 35.0 40.0 35.0 40.0 191 103.7 108.7 103.7 108.7
42 26.9 0.0 26.9 0.0 117 35.5 40.5 35.5 40.5 192 105.2 110.2 105.2 110.2
43 27.3 0.0 27.3 0.0 118 36.0 41.1 36.0 41.1 193 106.6 111.7 106.6 111.7
44 27.7 0.0 27.7 0.0 119 36.6 41.6 36.6 41.6 194 108.2 113.2 108.2 113.2
45 28.0 0.0 28.0 0.0 120 37.1 42.2 37.1 42.2 195 109.7 114.8 109.7 114.8
46 28.5 0.0 28.5 0.0 121 37.7 42.7 37.7 42.7 196 111.3 116.3 111.3 116.3
47 28.9 0.0 28.9 0.0 122 38.3 43.3 38.3 43.3 197 112.9 117.9 112.9 117.9
48 29.3 0.0 29.3 0.0 123 38.9 43.9 38.9 43.9 198 114.5 119.5 114.5 119.5
49 29.7 0.0 29.7 0.0 124 39.4 44.5 39.4 44.5 199 116.1 121.2 116.1 121.2
50 30.0 0.0 15.0 15.0 125 40.0 45.0 40.0 45.0 200 117.8 122.9 117.8 122.9
51 30.4 0.0 15.0 15.3 126 40.6 45.6 40.6 45.6 201 119.5 124.5 119.5 124.5
52 30.8 0.0 15.2 15.6 127 41.2 46.2 41.2 46.2 202 121.2 126.2 121.2 126.2
53 31.2 0.0 15.3 15.9 128 41.8 46.9 41.8 46.9 203 123.0 128.0 123.0 128.0
54 31.7 0.0 15.4 16.2 129 42.5 47.5 42.5 47.5 204 124.7 129.7 124.7 129.7
55 32.1 0.0 15.5 16.5 130 43.1 48.1 43.1 48.1 205 126.5 131.5 126.5 131.5
56 32.5 0.0 15.6 16.9 131 43.7 48.7 43.7 48.7 206 128.3 133.3 128.3 133.3
57 33.0 0.0 15.8 17.2 132 44.4 49.4 44.4 49.4 207 130.1 135.2 130.1 135.2
58 33.5 0.0 15.9 17.5 133 45.0 50.0 45.0 50.0 208 132.0 137.0 132.0 137.0
59 34.0 0.0 16.0 17.9 134 45.7 50.7 45.7 50.7 209 133.9 138.9 133.9 138.9
60 34.4 0.0 16.1 18.2 135 46.4 51.4 46.4 51.4 210 135.0 140.0 135.0 140.0
61 34.9 0.0 16.3 18.6 136 47.0 52.1 47.0 52.1
62 35.4 0.0 16.4 18.9 137 47.7 52.8 47.7 52.8
63 35.9 0.0 16.6 19.3 138 48.5 53.5 48.5 53.5
64 36.4 0.0 16.7 19.6 139 49.2 54.2 49.2 54.2
65 36.9 0.0 16.9 20.0 140 49.9 54.9 49.9 54.9
66 37.4 0.0 17.0 20.3 141 50.6 55.6 50.6 55.6
67 38.0 0.0 17.2 20.7 142 51.4 56.4 51.4 56.4
68 38.5 0.0 17.4 21.1 143 52.1 57.1 52.1 57.1
69 39.0 0.0 17.5 21.5 144 52.9 57.9 52.9 57.9
70 39.6 0.0 17.7 21.8 145 53.7 58.7 53.7 58.7
71 40.1 0.0 17.9 22.2 146 54.5 59.5 54.5 59.5
72 40.7 0.0 18.1 22.6 147 55.2 60.3 55.2 60.3
73 41.3 0.0 18.3 23.0 148 56.0 61.1 56.0 61.1
74 41.9 0.0 18.5 23.4 149 56.9 61.9 56.9 61.9
75 42.5 0.0 18.7 23.7 150 57.7 62.7 57.7 62.7

5.4 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control

Main electronic expansion valve EVM control
When the outdoor unit heat exchanging is performed via the condenser (Y5S is set to OFF), this
function is used to exert PI control on the electronic expansion valve (Y1E or Y6E) so that the
condenser outlet subcooling degree (SC) will become constant.
SC = Tc – Tf SC: Condenser outlet subcooling degree
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Tf: Liquid pipe temperature detected by heat exchanger liquid pipe
thermistor (R2T, R9T)
When the outdoor unit heat exchanging is performed via the evaporator (Y5S is set to ON), this
function is used to exert PI control on the electronic expansion valve (Y1E or Y6E) so that the
evaporator outlet superheating degree (SH) will become constant.
 RXYQ8-20B:
SH = Ts – Te SH: Evaporator outlet superheating degree
Ts: Suction pipe before accumulator (R5T)
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturated temperature
 RXYQ22/24B:
SH = Tg – Te SH: Evaporator outlet superheating degree
Tg: Suction pipe temperature detected by heat exchanger gas pipe
thermistor (R11T, R12T)
Subcooling electronic expansion valve EVT control

In order to make the maximum use of the subcooling heat exchanger, this function is used to
exert PI control on the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) so that the evaporator-side gas pipe
superheating degree (SH) will become constant.
SH = Tsh – Te SH: Evaporator outlet superheating degree
Tsh: Suction pipe temperature detected by the subcooling heat
exchanger outlet thermistor (R6T)

5.5 Step Control of Outdoor Unit Fans

Used to control the revolutions of outdoor fans in the steps listed in table below, according to
condition changes.
RXYQ8B RXYQ10B RXYQ12B RXYQ14B
Step Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
M1F M1F M1F M1F M1F M1F M1F M2F M1F M2F
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 0 200 0
2 238 238 238 238 238 238 306 0 306 0
3 284 284 284 284 284 284 240 230 240 230
4 338 338 338 338 338 338 366 354 366 354
5 402 422 402 402 402 402 588 515 588 515
6 486 486 486 486 486 486 721 619 652 564
7 588 588 588 588 588 588 879 751 879 751
8 654 654 654 654 719 719 1,030 886 1,030 886
9 727 727 775 775 880 880 1,201 1,051 1,129 980
RXYQ16B RXYQ18B
Step Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
M1F M2F M1F M2F M1F M2F M1F M2F
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0
2 306 0 306 0 286 0 286 0
3 240 223 / 230 240 223 / 230 210 200 210 200
4 366 340 / 354 366 340 / 354 299 289 299 289
5 492 489 / 444 492 489 / 444 438 404 438 404
6 652 588 / 546 619 539 646 560 646 560
7 837 714 / 715 837 714 / 715 855 730 855 730
8 968 873 / 829 968 873 / 829 980 840 980 840
9 1,227 1,077 1,165 1,015 1,203 1,053 1,175 1,025
RXYQ20B RXYQ22/24B
Step Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
M1F M2F M1F M2F M1F M2F M1F M2F
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 200 0 200 0 200 200 200 200
2 286 0 286 0 254 244 254 244
3 210 200 210 200 315 305 315 305
4 299 289 299 289 414 359 414 359
5 438 404 438 404 533 429 533 429
6 646 560 646 560 623 492 654 516
7 855 730 855 730 786 636 786 636
8 980 840 980 840 891 755 891 755
9 1,400 1,260 1,400 1,260 987 1,047 987 1,047

SiMT342301E Protection Control
6. Protection Control
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control is used to prevent the activation of protection devices due
to abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient
increase of high pressure.
Cooling The following control is performed in the entire system.
Normal control
Pc: High pressure sensor detection
Pc > 3.55 MPa Pc < 3.04 MPa value for each outdoor unit.
Reduce compressor capacity step
Pc > 3.72 MPa

When occurring 3 times within 40
minutes, high pressure switch is
High pressure standby activated without high pressure standby,
thus outputting the error code E3.
Heating The following control is performed in the entire system.
Normal operation
Pc > 3.04 MPa Pc < 2.89 MPa
Pc > 3.72 MPa

High pressure standby minutes, high pressure switch is
activated without high pressure standby,
thus outputting the error code E3.

Protection Control SiMT342301E
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control is used to protect compressors against the transient
decrease of low pressure.
Cooling Because of common low pressure, the following control is performed in the system.
Normal control
Pe < 0.25 MPa Pe > 0.39 MPa Pe: Low pressure sensor detection
value for master unit.
Pe < 0.07 MPa

Low pressure standby
minutes, the error code E4 is output.
Heating The following control is performed in the system.
Normal operation
Pe < 0.05 MPa Pe > 0.1 MPa
Pe < 0.02 MPa
Low pressure standby When occurring 3 times within 60

minutes, the error code E4 is output.
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature
against an error or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
HTdi: Value of compressor discharge pipe temperature (Tdi) compensated with outdoor air
temperature
Ti: Compressor body temperature
A: Maximum of HTdi and Ti
The following control is performed for each compressor of single unit as well as multi units.
Normal control
A > 108°C A < 95°C
HTdi > 135°C

Discharge pipe temperature standby minutes, the error code F3 is output.
(Sub code - 01, 02, 03)

SiMT342301E Protection Control
6.4 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and radiation fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to an abnormality, or transient inverter overcurrent, and fin temperature increase.
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each compressor performs these controls in the
following sequence.
Inverter This control is performed for each compressor.

Overcurrent
Normal control
Protection
Control
A B
Reduce compressor capacity

Inverter current standby minutes, the error code L8 is
output.
RXYQ RXYQ14/16BYM RXYQ18/20BYM RXYQ22/24BYM

Condition RXYQ8BYM
10/12BYM M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C
A more than 19.0 A more than 28.0 A more than 19.0 A more than 19.0 A more than 19.0 A more than 28.0 A more than 28.0 A more than 28.0 A
B less than 18.2 A less than 27.2 A less than 18.2 A less than 18.2 A less than 18.2 A less than 27.2 A less than 27.2 A less than 27.2 A
C more than 21.0 A more than 30.0 A more than 21.0 A more than 21.0 A more than 21.0 A more than 30.0 A more than 30.0 A more than 30.0 A
Radiation Fin Perform the following control of integrated as well as multi units for each compressor.
Temperature
Normal operation
Control
A B
Reduce compressor capacity

Fin temperature standby minutes, the error code L4 is output.
RXYQ RXYQ14/16BYM RXYQ18/20BYM RXYQ22/24BYM

Condition RXYQ8BYM
10/12BYM M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C
A more than 109°C more than 109°C more than 109°C more than 109°C more than 109°C more than 109°C more than 109°C more than 109°C
B less than 106°C less than 106°C less than 106°C less than 106°C less than 106°C less than 106°C less than 106°C less than 106°C
C more than 114°C more than 114°C more than 114°C more than 114°C more than 114°C more than 114°C more than 114°C more than 114°C

Special Control SiMT342301E
7. Special Control
7.1 Pump Down Residual Control
If the liquid refrigerant stays in the evaporator at the startup of a compressor, this liquid
refrigerant enters the compressor, thus resulting in diluted oil in the compressor and then
degraded lubrication performance.
Consequently, in order to recover the refrigerant in the evaporator while the compressor stops,
the pump down residual operation is conducted.
Pc: High pressure sensor detection value
Pe: Low pressure sensor detection value
Ta: Outdoor air temperature
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
DSH: Discharge pipe superheating degree
Electric
Part name Function of functional part
symbol
Compressor motor RXYQ8B: 60.0 rps, —
RXYQ10/12B: 37.5 rps, —
M1C, M2C RXYQ14/16B: 60.0 rps, 60.0 rps
RXYQ18/20B: 60.0 rps, 37.5 rps
RXYQ22/24B: 37.5 rps, 37.5 rps
Fan motor M1F, M2F For heat exchanger mode
Electronic expansion valve (Heat exchanger main) Y1E Same as normal control
Electronic expansion valve (Heat exchanger sub) Y6E
Electronic expansion valve (Refrigerant cooling IPM) Y2E Same as normal control
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling heat exchanger) Y3E 0 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Refrigerant auto charge) Y4E 40 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Refrigerant cooling air) Y5E Same as normal control
Solenoid valve (Oil separator oil return) Y1S, Y2S ON
Solenoid valve (Hot gas bypass) Y3S OFF
Solenoid valve (Accumulator oil return) Y4S OFF
Solenoid valve (Four way valve) Y5S Hold
Ending condition A lapse of 6 minutes

SiMT342301E Special Control
7.2 Oil Return Operation

In order to prevent the compressor from running out of oil, the oil return operation is conducted
to recover oil that has flowed out from the compressor to the system side.
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
TsA: Suction pipe temperature detected by thermistor R5T
Ts: Suction pipe before accumulator temperature
7.2.1 Oil Return Operation in Cooling Operation

Electric
Part name Function of functional part
symbol
Compressor motor M1C, M2C Constant low pressure control
Fan motor M1F, M2F High pressure control
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling heat exchanger) Y3E 0 pulse
Solenoid valve (Hot gas bypass) Y3S Same as normal control
Solenoid valve (Accumulator oil return) Y4S ON
Ending condition
A lapse of 3 minutes
&
TsA – Te < 3C
OR A lapse of 6 minutes while the frequency is
more than that of oil return operation.
Indoor unit actuator Oil return operation

Thermostat ON unit Remote controller setting
Fan Non-operating unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit Remote controller setting
Thermostat ON unit Normal control
Electronic expansion valve Non-operating unit 224 pulse
Thermostat OFF unit Forced thermostat ON (PI control)

7.2.2 Oil Return Operation in Heating Operation

Part name Electric Function of functional part
symbol
Compressor motor M1C, M2C Constant high pressure control
Fan motor M1F, M2F With high pressure
OFF ↔ Step 4 ↔ Step 6
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling heat exchanger) Y3E Same as normal control
Solenoid valve (Hot gas bypass) Y3S ON
Ending condition A lapse of 6 minutes while the frequency is more than
that of oil return operation or Ts − Teg < 3.
Indoor unit actuator Oil return operation

Thermostat ON unit Remote controller setting
Thermostat OFF unit Remote controller setting
Thermostat ON unit Normal control
Electronic expansion valve Non-operating unit 224 pulse
Thermostat OFF unit 224 pulse

SiMT342301E Special Control
7.3 Defrost Operation

To defrost the outdoor heat exchanger while in Evaporator, the defrost operation is conducted
to recover the heating capacity.
Tb: Heat exchanger deicer temperature
Part name Electric Function of functional part

symbol
Compressor motor RXYQ8B: 133.0 rps
RXYQ10/12B: 127.3 rps
M1C, M2C RXYQ14/16B: 125.4 rps + 140.0 rps
RXYQ18/20B: 85.2 rps + 114.9 rps
RXYQ22/24B: 135.0 rps + 140.0 rps
Fan motor With high pressure
M1F, M2F
OFF ↔ Step 4 ↔ Step 6
Electronic expansion valve (Heat exchanger main) Y1E 100%
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling heat exchanger) Y3E Discharge temperature control
Electronic expansion valve (Refrigerant auto charge) Y4E Minimum pulse
Solenoid valve (Hot gas bypass) Y3S ON
Solenoid valve (Four way valve) Y5S OFF
Ending condition
A lapse of 15 minutes
OR
Tb > 11°C continues for 60 seconds or more
Indoor unit actuator Defrost operation

Thermostat ON unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit OFF
Thermostat ON unit Defrost EV opening degree
Electronic expansion valve Non-operating unit Defrost EV opening degree
Thermostat OFF unit Defrost EV opening degree

7.4 Outdoor Unit Rotation

In the case of multi outdoor unit system, this outdoor unit rotation prevents the compressor from
breaking down due to unbalanced oil level between outdoor units.
Details of outdoor unit rotation

In the case of multi outdoor unit system, each outdoor unit is given an operating priority for the
control.
The operating priority of outdoor units is changed by outdoor unit rotation. The outdoor unit
rotation prevents unbalanced oil level between outdoor units by eliminating the long stop of
compressors during partial load.
Timing of outdoor unit rotation

 At the beginning of the startup control, or;
 After oil return operation, or;
 After defrost operation, or;
 One of the outdoor units is stopped for 20 minutes or more.
Example) The following diagram shows outdoor unit rotation.

Oil return operation
Startup control or defrost operation
Normal control Normal control
A
Master Sub 1 Sub 2 Master Sub 1 Sub 2
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority
rotation 1 2 3 rotation 2 3 1
Any of outdoor
unit stops for a
period of 20
minutes or more.
Normal control Normal control
A
Master Sub 1 Sub 2 Master Sub 1 Sub 2
Outdoor unit
Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority
2 3 1
rotation 3 1 2
Note(s)  Master unit, sub unit 1, and sub unit 2 in this section are the names for installation.
They are determined in installation work, and not changed thereafter. (These names are
different from master unit and sub unit for control.)
The outdoor unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit.
Consequently, the LED display on the outdoor unit main PCB for master unit, sub unit 1, and
sub unit 2 does not change.

SiMT342301E Other Control
8. Other Control
8.1 Backup Operation
If any of the compressors goes wrong, disable the relevant compressor or the relevant outdoor
unit from operating, and then conduct emergency operation only with operational compressors
or outdoor units.
"Emergency operation with remote controller reset" and "Emergency operation with outdoor unit
PCB setting" are available.
(1) Emergency operation with remote controller reset

[Operating method]
Reset the remote controller. (Press the ON/OFF button for 4 seconds or more.)
[Details of operation]
Disable the defective outdoor unit from operating temporarily, and then only operate other
outdoor units.
(On the system with 1 outdoor unit, this emergency operation is not available.)
(2) Emergency operation with outdoor unit PCB setting

[Setting method]
Make setting of the unit, "the operation of which is to be disabled", in field setting mode (setting
mode 2).
[Details of operation]
Disable the defective outdoor unit from operating, and then only operate other outdoor units.
(On the system with 1 outdoor unit, this emergency operation is not available.)
8.2 Heating Operation Prohibition

 When outdoor air temperature is too high, outdoor unit cannot operate in heating mode
because:
 Low pressure sensor can give pressure value above upper limit of sensor: error JC.
 Mechanical internal load on compressor increases.
 Low compression ratio can result in insufficient compressor internal oil lubrication.
 Heating is disabled when outdoor air temperature is above 26°C.
 Forced thermostat-OFF on indoor units.
 Outdoor fan operates ≥ 200 rpm.
 Heating operation is enabled when outdoor air temperature drops below 24°C.

Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) SiMT342301E
9. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

9.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature
9.1.1 Without Infrared Floor Sensor
The relationship between remote controller set temperature and control target temperature is
described below.
 When the suction air thermistor is used for controlling (Factory setting), the control target
temperature is determined as follows to prevent insufficient heating in heating operation.
Control target temperature = remote controller set temperature + 2°C.
 The temperature difference for cooling  heating mode switching is 5°C.
 The above also applies to automatic operation.
 When setting the suction air thermistor (Factory setting)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35°C
Remote controller set temperature (1)

Cooling
Control target temperature
Remote controller set temperature (1)
Heating
1 The range of default setting is different for FXAQ-A models.

Cooling: 17-32°C
Heating: 16-31°C
 When using the remote controller thermistor (Field setting is required)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35°C
Remote controller set temperature

Cooling
Heating
Examples are given to illustrate a control target temperature that satisfies the remote controller
set temperature.
9.1.2 With Infrared Floor Sensor

The relationship between remote controller set temperature and control target temperature is
described below.
 The temperature difference for cooling  heating mode switching is 5°C.
 When using the floor temperature as the control target, the remote controller set temperature
is equal to the actual control target temperature in heating operation.
 The above also applies to automatic operation.
 When setting the suction air thermistor (Factory setting)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ˚C

Cooling
Heating

SiMT342301E Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
 When using the remote controller thermistor (Field setting is required)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ˚C

Cooling
Heating
Examples are given to illustrate a control target temperature that satisfies the remote controller
set temperature.
Regarding control target temperature

When using the infrared floor sensor, the temperature around people will be treated as the
control target temperature for operation.
What is the temperature around people?

The temperature around people refers to the temperature of the living space, obtained from the
temperature around the ceiling and the temperature underfoot. The temperature is calculated
using the detected values of the suction air thermistor and the infrared floor sensor.
It is difficult to use only suction air temperature control for underfoot air conditioning.
9.2 Thermostat Control

The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote
controller set temperature and the actual detected room temperature (1).
 Normal operation
 Cooling operation
ΔT ≤ –1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
ΔT ≥ +1.0°C
 Heating operation
T  1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
T  –1.0°C
 Dry operation
 When Tro < 24.5°C
Tr – Tro < –1.0°C
Dry operation Thermostat OFF
Tr – Tro > +1.0°C
 When Tro ≥ 24.5°C

Tr – Tro < –1.5°C
Tr – Tro > +0.5°C
: Description of symbols
T = Detected room temperature – Remote controller set temperature
Tro: Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr: Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor
Note(s) 1: The thermistor used to detect room temperature is according to the field setting 10 (20)-2.


The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote
controller set temperature and the detected temperature around people.
 Normal operation
 Cooling operation
ΔT ≤ –1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
ΔT ≥ +1.0°C
 Heating operation
T  1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
T  –1.0°C
 Dry operation
 When Tro ≤ 24.5°C
Tr – Tro < –1.0°C
Tr – Tro > +1.0°C
 When Tro > 24.5°C

Tr – Tro < –1.5°C
Tr – Tro > +0.5°C
: Description of symbols
T = Detected temperature around people – Remote controller set temperature
Tro: Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr: Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor
Control range of temperature around people

When the floor temperature is very low, operation using the temperature around people may
cause the suction air temperature to operate outside of use range.
To avoid the above condition, a limit based on the suction air temperature is set for the use
range of the temperature around people.
 Cooling operation
 When the floor temperature is lower than suction air thermistor detection temperature (R1T),
R1T will be treated as the control target temperature for operation.
 When the temperature around people is 15°C or lower, R1T will be treated as the control
temperature for operation.
 Heating operation
 When the floor temperature is higher than suction air thermistor detection temperature
(R1T), R1T will be treated as the control target temperature in operation.
 When the temperature around people is 33°C or higher, R1T will be treated as the control
temperature for operation.

9.2.3 Thermostat Control with Operation Mode Set to "AUTO"

When the operation mode is set to "AUTO" on the remote controller, the system will conduct the
temperature control shown below.
Furthermore, the differential value (D°C) can be changed by the field setting from remote
controller.
Second code No.
Mode First code
Contents of setting 01
No. No. 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

12 0°C
4 Automatic mode differential 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
(22) 
: Factory setting
Set heating temperature Set cooling temperature

(A – D)C AC
DC
Cooling thermostat ON
Cooling thermostat OFF
Display change
Cooling Heating
Display change
Heating Cooling
Heating thermostat OFF

Heating thermostat ON
3C
(D
2
+ 2)C
(Ex.) When automatic cooling temperature is set to 27C:

Differential value: 0C Differential value set to 4C
Set cooling/ Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
heating temp.
23C 27C
27C
25C 30C Cooling mode 26C Cooling mode
Control temp. Control temp.
Heating mode Heating mode
Differential value set to 1C Differential value set to 5C

Set heating temp. Set cooling temp. Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
26C 27C 22C 27C
24.5C 29C Cooling mode 22.5C 25C Cooling mode

25C 27C 21C 27C
24C 28C Cooling mode 22C 24C Cooling mode

24C 27C 20C 27C
23.5C Cooling mode 21.5C 23C Cooling mode

9.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control

The automatic airflow rate control (Five steps from H to L) is based on the difference between
control target temperature and set temperature.
When airflow rate is set
Conditions FXBQ-P Automatic airflow rate
Others
FXBPQ-P
Cooling Thermostat ON The fan tap is determined by the
Set Set difference between control target
temperature and set temperature.
Thermostat OFF The fan keeps rotating at the
Set Set (1) speed as just before the
thermostat off (1)
Heating Thermostat ON The fan tap is determined by the
Set Set difference between control target
temperature and set temperature.
Thermostat OFF LL LL LL
Program dry Thermostat ON L L L
Thermostat OFF LL OFF OFF
Fan Set Set M
Stop OFF OFF OFF
1. LL airflow for FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, and FXFQ-A
Fan tap <Change in airflow rate under
automatic airflow rate control>
For FXFTQ-A,
FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A,
FXFQ-A, and FXDSQ-A,
HM and ML taps can be
manually set with remote
H controller.
HM For other models,
M HM and ML taps appear
ML only during the auto
L airflow rate control
operation.
Small Difference between control target Large

temperature and set temperature

9.4 Airflow Direction Control

Refer to the table below for controlling the horizontal flap (or the vertical flap) for airflow direction
adjustment.
Conditions FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXZQ-B, FXCQ-B, FXEQ-A, FXKQ-MA,

FXUQ-A, FXHQ-MA, FXHQ-B, FXAQ-A
Cooling Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Set
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing
Thermostat OFF Swing
Program dry Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Set
Thermostat OFF Swing
Heating Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0)
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0)
Fan Direction set Set
Swing set Swing

The model can control airflow direction automatically by the difference between suction air
temperature and floor temperature.
FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXZQ-B, FXDSQ-A
Conditions Automatic airflow rate and eco
When airflow direction is set
full automatic control
Cooling Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing —
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Program dry Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Heating Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P3 or P4)
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0) Horizontal (P0)
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0) —
Fan Direction set Set Horizontal (P0)
Swing set Swing —
Operation in auto airflow direction control when cooling

The difference between suction air
and floor temperatures is large.
P0 (Horizontal) P1
and floor temperatures is small.
Operation in auto airflow direction control when heating

and floor temperatures is large.
P3 P4 (Downward)
and floor temperatures is small.

Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR

(Horizontal view)
9.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A only)

In the case where both this control is activated and auto airflow direction control (eco full
automatic control) is set, when presence is detected, the airflow direction is automatically set to
horizontal (P0) to reduce discomfort by direct airflow.
This control works for each airflow outlet individually.
Note: This function is inoperative for the airflow outlet where an individual airflow direction is set.
Absence continues for 5 mins Airflow direction by auto airflow direction

P0 (horizontal) Cooling: P0 or P1
When presence is detected Heating: P3 or P4
9.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A only)

This is a generic term for the setting where both fan speed and airflow direction are set to
"Auto". For detailed control contents, refer to Automatic Airflow Rate Control and Airflow
Direction Control.

9.7 Drain Pump Control

9.7.1 Normal Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min.
 The float switch is ON in normal operation.

 When cooling operation starts (thermostat ON), the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
 After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
 The aim of residual operation after thermostat OFF is to eliminate the dew that condenses
on the indoor heat exchanger during cooling operation.
9.7.2 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat ON in Cooling

Operation
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the thermostat turns OFF simultaneously.
 After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
1: If the float switch turns ON again during the residual operation of the drain pump, cooling
operation also turns on again (thermostat ON).
2: If the float switch remains OFF even after the residual operation of the drain pump has
ended, the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
3: After A3 is displayed and the unit comes to an abnormal stop, the thermostat will remain
OFF even if the float switch turns ON again.

9.7.3 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat OFF in Cooling
Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
 If the float switch remains OFF even after residual operation of the drain pump has ended,
the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
 The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
9.7.4 If the Float Switch Turns OFF and ON Continuously, or the Float
Switch Turns OFF While AF Displayed
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
} }
OFF
Float switch
ON
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
AF A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
1: If the float switch continues to turn OFF and ON 5 times consecutively, it is judged as a drain
system error and the error code AF is displayed on the remote controller.
2: The drain pump continues to turn ON/OFF in accordance with the float switch ON/OFF even
after AF is displayed on the remote controller.
3: While the error code AF is displayed, if the float switch remains OFF even after the residual
operation of the drain pump has ended, the error code A3 will be displayed on the remote
controller.

9.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control

Freeze-Up Prevention by Off Cycle (Indoor Unit Individual Control)
When the temperature detected by liquid pipe temperature thermistor of the indoor heat
exchanger drops too low, the unit enters freeze-up prevention control in accordance with the
following conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below. (Thermostat
OFF)
When freeze-up prevention is activated, the airflow rate is fixed to L tap. When the following
conditions for cancelling are satisfied, it will reset.
Conditions for starting:

Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 1°C (for total of 40 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 5°C (for total of 10 minutes)
Condition for cancelling:

Liquid pipe temperature ≥ +7°C (for 10 minutes continuously)
Liquid pipe 10 min.
temperature
+7ºC
0ºC
–5ºC
Freeze-up prevention control
Forced OFF by thermostat Normal operation
10 min.
Start Cancel
Concept of freeze-up prevention control

System avoids freeze-up
 For comfort, system avoids unnecessary thermostat ON/OFF
 For ensuring compressor reliability, system avoids unnecessary compressor ON/OFF
When freeze-up prevention control starts, system makes sure the frost is completely removed.
 System avoids water leakage.
Note(s)  When the indoor unit is a round flow or multi flow type, if the air outlet is set as
dual-directional or tridirectional, the starting conditions will be changed as follows.
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ 1°C (for total of 15 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ 0°C (for 1 minute continuously)
During freeze-up prevention control, the airflow rate is fixed to LL.
(The cancelling conditions are same as the standard.)

9.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control

9.9.1 FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXZQ-B, FXCQ-B, FXKQ-MA
Models
Indoor operation under a certain condition will limit the swing range of the flaps.
Position P0 continues
Dew condensation for 30 minutes.
Dew condensation
prevention control OFF prevention control in action
Thermostat OFF
Refer to the table below for flap action under this control.
Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR
(Observed horizontally)
Dew condensation prevention control

Flap setting OFF In action
P0 P0 P1
P1 P1 P1
P2 P2 P2
P3 P3 P3
P4 P4 P4
Swing P0 – P4 P1 – P4
9.9.2 FXUQ-A, FXHQ-MA, FXHQ-B, FXAQ-A Models

In cooling and dry operation, the following control is carried out in order to prevent dew
condensation when the horizontal blade blows air downward.
Starting condition
● Horizontal blade is set to downward flow (Position A)

&
● Cooling operation (compressor operation) continues for B minutes.
Dew condensation prevention control

Dry operation with horizontal airflow (Position C) is carried out for 1 hour.
FXUQ-A, FXHQ-MA, FXHQ-B FXAQ-A

Position A P3 or P4 P4
B (minutes) 30 20
Position C P2 P3
Note(s) When there is any change to fan operation, airflow direction and operation ON/OFF state during
dew condensation prevention control, this control is canceled.

9.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Electronic expansion valves in indoor units have the functions of conducting superheating
degree control in cooling operation and subcooling degree control in heating operation.
However, if the indoor units receive any control command such as a protection control
command or a special control command from the outdoor unit, the units will give a priority to the
control command.
 Superheating degree control in cooling operation
This function is used to adjust the opening of the electronic expansion valve so that
superheating degree (SH), which is calculated from the detection temperature (Tg) of the gas
pipe thermistor (R3T) and the detection temperature (Tl) of the liquid temperature thermistor
(R2T) of the indoor unit, will come close to a target superheating degree (SHS).
At that time, correction to the superheating degree is made according to the differences (T)
between set temperature and suction air temperature.
SH = Tg – Tl
Where,
SH: Evaporator outlet superheating degree (°C)

Tg: Indoor unit gas pipe temperature (R3T)
Tl: Indoor unit liquid pipe temperature (R2T)
SHS (Target superheating degree)

 Normally 5°C.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes larger, SHS becomes
lower.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes lower, SHS becomes
larger.
 Subcooling degree control in heating operation
This function is used to adjust the opening of the electronic expansion valve so that the high
pressure equivalent saturated temperature (Tc), which is converted from the detected pressure
of the high pressure sensor in the outdoor unit, and the subcooling degree (SC), which is
calculated from the detected temperature (Tl) of the liquid temperature thermistor (R2T) in the
indoor unit, will come close to the target subcooling degree (SCS).
At that time, corrections to the subcooling degree are made according to differences (T)
between set temperature and suction air temperatures.
SC = Tc – Tl
Where,
SC: Condenser outlet subcooling degree (°C)

Tc: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature detected by the high pressure sensor
(S1NPH)
Tl: Indoor unit liquid pipe temperature (R2T)
SCS (Target subcooling degree)

 Normally 5°C.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes larger, SCS becomes
lower.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes lower, SCS becomes
larger.

9.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A,

FXFQ-A only)
Unevenness of room temperature and the startup time are improved by repeating 2-direction
horizontal blow-off and swing alternately.
9.11.1 Initiation Conditions of Circulation Operation

When operation starts (in the startup state)
Circulation airflow operation is performed.
During normal operation

The unit automatically determines operation based on the room temperature condition and time
to switch circulation airflow operation and the normal auto airflow rate and direction (eco full
automatic control).
Circulation airflow operation continues for up to 90 minutes
Circulation airflow Auto airflow rate and direction Circulation airflow

Room temp.
Set temp.
Target temp. Δt
Time
9.11.2 Operational Concept (Standard Panel)

Cooling : Factory setting
Movement pattern (a) (b) (c) (d)
01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
(seconds) 03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600
Heating : Factory setting

01: Pattern 1 120 120 120 120

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 120 0 0
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 0 120 0
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (the flap is inverted).

9.11.3 Operational Concept (Designer Panel)

01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600

01: Pattern 1 120 120 120 120

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 120 0 0
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 0 120 0
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (the flap is inverted).
9.12 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)

At startup with thermostat ON or after the completion of defrosting in heating operation, the
indoor fan is controlled to prevent cold air from blasting out and ensure startup capacity.
TH2: Temperature detected with the gas thermistor
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Starting condition Ending condition

· Defrost ending · Lapse of 3 minutes
OR · Oil return ending OR · TH2 > 34˚C
· Thermostat ON · Tc > 52˚C
Hot start control Hot start in progress
H/L remote Normal control

controller setting
Fan
LL
The fan is not OFF before initiating the hot start: LL
The fan is OFF before initiating the hot start: OFF
OFF
Remote controller Normal control
Louver
setting
P0 (Horizontal)

9.13 Heater Control

Note(s) Optional PCB KRP1B... is required for heater control..
Normal control
While in heating operation, the heater control (ON/OFF) is conducted as shown below.
ON Set temperature
OFF
2ºC 2ºC
Overload control
When the system is overloaded in heating operation, the heater will be turned OFF in the
following two manners.
1. The heater control (ON/OFF) is conducted through the liquid pipe temperature (R2T) of the
indoor unit.
ON 43ºC 50ºC Liquid pipe temperature
OFF
2. The heater control (ON/OFF) is conducted by converting the heater temperature into the
condensing pressure equivalent saturated temperature (Tc) according to the temperature
detection through the high pressure sensor (S1NPH) of the outdoor unit.
ON 50ºC 60ºC Condensing pressure
equivalent saturated
temperature
OFF
Fan residual operation

While the heater turns OFF, in order to prevent the activation of the thermal protector, the fan
conducts residual operation for a given period of time after the heater turns OFF. (This
operation is conducted regardless of with or without heater equipped.)
Residual operation time is 100 seconds on ceiling suspended type or 60 seconds on other
types.
9.14 Streamer Operation

The streamer will become active when the air conditioner is turned off and the fan completely
stops (circuit breaker: ON). After 180 minutes, streamer operation is automatically stopped.

SiMT342301E
Part 5
Field Settings and
Test Operation
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit...............................................................150
1.1 Field Settings with Remote Controller ..................................................150
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .....................................................159
1.3 Applicable Field Settings ......................................................................161
1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit................................................168
1.5 List of Field Settings for Air Treatment Equipment...............................186
1.6 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................189
2. Field Setting from Outdoor Unit...........................................................191
2.1 DIP Switch Setting when Mounting a Spare PCB ................................191
2.2 Accessing the BS Buttons on the PCB.................................................193
2.3 Operating the BS Buttons and DIP Switches on the PCB....................194
2.4 Connecting the PC Configurator to the Outdoor Unit ...........................197
2.5 Monitoring Function and Field Settings ................................................197
2.6 Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation...................212
2.7 Energy Saving and Optimum Operation...............................................217
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................220
3.1 Precautions Before Starting Test Operation.........................................220
3.2 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................222
3.3 Correcting after Abnormal Completion .................................................223
3.4 Error Code............................................................................................223
Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation 149

Field Settings for Indoor Unit SiMT342301E
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit

1.1 Field Settings with Remote Controller
Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of
installation or after service inspection / repair, make the field setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause error.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change.)
1.1.1 BRC1E63, BRC1F61

Basic screen
(1) 1 Press and hold Cancel button for 4

seconds or more.
Service settings menu is displayed.
2 Select Field settings in the service

settings menu, and press Menu/Enter
button.
Field settings screen is displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select desired

mode No. by using (Up/Down)
button.
Service settings menu screen
4 In the case of setting per indoor unit
(2) during group control (When Mode No.
such as 20, 21, 22, 23, 25 are
selected), highlight the unit No. and
select indoor unit No. to be set by
using (Up/Down) button. (In the
case of group total setting, this
operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per
indoor unit, current settings are
displayed. And, second code No.
“ - ” means no function.
Press Menu/Enter button.
5 Highlight second code No. of the first
Field settings screen
code No. to be changed, and select
desired second code No. by using
In the case of individual In the case of group total (Up/Down) button. Multiple identical
setting per indoor unit setting
mode number settings are available.
(3) (3) In the case of group total setting, all
(4) (5) of second code No. which may be
set are displayed as “ ”.
(5)
“ ” is changed to second code No.
to be set. And, second code No. “ - ”
means no function.
Second code No.
First code No.
150 Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation

SiMT342301E Field Settings for Indoor Unit
6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting

Setting confirmation screen
confirmation screen is displayed.
(6)
(7) 7 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
button. Setting details are determined
and field settings screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat (3) to (7).
9 After all setting changes are

completed, press Cancel button twice.

10 Backlight goes out, and Checking the
connection. Please standby. is
displayed for initialization. After the
initialization, the basic screen returns.
Setting confirmed
CAUTION
When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
For field setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the
outdoor unit.

1.1.2 BRC1H62 Series

This section describes how to perform field setting.
Enter the Installer Menu and make settings.
Installer menu screen

Press or button, for move to “ ”.
If Bluetooth is connected, performing field setting from
the remote controller side is impossible.
Disconnect Bluetooth, or perform field setting from the
mobile application.
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, to select Mode No. and press
a Mode 20 to enter the field setting menu.
b Unit 00 a Mode No.
b Unit No.
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, to scroll the desired Mode No.
Mode 20 and press button.
Unit 00
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, to select Unit No. and press
Mode 20 button.
Unit 00

Sub-menu screen
Press or button, scroll to the desired Unit No. and
Mode 20 then press button to set the selection.
Unit 00
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, to select “ ”, and then press
Mode 20 button to set the selection.
Unit 00
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, select First Code No., and then
a SW 00 press button.
b – 01 a First Code No.
b Second Code No.
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, scroll to the desired First code
SW 00 No. and then press button to set the selection.
– 01

Sub-menu screen
Press or button, to move Second Code No., and
SW 00 then press button.
– 01
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, to scroll to the desired Second
SW 00 Code No., and then press button.
– 01
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, select “ ”, and then press
SW 00 button to save the setting and return to the previous
– 01 screen.
If the setting is not changed, select “ ”.
Sub-menu screen
Press or button, move to “ ”, and then press
Mode 20 button to return to the installer menu.
Unit 00 * If the setting has been changed, the screen may
return to the home screen without returning to the
installer menu.
CAUTION
• The connection of optional accessories to the indoor unit might cause changes to some field
settings. For more information, see the installation manual of the optional accessory.
• For details about the specific field settings of each type of indoor unit, see the installation manual
of the indoor unit.
• Field settings that are not available for a connected indoor unit are not displayed.
• Field setting default values are different depending on the indoor unit model.
NOTICE
• Installation of optional accessories on the indoor unit may require changes to field settings.
See the manual of the optional accessory.
• For field setting details related to the indoor unit, see installation manual shipped with the indoor unit.

1.1.3 BRC2E61
[Basic screen]
(1) 1. Press and hold both the Mode Selector

button ( ) and the Temperature
Setting (down) button ( ) for 4
seconds or longer.
Press and hold 2 buttons

for 4 seconds or longer.
[Field setting mode screen]
(2) 2. Select the desired “Mode No.” by using

( ).
(3) 3. In the case of setting per indoor unit

during group control (when a Mode No.
such as 20, 21, 22, 23 or 25 is selected),
select the “Indoor unit No.” to be set by
using the Fan Speed Control button ( ).
(In the case of group setting, this
operation is not needed.)
(4)
4. Select the FIRST CODE NO. to be
changed by using the Temperature
Setting (up) button ( ) and SECOND
CODE NO. to be changed by using the
FIRST CODE NO.
(4) ( ).
Multiple identical mode number
settings are available.
SECOND CODE NO.
(5) 5. Press the Mode Selector button ( ).

Field setting mode is set.
6. In the case of multiple setting changes,

Field setting mode is set
repeat (2) to (4).

[Initialization screen] 7. After all setting changes are

(7) completed, press both the Mode
( ) for 1 second.
“ ” is displayed during initialization.
[Basic screen] 8. After the initialization, the basic screen

(8) returns.
CAUTION
When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. Refer to the manual of the optional accessory.
For field setting details of the outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual
attached to the outdoor unit.

1.1.4 BRC4C, BRC7CB, BRC7E(A) Series
UP button
Mode No.
RESERVE button
First code No.
MODE button
Second code No.
INSPECTION/TEST
button
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
 Mode No.
 First code No.
 Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

1. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the field
setting mode.
2. Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3. Press the UP button to select the first code No.
4. Press the DOWN button to select the second code No.
5. Press the RESERVE button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to return to the normal mode.

1.1.5 BRC4M, BRC7M Series
Mode No.
First code Second

No. code No.
4
3
5
1,6
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
 Mode No.
 First code No.
 Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

1. Hold down the INSPECTION button for at least 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the
field setting mode.
2. Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3. Press the FAN or BACK LIGHT button to select the first code No.
4. Press the TEMP button to select the second code No.
5. Press the RESERVE button to set the present settings.
6. Press the INSPECTION button to return to the normal mode.

1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

Mode First Second Code No.
Reference
No. Code Description Page
(2) No. 01 02 03 04
Filter Ultra long life Approx. Approx.
cleaning filter 10,000 5,000
sign hrs. hrs.
interval
Long life filter Approx. Approx.
0 Light 2,500 Heavy 1,250 — — 168
hrs. hrs.
Standard filter Approx. Approx.
200 100
hrs. hrs.
1 Filter type Long life filter Ultra long life filter — — 168
Remote controller Remote controller
thermistor thermistor + Only suction air Only remote
2 controller — 169
Suction air thermistor
thermistor
thermistor
3 Filter cleaning sign Displayed Not displayed — — 170
10 Information for intelligent
(20) Touch Manager /
5 intelligent Touch Refer to the page on the right for details. 170
Controller
Remote controller
6 thermistor control during Not permitted Permitted — — 169
group control
Time for absence area
7 detection 30 minutes 60 minutes — — 171
Dry operation time during Continuous

VRTsmart control (not
10 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes returning 171
to cooling)
Low airflow setting when
11 thermostat OFF during Disabled Enabled — — 172
VRTsmart control
12 Streamer operation — ON OFF — 172
Indoor fan settings during
2 cooling/heating thermostat Normal Fan OFF — — 172
OFF
3 Setting of airflow rate Standard Slightly increased Increased — 172

when heating
Detection rate setting Infrared
Standard
6 High sensitivity Low sensitivity sensitivity presence 172
sensor

11 disabled
(21) Automatic airflow Start of
Completion of
7 adjustment OFF airflow — 173
airflow adjustment
adjustment
Compensating the Priority given on Priority
temperature around Suction air given on the
8 the suction air Standard 174
people temperature only floor
temperature
temperature
Compensating the floor
9 –4°C –2°C 0°C +2°C 174
temperature when heating
0 Optional accessories Indoor unit turned — Operation Error output 174

output selection ON by thermostat output
1 External ON/OFF input Refer to the page on the right for details. 175
2 Thermostat differential 1°C 0.5°C — — 175

changeover
Airflow setting when
3 LL tap Set fan speed — — 175
heating thermostat is OFF
12
(22) Automatic mode
4 Refer to the page on the right for details. 175
differential
Auto restart after power
5 failure OFF ON — — 176
Airflow setting when

6 LL tap Set fan speed — — 176
cooling thermostat is OFF
Compensating the floor
11 +4°C +2°C 0°C –2°C 176
temperature when cooling

Mode First Second Code No.

Reference
No. Code Description Page
(2) No. 01 02 03 04
Ceiling height setting,
Setting of normal airflow
Airflow direction setting 2-way
1 4-way airflow 3-way airflow — 179
airflow
2 Swing pattern settings All direction — Facing — 179

synchronized swing swing
Operation of downward
3 Equipped Not equipped — — 179
flow flap
Airflow direction
adjustment range
Fan speed setting for Fan speed setting
13 5 streamer option Default fan speed for streamer option — — 180
(23)
Setting of static pressure
5 Standard High static pressure — — 180
selection
External static pressure
settings
Setting of swing patterns
7 when cooling thermostat is Refer to the page on the right for details. 182
OFF
Setting of circulation
13 airflow Disabled Enabled — — 182
14 Circulation airflow patterns Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 183

15 Switching panel type Standard panel Designer panel — — 183
Mold proof operation For high
14
9 setting — Standard humidity — 183
(24)
areas
Humidification when
1 Not equipped Equipped — — 184
heating thermostat is OFF
2 Direct duct connection Not equipped Equipped — — 184
15
(25) Drain pump and humidifier
3 Not interlocked Interlocked — — 184
interlock selection
Individual ventilation
5 setting Normal Individual — — 184
Display of error codes on Four-digit

4 — Two-digit display — 184
the remote controller display
1b Setting
14 restricted/permitted for Refer to the page on the right for details. 184
airflow block
0 Room temperature display Not displayed Displayed — — 185
Shut-off in case of no
4 Invalid 60 min. 90 min. 120 min. —
occupation
5 Energy-saving mode in Invalid Valid — — —

case of no occupation
1c
Direct blowing or against Against
6 direct blowing (in cooling Invalid Direct blowing direct — —
mode) blowing
8 Against direct blowing Invalid Valid — — —
14 Hotel key card function OFF ON — — —
3 Enable fan 5 speed setting Enabled Disabled — — —
1E
14 Streamer display Disabled Enabled — — 185
F0 0-5 Hotel key card function Refer to the page on the right for details. 185
settings
Note(s) 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No. inside
parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however cannot be checked except
in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so they cannot
be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions the indoor unit
is not equipped with.
4. 88 may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is resetting when returning to the normal mode.

1.3 Applicable Field Settings

Mode No. First Code No. Setting Contents FXFTQ-A FXFSQ-A FXFRQ-A FXFQ-A
0 Filter cleaning sign interval    
1 Filter type    
2 Remote controller thermistor    
3 Filter cleaning sign    
5 Information for intelligent Touch Manager / intelligent Touch Controller    
10 (20)
6 Remote controller thermistor control during group control    
7 Time for absence area detection   ― ―
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart control    
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart control    
12 Streamer operation  ―  ―
2 Indoor fan settings during cooling/heating thermostat OFF    
3 Setting of airflow rate when heating    
6 Detection rate setting   ― ―
11 (21)
7 Automatic airflow adjustment ― ― ― ―
8 Compensating the temperature around people   ― ―
9 Compensating the floor temperature when heating   ― ―
0 Optional accessories output selection    
1 External ON/OFF input    
2 Thermostat differential changeover    
3 Airflow setting when heating thermostat is OFF    
12 (22)
4 Automatic mode differential    
5 Auto restart after power failure    
6 Airflow setting when cooling thermostat is OFF    
11 Compensating the floor temperature when cooling   ― ―
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow    
1 Airflow direction setting    
2 Swing pattern settings    
3 Operation of downward flow flap ― ― ― ―
4 Airflow direction adjustment range    
5 Fan speed setting for streamer option ― ― ― ―
13 (23)
5 Setting of static pressure selection ― ― ― ―
6 External static pressure settings ― ― ― ―
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF    
13 Setting of circulation airflow    
14 Circulation airflow patterns    
15 Switching panel type    
14 (24) 9 Mold proof operation setting ― ― ― ―
1 Humidification when heating thermostat is OFF    
2 Direct duct connection    
15 (25)
3 Drain pump and humidifier interlock selection    
5 Individual ventilation setting    
4 Display of error codes on the remote controller    
1b
14 Setting restricted/permitted for airflow block    
0 Room temperature display    
4 Shut-off in case of no occupation ― ― ― ―
5 Energy-saving mode in case of no occupation ― ― ― ―
1c
6 Direct blowing or against direct blowing ― ― ― ―
8 Against direct blowing ― ― ― ―
14 Hotel key card function ― ― ― ―
3 Enable fan 5 speed setting    
1E
14 Streamer display  ―  ―
F0 0-5 Hotel key card function settings ― ― ― ―
 : Available
― : Not available

Mode No. First Code No. Setting Contents FXZQ-B FXCQ-B FXEQ-A FXKQ-MA
1 Filter type   ― ―
10 (20)
7 Time for absence area detection  ― ― ―
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart control   ― ―
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart control   ― ―
12 Streamer operation   ― ―
6 Detection rate setting  ― ― ―
11 (21)
8 Compensating the temperature around people  ― ― ―
9 Compensating the floor temperature when heating  ― ― ―
12 (22)
11 Compensating the floor temperature when cooling  ― ― ―
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow  1  
1 Airflow direction setting  ― ― ―
2 Swing pattern settings  ― ― ―
3 Operation of downward flow flap ― ― ― 
4 Airflow direction adjustment range    
5 Fan speed setting for streamer option  ― ― ―
13 (23)
5 Setting of static pressure selection ― 1 ― ―
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF    
13 Setting of circulation airflow ― ― ― ―
14 Circulation airflow patterns ― ― ― ―
15 Switching panel type ― ― ― ―
14 (24) 9 Mold proof operation setting ― ―  ―
2 Direct duct connection  ― ― ―
15 (25)
1b
14 Setting restricted/permitted for airflow block  ― ― ―
1c
3 Enable fan 5 speed setting ―   ―
1E
14 Streamer display   ― ―
 : Available
― : Not available
1: FXCQ20-63BVM only

FXDQ-PD
Mode No. First Code No. Setting Contents FXDSQ-A FXDBQ-A FXDQ-T
FXDQ-ND
1 Filter type  ―  
10 (20)
7 Time for absence area detection  ― ― ―
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart control ―   ―
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart control ―   ―
12 Streamer operation ― ― ― ―
2 Indoor fan settings during cooling/heating thermostat OFF    ―
6 Detection rate setting  ― ― ―
11 (21)
8 Compensating the temperature around people  ― ― ―
9 Compensating the floor temperature when heating  ― ― ―
12 (22)
11 Compensating the floor temperature when cooling  ― ― ―
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow  ― ― ―
1 Airflow direction setting ― ― ― ―
2 Swing pattern settings ― ― ― ―
4 Airflow direction adjustment range  ― ― ―
13 (23)
5 Setting of static pressure selection    
6 External static pressure settings  ― ― ―
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF  ― ― ―
2 Direct duct connection  ― ― ―
15 (25)
3 Drain pump and humidifier interlock selection  ―  
5 Individual ventilation setting  ―  
1b
14 Setting restricted/permitted for airflow block ― — — ―
4 Shut-off in case of no occupation  ― ― ―
5 Energy-saving mode in case of no occupation  ― ― ―
1c
6 Direct blowing or against direct blowing  ― ― ―
8 Against direct blowing  ― ― ―
14 Hotel key card function ―  ― ―
3 Enable fan 5 speed setting   ― ―
1E
14 Streamer display ― ― ― ―
F0 0-5 Hotel key card function settings ―  ― ―
 : Available
― : Not available

Mode No. First Code No. Setting Contents FXDQ-SP FXSQ-PA FXDYQ-MA FXMQ-PA
0 Filter cleaning sign interval   ― 
1 Filter type   ― 
3 Filter cleaning sign   ― 
10 (20)
7 Time for absence area detection ― ― ― ―
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart control ―  ― 
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart control ―  ― 
6 Detection rate setting ― ― ― ―
11 (21)
7 Automatic airflow adjustment ―  ― 1
8 Compensating the temperature around people ― ― ― ―
9 Compensating the floor temperature when heating ― ― ― ―
12 (22)
11 Compensating the floor temperature when cooling ― ― ― ―
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow ― ― ― ―
4 Airflow direction adjustment range ― ― ― ―
13 (23)
5 Setting of static pressure selection  ― ― ―
6 External static pressure settings ―  ― 
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF ― ― ― ―
2 Direct duct connection ― ― ― ―
15 (25)
1b
14 Setting restricted/permitted for airflow block ― ― ― ―
1c
3 Enable fan 5 speed setting ― ― ― ―
1E
 : Available
― : Not available
1: FXMQ20-125PAVE only

Mode No. First Code No. Setting Contents FXMQ-PV1A FXMQ-M FXMQ-PVM FXUQ-A
1 Filter type    ―
10 (20)
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart control  ―  ―
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart control  ―  ―
11 (21)
7 Automatic airflow adjustment  ―  ―
12 (22)
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow ― ― ― 
1 Airflow direction setting ― ― ― 
4 Airflow direction adjustment range ― ― ― 
13 (23)
6 External static pressure settings  ―  ―
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF ― ― ― 
15 (25)
1b
1c
1E
 : Available
― : Not available

FXLQ-MA
Mode No. First Code No. Setting Contents FXHQ-MA FXHQ-B FXAQ-A
FXNQ-MA
1 Filter type ― ― ― ―
10 (20)
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart control ― ―  ―
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart control ― ― ― ―
12 Streamer operation ―  ― ―
11 (21)
12 (22)
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow    ―
4 Airflow direction adjustment range    ―
13 (23)
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF ― ―  ―
15 (25)
3 Drain pump and humidifier interlock selection   ― ―
1b
1c
1E
14 Streamer display ―  ― ―
 : Available
― : Not available

FXBQ-P
Mode No. First Code No. Setting Contents FXNQ-A2 FXVQ-N
FXBPQ-P
0 Filter cleaning sign interval   ―
1 Filter type   ―
2 Remote controller thermistor   
3 Filter cleaning sign   
5 Information for intelligent Touch Manager / intelligent Touch Controller   
10 (20)
6 Remote controller thermistor control during group control  ― 
7 Time for absence area detection ― ― ―
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart control ― ― ―
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart control ― ― ―
12 Streamer operation ― ― ―
2 Indoor fan settings during cooling/heating thermostat OFF   
3 Setting of airflow rate when heating   
6 Detection rate setting ― ― ―
11 (21)
7 Automatic airflow adjustment ― ― ―
8 Compensating the temperature around people ― ― ―
9 Compensating the floor temperature when heating ― ― ―
0 Optional accessories output selection   
1 External ON/OFF input   
2 Thermostat differential changeover   
3 Airflow setting when heating thermostat is OFF   
12 (22)
4 Automatic mode differential   
5 Auto restart after power failure   
6 Airflow setting when cooling thermostat is OFF  ― 
11 Compensating the floor temperature when cooling ― ― ―
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow ― ― ―
1 Airflow direction setting ― ― ―
2 Swing pattern settings ― ― ―
3 Operation of downward flow flap ― ― ―
4 Airflow direction adjustment range ― ― ―
5 Fan speed setting for streamer option ― ― ―
13 (23)
5 Setting of static pressure selection  ― ―
6 External static pressure settings ― ― ―
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF ― ― ―
13 Setting of circulation airflow ― ― ―
14 Circulation airflow patterns ― ― ―
15 Switching panel type ― ― ―
14 (24) 9 Mold proof operation setting ― ― ―
1 Humidification when heating thermostat is OFF   
2 Direct duct connection ―  ―
15 (25)
3 Drain pump and humidifier interlock selection ― ― ―
5 Individual ventilation setting   
4 Display of error codes on the remote controller   
1b
14 Setting restricted/permitted for airflow block ― ― ―
0 Room temperature display   
4 Shut-off in case of no occupation ― ― ―
5 Energy-saving mode in case of no occupation ― ― ―
1c
6 Direct blowing or against direct blowing ― ― ―
8 Against direct blowing ― ― ―
14 Hotel key card function ― ― ―
3 Enable fan 5 speed setting ― ― ―
1E
14 Streamer display ― ― ―
F0 0-5 Hotel key card function settings ― ― ―
 : Available
― : Not available

1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

1.4.1 Filter Cleaning Sign Interval, Filter Type
When the setting 10 (20)-3 is set to 01 (Displayed), filter cleaning sign is displayed on the
remote controller after a certain period of operation time. This setting is used to change the
display interval of filter cleaning sign when the filter contamination is heavy.
The filter cleaning sign interval is determined as follows depending on the combination of Mode
No. 10 (20)-0 and 10 (20)-1.
Filter cleaning sign interval

10 (20)-1 01: Long life filter 02: Ultra long life filter
Setting Filter contamination Light Heavy Light Heavy
heavy/light 10 (20)-0 01 02 01 02
FXFTQ-A
FXFSQ-A
FXFRQ-A
FXFQ-A
FXZQ-B
FXCQ-B
FXEQ-A
FXKQ-MA
FXDSQ-A
FXDBQ-A
FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND
FXDQ-T
FXDQ-SP 2,500 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 10,000 hrs. 5,000 hrs.
Model
FXSQ-PA
FXDYQ-MA
FXMQ-PA
FXMQ-PV1A
FXMQ-M
FXMQ-PVM
FXUQ-A
FXHQ-MA
FXHQ-B
FXLQ-MA
FXNQ-MA
FXNQ-A2
FXVQ-N
FXAQ-A 200 hrs. 100 hrs. 200 hrs. 100 hrs.

1.4.2 Remote Controller Thermistor

Select a thermistor to control the room temperature.
When the unit is not equipped with an infrared floor sensor: : Factory setting
Mode First Code Second Contents
No. No. Code No.
Remote controller thermistor and suction air thermistor
01
in indoor unit
10 (20) 2
02 Suction air thermistor
03 Remote controller thermistor
The factory setting for the Second code No. is 01 and room temperature is controlled by the
suction air thermistor for indoor unit and remote controller thermistor. When the Second code
No. is set to 02, room temperature is controlled by the suction air thermistor. When the Second
code No. is set to 03, room temperature is controlled by the remote controller thermistor. For
FXVQ-N series, the factory setting for the Second code No. is 02 and Second code No. 03 is not
available.
36
34 In cooling
32
Set temperature (°C)
Suction air Remote controller Suction air

30 thermistor thermistor thermistor
28 Suction air Remote controller Suction air

thermistor thermistor thermistor
26
24
22
20
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
Suction air temperature (°C)
32
30
28
26 In heating
thermistor thermistor thermistor
24
22 thermistor thermistor thermistor
20
18
16
14
14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
Suction air temperature (°C)

When the unit is equipped with an infrared floor sensor: : Factory setting
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No.
10 (20) 2 01 02 02 02# 02 03
11 (21) 8 01 01 02 03# 04 01
The thermistor to be used
Remote controller thermistor — — — —
Suction air thermistor —
Infrared floor sensor — — —
The infrared floor Priority given to Priority given to the

sensor is not used the suction air floor temperature ()
temperature ()
Only the remote
Only the suction air Standard setting controller thermistor
thermistor is used (Factory setting) is used
Refer to Compensating the temperature around people on page 174.

Note that the control is automatically switched to the one performed only by the suction air
thermistor for indoor unit when the Second code No. is 01 during group control.
To use the remote controller thermistor during the group control, select the Second code No. 02
in First code No. 6.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
Remote controller thermistor control is not
01 permitted during group control
10 (20) 6
Remote controller thermistor control is
02
permitted during group control
1.4.3 Filter Cleaning Sign

Whether or not to display Filter Cleaning after operation of a certain duration can be selected.
Mode Second Code
First Code No. Contents
No. No.
01 Displayed
10 (20) 3
02 Not displayed
1.4.4 Information for intelligent Touch Manager / intelligent Touch

Controller
Mode First Code Second
Contents
No. No. Code No.
Only indoor unit sensor value (or remote controller sensor
01
10 (20) 5 value, if installed.)
02 Sensor values according to 10 (20)-2 and 10 (20)-6.
 When field setting 10 (20)-6-02 is set at the same time as 10 (20)-2-01,02,03, field setting 10
(20)-2 has priority. When field setting 10 (20)-6-01 is set at the same time as 10
(20)-2-01,02,03, field setting 10 (20)-6 has priority for group connection, and 10 (20)-2 has
priority for individual connection.

1.4.5 Time for Absence Area Detection

By selecting the energy-saving operation mode when absent, the target temperature is shifted
to the energy-saving end by 1°C (maximum 2°C) after the state of absence continues for a
certain period of time.
Absent time defined for detection can be selected as follows:
Mode Second Code
No. No.
01 30 minutes
10 (20) 7
02 60 minutes
Detection
State of absence
31
30
29
28
27 Cooling (at 28°C)
26
21
Heating (at 20°C)
20
19
18
17
30 (60) 60 (120)
Elapsed time of absence (min.)
The values in parentheses represent the time
when Second code No. is 02.
 The set temperature displayed on the remote controller remains the same even if the target
temperature is shifted.
 As soon as people are detected while the temperature is shifted, this control will be
cancelled (reset).
1.4.6 Dry Operation Time during VRTsmart Control

 If you switch the operation mode to "Dry" while the VRTsmart control is enabled, the mode
will automatically switch to "Cooling" after a certain period of time is elapsed.
If you want to increase the duration of dry operation, change the Second code No. as
indicated in the following table.
Note 1) Increasing duration of dry operation degrades the energy efficiency
Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes
10 (20) 10
03 90 minutes
04 Continuous (not returning to cooling)
Note 2) When group control is enabled, all indoor units in the same group have a same set value for
duration of dry operation.
Note 3) For FXFQ-A and FXDBQ-A, the Second code No. is factory set to 04.

1.4.7 Low Airflow Setting when Thermostat OFF during VRTsmart Control
This setting changes the airflow volume to LL in coordination with the VRTsmart control when
cooling thermostat OFF is set. Also, the airflow direction is changed to horizontal.
When disabled:
12 (22)-6 (the airflow volume setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled)
13 (23)-7 (the swing setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled) is as set
When enabled: LL when Te ≥ 7°C
Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Disabled
10 (20) 11
02 Enabled
1.4.8 Streamer Operation

The operation of internal cleaning can be turned ON/OFF.
Contents
No. No. Code No.
02 ON
10 (20) 12
03 OFF
When removing the streamer internal cleaning unit, set Second Code No. to 03 and turn on the
power supply again. When reassembling, set the Second Code No. to 02.
1.4.9 Indoor Fan Settings during Cooling/Heating Thermostat OFF

Mode Second Code
No. No.
01 Normal
11 (21) 2
02 Fan OFF
1.4.10 Setting of Airflow Rate when Heating

The fan revolution is changed to maintain the sufficient distance for warm air to reach during the
heating operation. The setting should be changed depending on the installation condition of the
unit.
Mode First Code Second Code
Contents
No. No. No.
01 Standard
11 (21) 3 02 Slightly increased
03 Increased
Note that this setting is effective only during the heating operation.
1.4.11 Detection Rate Setting

Set the sensitivity of the infrared presence sensor.
 The infrared presence sensor can be disabled by selecting the Second code No. 04.
When the infrared presence sensor is disabled, the remote controller menu does not display
some functions such as the automatic draft reduction, energy-saving operation in absence and
halt in absence.
No. No. No. Contents
01 High sensitivity
02 Low sensitivity
11 (21) 6
03 Standard sensitivity
04 Infrared presence sensor disabled

1.4.12 Automatic Airflow Adjustment

Make external static pressure setting automatically using automatic airflow adjustment
(11 (21)-7), or manually using external static pressure settings (13 (23)-6).
The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated quantity.
Make settings before performing the test operation of the outdoor unit.
Setting procedure
1. Make sure that electric wiring and duct construction have been completed. In particular, if
the closing damper is installed on the way of the duct, make sure that it is open. In addition,
make sure that a field-supplied air filter is installed within the air passageway on the suction
port side.
2. If there are multiple blow-off and suction ports, adjust the throttle part so that the airflow
volume ratio of each suction/blow-off port conforms to the designed airflow volume ratio. In
that case, operate the unit with the operation mode "fan". When you want to change the
airflow rate, adjust it by pressing the airflow rate control button to select High, Middle or Low.
3. Make settings to adjust the airflow rate automatically. After setting the operation mode to
"fan", enter the field setting mode while operation is stopped and then select the Mode No.
"(21) (11 for batch setting)", set the First Code No. to 7 and the Second Code No. to 03. After
setting, return to the basic screen (to the normal mode in the case of a wireless remote
controller) and press the ON/OFF button. Fan operation for automatic airflow adjustment will
start with the operation lamp turned ON. Do not adjust the throttle part of the suction and
blow-off ports during automatic adjustment. After operation for approximately one to fifteen
minutes, airflow adjustment automatically stops with the operation lamp turned OFF.
4. After operation stopped, make sure that the Second Code No. is set to 02 as in the following
table by indoor unit with the Mode No. of (21). If operation does not stop automatically or the
Second Code No. is not set to 02, return to the step 3. above to make settings again.
Mode First Second
No. Code No. Code No. Contents
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
Note(s) 1. Make sure that the external static pressure is within the range of specifications before making
settings. If it is outside the range, automatic adjustment fails, which may cause an insufficient
airflow volume or leakage of water.
2. If the air passageway including duct or blow-off ports is changed after automatic adjustment,
make sure to perform automatic airflow adjustment again.

1.4.13 Compensating the Temperature around People

Change the ratio between the suction air temperature and floor temperature used to calculate
the temperature around people.
The temperature around people is calculated using the values of the suction air thermistor and
the infrared floor sensor. The factory setting is "Normal" (the average value of the suction air
temperature and the floor temperature is applied). However, the rate at which the suction air
thermistor and the infrared floor sensor affect the temperature around people can be changed
with this setting.
 To reflect the effect of the temperature around the ceiling, select the "Priorities given on the
suction air temperature" (the Second code No. 02).
 To reflect the effect of the temperature around the floor, select the "Priorities given on the
floor temperature" (the Second code No. 04).
 The infrared floor sensor can be disabled by selecting "Suction air temperature only" (the
Second code No. 01).
Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Suction air temperature only
02 Priority given on the suction air temperature
11 (21) 8
03 Standard
04 Priority given on the floor temperature
1.4.14 Compensating the Floor Temperature when Heating

Offset the detected value of the infrared floor sensor with a certain temperature. This setting
should be used to have the actual floor temperature detected when, for example, the unit is
installed close to a wall.
Contents
No. No. No.
01 –4°C
02 –2°C
11 (21) 9
03 0°C
04 +2°C
Actual procedure to use the setting

Although the standard setting is normally used with no problem, the setting should be changed
in the following cases:
Environment Problem Setting Value
- The unit is installed close to a wall or a window. Excessive heating +2°C
- High thermal capacity of the floor (such as concrete, etc.).
- There are many heat sources including PC. Insufficient heating –2°C or –4°C
- There is a non-negligible heat source such as floor heating.
1.4.15 Optional Accessories Output Selection

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals X1 and X2 of "adaptor for wiring", an optional
accessory.
Mode First Second Contents
No. Code No. Code No.
01 Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is provided.
02 —
12 (22) 0 03 Output linked with ON/OFF of remote controller is provided.
In case of Error Display appears on the remote controller, output is
04
provided.

1.4.16 External ON/OFF Input

This input is used for "ON/OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T2 terminal of the operation terminal block in the electrical
component box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced OFF
Input A
Mode First Second
Contents
ON: Forced OFF (prohibition of using the remote controller)
01
OFF: Permission of using the remote controller
OFF  ON: Operation
02
ON  OFF: Stop
12 (22) 1
ON: Operation
03 OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit indicates A0. The
other indoor units indicate U9.
08 Hotel key card function ()
Note(s) Be sure to use only wired remote controller, BRC2E61, BRC1H62W or BRC1H62K, which
supports hotel key card function.
1.4.17 Thermostat Differential Changeover

Set when remote sensor is to be used.
Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 1ºC
12 (22) 2
02 0.5ºC
1.4.18 Airflow Setting when Heating Thermostat is OFF

This setting is used to set airflow when heating thermostat is OFF.
 When thermostat OFF airflow volume up mode is used, careful consideration is required
before deciding installation location.
No. No. Code No. Contents
01 LL tap
12 (22) 3
02 Set fan speed
1.4.19 Automatic Mode Differential

This setting makes it possible to change differential values for mode selection while in automatic
operation mode.
First Code Second Code No.

Mode No. No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 (22) 4 0°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
The automatic operation mode setting is made by the use of the "Operation Mode Selector"
button.

1.4.20 Auto Restart after Power Failure

Mode First Second
Contents
01 OFF
12 (22) 5
02 ON
When the "Auto Restart after Power Failure" setting is turned OFF, all the units will remain OFF
after power failure, or after the main power supply is restored. When this setting is turned ON
(factory setting), the units that were operating before the power failure will automatically restart
operation after power failure, or after the main power supply is restored.
Due to the aforementioned, when the "Auto restart after power failure” setting is ON, be careful
for the following situations that may occur.
1. The air conditioner will start operation suddenly after power failure,
Caution or when the main power supply is restored. The user might be surprised
and wonder why the air conditioner turned ON suddenly.
2. During maintenance, if the main power supply is turned OFF while the
units are in operation, the units will automatically start operation
(the fan will rotate) after the power supply is restored due to completion
of the maintenance work.
1.4.21 Airflow Setting when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set airflow to LL airflow when cooling thermostat is OFF.
Mode First Code Second Code Contents
No. No. No.
01 LL tap
12 (22) 6
02 Set fan speed
1.4.22 Compensating the Floor Temperature when Cooling

Offset the detected value of the infrared floor sensor with a certain temperature. This setting
should be used to have the actual floor temperature detected when, for example, the unit is
installed close to a wall.
Contents
No. No. No.
01 +4°C
02 +2°C
12 (22) 11
03 0°C
04 –2°C
Specific usages of this setting

There is no problem with the standard setting in the usual condition. Change the setting in the
cases indicated in the following table.
Environment Problem Setting Value
- The unit is installed close to a wall or a window. Insufficient cooling +2°C or +4°C
- High thermal capacity of the floor (such as concrete, etc.).
- There are many heat sources including PC. Excessive cooling –2°C
- There is a non-negligible heat source such as floor heating.

1.4.23 Ceiling Height Setting, Setting of Normal Airflow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The second code No. is set to 01 at
the factory.
 FXFTQ25-80A, FXFSQ25-80A, FXFRQ25-80A, FXFQ25-80A

First Second Ceiling Height

Mode Code Code Contents
No. All round 4-way 3-way 2-way
No. No. outlet Outlets Outlets Outlets
Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
01 Standard
2.7 m 3.1 m 3.0 m 3.5 m
13 Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
(23) 0 02 High Ceiling 3.0 m 3.4 m 3.3 m 3.8 m
Lower than Lower than Lower than
03 Higher Ceiling —
3.5 m 4.0 m 3.5 m
 FXFTQ100-140A, FXFSQ100-140A, FXFRQ100-140A, FXFQ100-140A

First Second Ceiling Height

Mode
Code Code Contents All round 4-way 3-way 2-way
No.
No. No. outlet Outlets Outlets Outlets
Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
01 Standard
3.2 m 3.4 m 3.6 m 4.2 m
13 Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
0 02 High Ceiling
(23) 3.6 m 3.9 m 4.0 m 4.2 m
Lower than Lower than Lower than
03 Higher Ceiling 4.2 m 4.5 m 4.2 m —
Note(s) 1. The Second Code No. is factory set to Standard/All-direction airflow. For High ceiling (1) or
(2), initial setting by remote controller is required.
2. A closing member kit (optional) is required for 4-, 3-, or 2-direction airflow.
 FXFSQ-A, FXFQ-A with Designer panel

First FXFSQ25-80A FXFSQ100-140A
Mode Second
No. Code Code No. Contents FXFQ25-80A FXFQ100-140A
No. (All round outlet) (All round outlet)
Lower than Lower than
01 Standard
2.4 m 3.2 m
13 Lower than Lower than
0 02 High Ceiling
(23) 2.7 m 3.6 m
03 Higher Ceiling Lower than Lower than

3.2 m 4.2 m
 FXZQ-B, FXEQ-A
First
Mode Second
No. Code Code No. Contents Ceiling Height
No.
01 Standard Lower than 2.7 m
13
0 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than 3.0 m
(23)
03 High Ceiling (2) Lower than 3.5 m

 FXCQ20-63B
First
Mode Second
Code Contents Ceiling Height
No. Code No.
No.
0 01 Standard Lower than 2.7 m
13 0 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than 3.0 m
(23) 5 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than 3.0 m
FXKQ-MA
First Ceiling Height
Mode Code Second Contents
No. Code No. FXKQ25/32MA FXKQ40/63MA
No.
01 Standard Lower than 3.8 m
13
0 Lower than
(23) 02 High Ceiling —
4.3 m
FXUQ-A
First Ceiling Height
Mode Second
Code Contents
No. No. Code No. FXUQ71A FXUQ100A
01 Standard
2.7 m 3.2 m
13 Lower than Lower than
0 02 High Ceiling (1)
(23) 3.0 m 3.6 m
03 High Ceiling (2) 3.5 m 4.0 m
FXHQ-MA
Mode First Second

No. Code No.
No.
0
(23) 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than 3.5 m
FXHQ-B
First
Mode Second
No. Code No.
No.
(23) 0
02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than 4.3 m
FXAQ-A
First
Mode Second
Code Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Standard
13
0 02 Slightly higher
(23)
03 High

1.4.24 Airflow Direction Setting

Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when sealing material
kit of air discharge outlet has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to 01.
01 4-way airflow
13 (23) 1 02 3-way airflow
03 2-way airflow
1.4.25 Swing Pattern Settings

Set the flap operation in swing mode.
With the factory swing, flaps facing each other are synchronized to operate, and flaps placed
side by side are set to swing in an opposite direction to agitate airflow to reduce temperature
irregularity.
Conventional swing operation (all direction synchronized swing) can be set onsite.
Mode First Second
01 All direction synchronized swing

13 (23) 2 02 —
03 Facing swing
1.4.26 Operation of Downward Flow Flap

When only the front-flow is used, sets yes/no of the swing flap operation of down-flow.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Equipped
13 (23) 3
02 Not equipped
1.4.27 Airflow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
 FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXZQ-B, FXCQ-B, FXEQ-A, FXKQ-MA,

FXAQ-A
No. No. No.
01 Draft prevention (Upward)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
03 Ceiling soiling prevention (Downward)

 FXUQ-A, FXHQ-MA, FXHQ-B : Factory setting

Contents
No. No. No.
01 Draft prevention (upward)
13 (23) 4 02 Dew condensation prevention (upward)
03 Standard (downward)
Note(s) 1. Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
2. When the model FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, or FXFQ-A is attached with a closing
member kit, set the Second Code No. to 02 or 03.
1.4.28 Fan Speed Setting for Streamer Option

After installing streamer cleaning unit, change field setting from the remote controller as shown
in the table below. Sound level may increase just a little due to fan speed setting.
Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Default fan speed
13 (23) 5
02 Fan speed setting for streamer option
1.4.29 Setting of Static Pressure Selection

 FXCQ20-63B
Refer to Ceiling Height Setting, Setting of Normal Airflow on page 177.
 FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND
No. No. No.
01 Standard (10 Pa)
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure (30 Pa)
 FXDQ-T, FXDQ-SP, FXDSQ-A, FXNQ-A2

No. No. No.
01 Standard
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure

1.4.30 External Static Pressure Settings

Make external static pressure setting automatically using automatic airflow adjustment
(11 (21)-7), or manually using external static pressure settings (13 (23)-6).
FXDBQ-A
01 15 Pa
02 20 Pa
13 (23) 6 03 30 Pa
04 40 Pa
05 50 Pa
FXSQ-PA
03 30 Pa (1)
04 40 Pa (1)
05 50 Pa
06 60 Pa
07 70 Pa
08 80 Pa
13 (23) 6 09 90 Pa
10 100 Pa
11 110 Pa
12 120 Pa
13 130 Pa
14 140 Pa
15 150 Pa (2)
1 FXSQ50/63/80/100/125/140PA cannot be set to 30 or 40 Pa.
2 FXSQ140PA cannot be set to 150 Pa.
 FXMQ-PA
01 30 Pa (3) (4)
02 50 Pa
03 60 Pa
04 70 Pa
05 80 Pa
06 90 Pa
07 100 Pa
13 (23) 6 08 110 Pa (1)
09 120 Pa (1)
10 130 Pa (1)
11 140 Pa (1)
12 150 Pa (1) (4)
13 160 Pa (1) (4)
14 180 Pa (1) (2) (4)
15 200 Pa (1) (2) (4)
The Second code No. is set to 02 (50 Pa) for FXMQ20-32PA and 07 (100 Pa) for
FXMQ40-140PA at factory setting.
1 FXMQ20/25/32PA cannot be set to 110-200 Pa.
2 FXMQ40PA cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
3 FXMQ50/63/80/100/125PA cannot be set to 30 Pa.
4 FXMQ140PA cannot be set to 30 Pa and 150-200 Pa.

 FXMQ-P
01 50 Pa
02 75 Pa
03 100 Pa
04 115 Pa
05 130 Pa
06 150 Pa
07 160 Pa
13 (23) 6 08 175 Pa
09 190 Pa
10 200 Pa
11 210 Pa
12 220 Pa
13 230 Pa
14 240 Pa
15 250 Pa
1.4.31 Setting of Swing Patterns when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

In cooling operation, when the airflow direction is set to swing, flaps usually swing even when
the thermostat is OFF. This setting allows to change the airflow direction when the thermostat is
OFF.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Fixed Swing
01 Set Position Swing
02 Set Position P0
03 P0 P0
13 (23) 7 04 Set Position Swing
05 Set Position P2
06 P2 P2
07 Set Position Swing
1.4.32 Setting of Circulation Airflow

This is to set whether the circulation airflow function is enabled or disabled.
Contents
No. No. No.
01 Disabled
13 (23) 13
02 Enabled

1.4.33 Circulation Airflow Patterns

This setting is to change the appearance pattern of the circulation airflow direction depending
on the installation environment of the indoor unit.
01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time (sec.) 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (where the flap is
reversed).

01: Pattern 1 120 120 120 120

Appearance
Time (sec.) 02: Pattern 2 120 120 0 0
03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 120
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 0 120 0
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (where the flap is
reversed).
1.4.34 Switching Panel Type

Change this setting depending on the type of the panel connected.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Standard panel
13 (23) 15
02 Designer panel
1.4.35 Mold Proof Operation Setting

Mode First Second
Contents
01 —
14 (24) 9 02 Standard
03 For high humidity areas (*1)
*1 Areas with average humidity over 80%.

1.4.36 Humidification when Heating Thermostat is OFF

Setting to Equipped turns ON the humidifier if suction air temperature is 20ºC or more and turns
OFF the humidifier if suction air temperature is 18ºC or below when the heating thermostat is
OFF.
Contents
No. No. No.
01 Not equipped
15 (25) 1
02 Equipped
1.4.37 Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected by duct directly. The
indoor fan carries out residual operation for 1 minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the
purpose of preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.) When the second code No. is set to
02: Equipped, heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual operation by linking to
indoor unit.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Not equipped
15 (25) 2
02 Equipped
1.4.38 Drain Pump and Humidifier Interlock Selection

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
No. No. No. Contents
01 Not interlocked

15 (25) 3
02 Interlocked
1.4.39 Individual Ventilation Setting

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilation using the remote
controller/central unit when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.)
01 Normal
15 (25) 5
02 Individual
1.4.40 Display of Error Codes on the Remote Controller

 BRC1E Series
Error code (four digits) is displayed for limited products.
Select two-digit display if four-digit display is not preferred.
Contents
No. No. No.
01 —
02 Two-digit display
1b 4
03 —
04 Four-digit display
1.4.41 Setting Restricted/Permitted for Airflow Block

The airflow block function cannot be enabled when closure material kit, fresh air intake kit,
separately installed natural evaporation type humidifier, or branch air duct is equipped, due to

the possibility of dew condensation.

This setting restricts the airflow block function, preventing that the airflow block is inadvertently
set to ON.
Ensure that “Airflow block restricted” is set when using the options listed above.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Airflow block permitted
02 —
1b 14 03 —
04 —
05 Airflow block restricted
1.4.42 Room Temperature Display

 BRC1E Series
A "Detailed display screen" can be selected as the display screen. This setting is used if you do
not want to display "Room temperature display" on the "Detailed display screen".
Mode First Second
01 Not displayed
1c 0
02 Displayed
1.4.43 Streamer Display

Set the menu display of the remote controller so that it shows the display screen of the remote
controller when the streamer is operated. Only BRC1H series can be set to display the
operation of streamer.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Disabled
1E 14
02 Enabled
1.4.44 Hotel Key Card Function Settings

Mode First Second
Contents
0 0-10 Delay timer (1 minute increment)

Initial value is 1.
Reset time (1 hour increment)
1 0-20
Initial value is 20.
— Do not update
2 1 Reset ON/OFF ON
2 OFF
— Do not update
F0
1 Fan
3 2 Reset mode Auto
3 Cooling
4 Heating
4 16-32 Reset Cool Setpoint (1°C increment)

Initial value is 22°C.
Reset Heat Setpoint (1°C increment)
5 16-32
Initial value is 22°C.
Note(s) If you are using remote controller BRC1H62W or BRC1H62K, the hotel key card function can be
set from the remote controller or application. Please refer to the installation and operation
manual of the remote controller.

1.5 List of Field Settings for Air Treatment Equipment

1.5.1 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit
First Second Code No.
Mode
Code Setting Contents
No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
No.
0 Filter contamination 2500 hr 1250 hr — — — — — — — — — — — — —
10
(20) Display time to clean
3 Display No display — — — — — — — — — — — — —
air filter calculation
Automatic airflow Completion Start of
11 7
adjustment OFF of airflow airflow — — — — — — — — — — — —
(21) (*2)
adjustment adjustment
External ON/OFF input Forced ON/OFF
1 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
12 OFF control
(22) Power failure Not
5 Equipped — — — — — — — — — — — — —
automatic reset equipped
13 6 External static 100
50 50 60 70 80 90 110 120 130 140 150 160 180 200
(23) (*2) pressure (Pa) 
Discharge air
3 18
temperature (cooling) 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 — —
(*1) (°C) 
Discharge air
4 25
14 temperature (heating) 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 — —
(*1) (°C) 
(24)
4 Suction air temperature 19
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24
(*2) (cooling) (°C) 
5 Suction air temperature 15
10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(*2) (heating) (°C) 
*1: FXMQ-MF only

*2: FXMQ-AF only
1.5.2 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM Series)

Mode
No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
No.
External ON/OFF input Forced ON/OFF
12 1 OFF operation
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Interval time for filter Approx. Approx.

No
0 sign indication 2500 1250 — — — — — — — — — — — —
counting
hours hours
Night-time free cooling ON ON ON ON
1 operation ON/OFF and OFF 2 hours 4 hours 6 hours 8 hours — — — — — — — — — —
starting time later later later later
17 4
Initial setting for
Normal Ultra high — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(27) ventilation fan
Cold areas
Preset Preset
(Fan operation
5 airflow — OFF Low — — — airflow — — — — — — —
selection for heating rate rate
thermostat off) *4
Fan for night-time free
6 High Ultra high — — — — — — — — — — — — —
cooling operation
Display for ventilation
4 Show Hide — — — — — — — — — — — — —
18 mode
(28) Supply Fresh-up/
7 Supply Exhaust — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Exhaust Fresh-up
Low tap setting *5 Preset
1 Less ← — — — — → Higher
airflow — — — — — —
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
rate
Fan step for supply
Less ← — — — — — → Normal
2 (Airflow rate 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 — — — — — —
adjustment) 09
Fan step for exhaust

19 Less ← — — — — — → Normal
3 (Airflow rate — — — — — —
(29) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
adjustment)
24-hours ventilation Continuous running
4 setting No — — — — — — Less ← — — — — → Higher
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Fan residual operation
8 when heater — Disable — — — — — — — — — — — — —
connected
1A 0 Fresh-up ON/OFF OFF ON — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Note(s) 1. The settings are applied to the entire group, but if the mode no. inside the parentheses is
selected, the settings can be applied to individual indoor units. However, it is only possible to
check any changes made to the settings inside the parentheses in individual mode. (For group
batch operation, the changes are made but the display remains as a factory setting.)

2. Do not set anything not shown on the list. If the applicable functions are not available, they
will not be displayed.
3. When “Filter sign indication setting” or “Night-time free cooling operation setting” is changed,
explain set contents to the customer.
*4. See below for details on the settings for cold areas.
Air conditioner fan 01 03 04 08
Heating thermostat off Operation — OFF Low —
Defrost OFF — OFF OFF OFF
Oil return OFF — OFF OFF OFF
In case of independent operation
Air conditioner fan 01 02 04 06 08
Heating thermostat off Operation — — Low Low —
Defrost Stop — — Stop Stop Stop
Oil return Stop — — Stop Stop Stop
—: operate at the set fan speed
Low: operate at the weak fan speed
• During defrost operation, the fans of the unit continue driving (factory setting). The purpose of
this is to maintain the amount of ventilation.
*5. When “Low tap setting” is changed, the supply and exhaust fans rotate at set tap on “Low
tap setting” while the ventilation rate is low. This is valid only when the outdoor unit temperature
is more than –10 °C. (Outdoor unit temperature > –10 °C)
6. Adjustment set temperature for the local situation:
When the RA is not taken directly from the room (e.g. not connecting the RA duct), the
temperature of RA might be higher than the set temperature of the standard indoor unit. In that
case, be sure to adjust set temperatures of heating and cooling in accordance with the local
situation.
• Set temperature at factory setting: Heating …21°C, Cooling …26°C (suction temperature at
direct expansion coil)
• Configurable range of set temperature: Heating …16 to 30°C, Cooling …16 to 30°C
Mode
No. Code Setting Contents
No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
12 Cooling set 26
4 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30
(22) temperature 
14 Heating set 21
1 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
(24) temperature 

1.5.3 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM Series)

Mode
No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
No.
Fresh-up
(Setting of more Accumulated Accumulated No
0 supply air/more 2500 hours 1250 hours accumulation
— — — — —
exhaust air)
Nighttime free
17 cooling operation
(27) 1 starting time OFF ON / ON / ON / ON /
— — —
(after the 2 hours later 4 hours later 6 hours later 8 hours later
operation stops)
4 Initial setting for Normal

ventilation fan Ultra high — — — — — —
External input 24-hour

Last Priority on Priority on
0 setting (J2-JC) Forced OFF Sync with fan ventilation — —
command external input operation
ON/OFF
Main unit X3M
External contact Fan operation Abnormal Filter sign
3 output Humidification operation output (Damper — — —
output output
changeover output)
(X1-X2)
18
(28) Fresh-up
(Setting of more
7 Supply air Exhaust air — — — — — —
supply air/more
exhaust air)
Main unit X3M
External contact Fan operation
Abnormal Filter sign Operation
11 output (Damper output output output
— — — —
changeover output)
(X3-X4)
Intermittent low Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation
tap operation rate 1/15 rate 1/10 rate 1/6 rate 1/4 rate 1/3 rate 1/2
setting (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for
1 No —
28 minutes 27 minutes 25 minutes 22.5 minutes 20 minutes 15 minutes
Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for
19 2 minutes) 3 minutes) 5 minutes) 7.5 minutes) 10 minutes) 15 minutes)
(29) 24-hour Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation
ventilation setting rate 1/15 rate 1/10 rate 1/6 rate 1/4 rate 1/3 rate 1/2 Ventilation
(Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for (Fan OFF for rate 1/1
4 No
28 minutes 27 minutes 25 minutes 22.5 minutes 20 minutes 15 minutes (Continuous
Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for Fan ON for operation)
2 minutes) 3 minutes) 5 minutes) 7.5 minutes) 10 minutes) 15 minutes)
When selecting the single nighttime free cooling operation, make the field setting as follows:
Mode
No. Code Setting Contents
No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Target
17 7 temperature for 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
(27) single nighttime 27 28 29 30
free cooling (°C)

1.6 Operation Control Mode

The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote
controller ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to
information on the next page.)
Central remote controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor
is connected)
Contents of Control Modes

20 modes consisting of combinations of the following 5 operation modes with temperature and
operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by operation modes 0
through 19.
 ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by central remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned ON/OFF by remote controller.)
 OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and OFF by remote controller
only.
 Centralized
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and turn ON/OFF freely by
remote controller during set time.
 Individual
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by both central remote controller and remote controller.
 Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by remote controller during set time and you do not want
to start operation by central remote controller when time of system start is programmed.

How to Select Operation Mode

Whether operation by remote controller will be possible or not for turning ON/OFF, controlling
temperature or setting operation mode is selected and decided by the operation mode given on
the right edge of the table below.
Example
ON by remote OFF by remote
Temperature Operation mode
controller controller OFF by Control
control by setting by
(Unified ON by (Unified OFF by remote mode is "1".
remote controller remote controller
central remote central remote controller
controller) controller)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Rejection Rejection Rejection Acceptance Acceptance
Control by remote controller
Operation
Control mode Unified operation, Unified OFF, Control mode

individual operation by individual stop by Temperature Operation
OFF
central remote central remote control mode setting
controller, or operation controller, or timer
controlled by timer stop
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by Acceptance
(Example) 1 (Example)
remote controller Acceptance (Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example) Rejection 11
Acceptance 2
Rejection
OFF control only Rejection 12
Rejection (Example)
possible by remote
controller Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Rejection
Timer operation Acceptance (During Rejection (During Rejection 18
possible by remote timer at ON position timer at OFF
controller only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
Do not select “timer operation possible by remote controller” if not using a remote controller.
Operation by timer is impossible in this case.
BRC1E63, BRC1F61
Local remote controllers cannot set
temperature or operation mode when
the system is under centralized control
and the mark for centralized control
appears on the screen.

SiMT342301E Field Setting from Outdoor Unit
2. Field Setting from Outdoor Unit

To continue the configuration of the VRV system, it is required to give some input to the PCB of
the unit. This chapter will describe how manual input is possible by operating the BS
buttons/DIP switches on the PCB and reading the feedback from the 7 segment displays.
For VRV system it is alternatively possible to make several commissioning field setting through
a personal computer interface (for this, an optional cable is required). The installer can prepare
the configuration (off-site) on PC and afterwards upload the configuration to the system.
2.1 DIP Switch Setting when Mounting a Spare PCB

Caution  After replacement with spare PCB, be sure to make settings shown in the table on the
following page. The procedure for making settings of spare PCB is different from that used
for factory settings described above. Be sure to refer to the table shown on the following
page in order to make settings of spare PCB after replacement.
 Enforce a re-initialization of communication: hold press the RETURN (BS3) button for
minimum 5 seconds.
 After initialization, a test operation is required from outdoor unit (hold the SET (BS2) button
until indication t01 appears).
(3) BS button (2) Segment display (4) DIP switch Initial position of DIP switches ()
(BS1~BS3) (SEG1~SEG3) (DS1-1~4) (DS2-1~4)
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

(HAP)
Connection terminal
for transmission use
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

This monitor blinks while in normal control, and turns ON or OFF when an error occurs.
(2) Segment display
Used to check the transmission and display the transmission state between indoor and outdoor
units, the contents of error, and the contents of field setting.

Field Setting from Outdoor Unit SiMT342301E
(3) BS button
Used to change mode.
(4) DIP switch
Used to make field settings.
The figure below shows the required position of the DIP switches on spare PCB for RXYQ-B.
Change DIP switches at time of power disconnected.
Application model The setting method ( represents the position of switches)
RXYQ8B Set DS2-2 to ON.
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
RXYQ10B Set DS2-1 and DS2-2 to ON.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
RXYQ18B Set DS2-1, DS2-2 and DS2-3 to ON.

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

2.2 Accessing the BS Buttons on the PCB

It is not required to open the complete electronic component box to access the BS buttons on
the PCB and read out the seven-segment display(s).
1. Open the service window cover.

2. Open the inspection door.
You can see the 3 BS buttons and the 3 seven-segment displays and DIP switches.
Operate the switches and BS buttons with an insulated stick (such as a closed ballpoint pen) to
avoid touching of live parts.
Location of the seven-segment displays, buttons and DIP switches:
1 2
BS1 BS2 BS3
DS1 DS2 X27A
MODE (BS1) for changing setting mode

SET (BS2), RETURN (BS3) for changing field setting
DS1, DS2 DIP switches
1 Seven-segment displays (3×)
2 BS buttons (3×)
Segment display indications:

Off
Blinking
On

2.3 Operating the BS Buttons and DIP Switches on the PCB

Operating the BS buttons
By operating the BS buttons it is possible to:
 Perform special actions (test operation, etc.).
 Perform field settings (demand operation, low noise, etc.).
Below procedure explains how to operate the BS buttons to reach the required mode in the
menu, select the correct setting and modify the value of the setting. This procedure can be used
any time special settings and regular field setting are discussed in this manual.
Setting definition: [A-B]  C

A: mode
B: setting
C: setting value
A, B and C are numerical values for field settings. Parameter C has to be defined. It can be a
chosen from a set (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,…) or regarded as an ON/OFF (1 or 0) depending on the
contents. This is informed when the field setting is explained.
INFORMATION During special operation (e.g., test operation, etc.) or when an error
happened, information will contain letters and numerical values.
Functions of the BS button switches which are located on the outdoor unit PCB (A1P)
Turn ON the power supply of the outdoor unit and all indoor units.
When the communication between indoor units and outdoor unit(s) is established and normal,
the segment indication state will be as below (default situation when shipped from factory).
When turning ON the power supply, the display blinks ON and OFF. First checks of the power
supply are executed (1 - 2 minutes).
When no trouble occurs: lighted as indicated (8~10 minutes).
Ready for operation: blank display indication as indicated.
When above situation cannot be confirmed after 12 minutes, the error code can be checked on
the indoor unit user interface and the outdoor unit segment display. Solve the error code
accordingly. The communication wiring should be checked at first.
INFORMATION Be sure to turn the power on at least 6 hours before operation in

order to have power running to the crankcase heater.

Accessing modes
The MODE (BS1) button is used to change the mode you want to access.
 Access mode 1
Press the MODE (BS1) button once. Segment indication changes to:
 Access mode 2
Press the MODE (BS1) button for at least 5 seconds. Segment indication changes to:
INFORMATION If you get confused in the middle of the process, press the MODE (BS1) button.
Then it returns to idle situation (no indication on segment displays: blank).
Mode 1
Mode 1 is used to set basic settings and to monitor the status of the unit.
 Changing and access the setting in mode 1:
Once mode 1 is selected (press the MODE (BS1) button once), you can select the wanted
setting. It is done by pressing the SET (BS2) button. Accessing the selected setting's value is
done by pressing the RETURN (BS3) button once.
 To quit and return to the initial status, press the MODE (BS1) button.
Example:
Checking the content of parameter [1-10] (to know how many indoor units are connected to the
system).
Mode: 1
Setting: 10
 Make sure the segment indication is displayed in operational default mode as shipped from
factory.
 Press the MODE (BS1) button once; result segment display:
Result: mode 1 is accessed.
 Press the SET (BS2) button 10 times; result segment display:
Result: mode 1 setting 10 is addressed.

 Press the RETURN (BS3) button once; the value which is returned (depending on the actual
field situation), is the amount of indoor units which are connected to the system.
Result: mode 1 setting 10 is addressed and selected, return value is monitored information.
 To leave the monitoring function, press the MODE (BS1) button once, you will return to the
default situation when shipped from factory.

Mode 2
Mode 2 is used to set field settings of the outdoor unit and system.
 Changing and access the setting in mode 2:
Once mode 2 is selected (press the MODE (BS1) button for more than 5 seconds), you can
select the wanted setting. It is done by pressing the SET (BS2) button.
Accessing the selected setting's value is done by pressing the RETURN (BS3) button once.
 To quit and return to the initial status, press the MODE (BS1) button.
 Changing the value of the selected setting in mode 2:
 Once mode 2 is selected (press the MODE (BS1) button for more than 5 seconds) you
can select the wanted setting. It is done by pressing the SET (BS2) button.
 Accessing the selected setting's value is done by pressing the RETURN (BS3) button
once.
 Now the SET (BS2) button is used to select the required value of the selected setting.
 When the required value is selected, you can define the change of value by pressing the
RETURN (BS3) button once.
 Press the RETURN (BS3) button again to start operation according to the chosen value.
Example:
Checking the content of parameter [2-18] (to define the high static pressure setting of the
outdoor unit’s fan).
Mode: 2
Setting: 18
Make sure the segment indication is as during normal operation (default situation when shipped
from factory).
 Press the MODE (BS1) button for over 5 seconds; result segment display:
Result: mode 2 accessed.
 Press the SET (BS2) button 18 times; result segment display:
Result: mode 2 setting 18 is addressed.

 Press the RETURN (BS3) button once; the value which is returned (depending on the actual
field situation), is the status of the setting. In the case of [2-18], default value is "0", which
means the function is not active.
Result: mode 2 setting 18 is addressed and selected, return value is the current setting
situation.
 To change the value of the setting, press the SET (BS2) button until the required value
appears on the segment indication. When achieved, define the setting value by pressing the
RETURN (BS3) button once. To start operation according to the chosen setting, confirm
again by pressing the RETURN (BS3) button.
 To leave the field setting, press the MODE (BS1) button once, you will return to the default
situation when shipped from factory.

2.4 Connecting the PC Configurator to the Outdoor Unit

Connection of the optional PC configurator cable to the outdoor unit has to be done on A1P.
Connect the optional cable to the 8-pin white connector X27A.
Caution Works executed on the outdoor unit are best done under dry weather conditions to avoid water
ingress.
1 3 2
1 PC
2 Cable
3 Main printed circuit
board
X27A
A1P
X2
7A
2.5 Monitoring Function and Field Settings

The operation of the outdoor unit can further be defined by changing some field settings. Next to
making field settings it is also possible to confirm the current operation parameters of the unit.
The setting can also be performed via the PC configuration software.
Below relevant monitor mode (mode 1) and Field setting mode (mode 2) settings are explained
in detail.
Making settings is done via the master outdoor unit.
2.5.1 Mode 1
Mode 1 can be used to monitor the current situation of the outdoor unit. Some field setting
contents can be monitored as well.
Below the settings in mode 1 are explained.

[1-0]: shows whether the unit you are checking is a master, sub 1 unit, or sub 2 unit.
 No indication: undefined situation
 0: outdoor unit is master unit
 1: outdoor unit is sub 1 unit
 2: outdoor unit is sub 2 unit
Master, sub 1, and sub 2 indications are relevant in multiple outdoor unit system
configurations. The allocation of which outdoor unit is master, sub 1, or sub 2 is
decided by the unit’s logic.
The master unit must be used to input field settings in mode 2.

[1-1]: shows the status of night-time low noise operation.

 0: unit is currently not operating under low noise restrictions
 1: unit is currently operating under low noise restrictions
Night-time low noise operation reduces the sound generated by the unit compared
to nominal operating conditions.
Night-time low noise operation can be set in mode 2. There are two methods to
activate night-time low noise operation of the outdoor unit system.
The first method is to enable an automatic night-time low noise operation by field
setting. The unit will operate at the selected low noise level during the selected time
frames.
The second method is to enable night-time low noise operation based on an

external input. For this operation an optional accessory is required.
[1-2]: shows the status of power consumption limitation operation.
 0: unit is currently not operating under power consumption limitations
 1: unit is currently operating under power consumption limitation
Power consumption limitation reduces the power consumption of the unit compared
to nominal operating conditions.
Power consumption limitation can be set in mode 2.
There are two methods to activate power consumption limitation of the outdoor unit
system.
The first method is to enable a forced power consumption limitation by field setting.
The unit will always operate at the selected power consumption limitation.
The second method is to enable power consumption limitation based on an external
input. For this operation an optional accessory is required.
[1-5]: shows the current Te target parameter position.
[1-6]: shows the current Tc target parameter position.
[1-9]: shows the AIRNET address.
[1-10]: shows the total number of connected indoor units.
It can be convenient to check if the total number of indoor units which are installed
match the total number of indoor units which are recognized by the system. In case
there is a mismatch, it is advised to check the communication wiring path between
outdoor and indoor units (F1/F2 communication line).
[1-13]: shows the total number of connected outdoor units.
It can be convenient to check if the total number of outdoor units which are installed
matches the total number of outdoor units which are recognized by the system. In
case there is a mismatch, It is advised to check the communication wiring path
between outdoor and outdoor units (Q1/Q2 communication line).
[1-15]: shows number of units in zone.
[1-16]: shows number of all indoor units of several systems if “F1F2 OUT/D" is wired
between systems. (Number of terminal units: represents the number of indoor units
connected to a single DIII-NET that is a communication line.)
[1-17]: shows the latest error code.
[1-18]: shows the 2nd last error code.
[1-19]: shows the 3rd last error code.
When the latest error codes were reset by accident on an indoor unit user interface,
they can be checked again through this monitoring settings.
[1-28]: shows number of outdoor units connected to a multi system.
[1-40]: shows the current cooling comfort setting.
[1-41]: shows the current heating comfort setting.
[1-42]: shows the current high pressure sensor value (MPa).
[1-43]: shows the current low pressure sensor value (MPa).

[1-46]: shows the current compressor 1 discharge thermistor value (°C).

[1-48]: shows the current compressor 1 body thermistor value (°C).
[1-49]: shows the current outdoor air thermistor value (°C).
[1-50]: shows the current compressor suction thermistor value (°C).
[1-51]: shows the current subcooling gas thermistor value (°C).
[1-52]: shows the current deicer right thermistor value (°C).
[1-53]: shows the compressor run time (hour divided by 100).
[1-54]: shows the current subcooling of heat exchanger (right) (°C).
[1-55]: shows the current subcooling liquid thermistor value (°C).
[1-57]: shows the current heat exchanger gas (left) thermistor value (°C).
[1-59]: shows the current subcooling of heat exchanger (left) (°C).
[1-60]: shows the current compressor 2 discharge thermistor value (°C).
[1-61]: shows the current compressor 2 body thermistor value (°C).
[1-64]: shows the compressor average load.
[1-65]: shows the current electrical components box thermistor value (°C).
[1-66]: shows the current cooling jacket outlet thermistor value (°C).

2.5.2 Overview of Setting Mode (Mode 2)

This overview shows the available settings by using the press buttons on the outdoor unit PCB.
7 segment
7 segment display
No. display
Item Description Description Range
1
SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
Low noise/ Used to make address setting for Address:
2 demand low noise/demand operation. 2. 0 2 0~ 0
address 31 3 1
Indoor fan Used to force the fan of indoor Normal operation 0
5 2. 0 5
forced H unit to H tap. Indoor fan H 1
Forced Used to force all indoor units to Normal operation 0
6 thermostat operate forced thermostat ON. 2. 0 6 Forced thermostat ON 1
Te setting Used to make setting of targeted Auto 0
(Cooling evaporating temperature for 6°C 2
operation) cooling operation. 7°C 3
8 2. 0 8 8°C 4
9°C 5
10°C 6
11°C 7
Tc setting Used to make setting of targeted Auto 0
condensing temperature for 41°C 1
9 2. 0 9
heating operation. 43°C 3
46°C 6
Eco setting is available from an external input. Unavailable 0
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to Eco setting by low noise level 1
turn the Eco refrigerant control ON/OFF using the input
11 remote controller. Also, depending on the settings, 2. 1 1 Eco setting by demand input 2
low noise operation or demand operation may not be
performed using the external control adaptor.
External low Used to receive external low noise Input LNO/DE
12 noise setting/ or demand signal. 2. 1 2 OFF 0
demand setting ON 1
AIRNET Used to set address of AIRNET. Address:
13 address 2. 1 3 0~ 0
63 6 3
High ESP Fan high static pressure setting OFF 0
18 2. 1 8
setting FAN ON 1
Refrigerant Used to set the system to Refrigerant recovery
21 recovery and refrigerant recovery mode 2. 2 1 OFF 0
vacuuming (without compressor run). ON 1
Automatic night- Automatic night-time low noise OFF 0
22 time low noise operation. 2. 2 2 Level 1 1
operation Time for the operation is subject Level 2 2
to the start and end time settings. Level 3 3
Used to set Eco mode invalid. Valid 0
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to Invalid for cooling 1
23 2. 2 3
turn the Eco mode ON/OFF using the external Invalid for heating 2
control adaptor. Invalid for cooling and heating 3
External low Low noise level when the external Level 1 1
25 noise level low noise signal is input at option 2. 2 5 Level 2 2
DTA104A62. Level 3 3
Automatic night- Time to start automatic “night-time About 8:00 PM 1
time low noise low noise” operation. (“Night-time About 10:00 PM 2
26 2. 2 6
operation start low noise” level setting should About 12:00 AM 3
also be made.)
Automatic night- Time to stop automatic “night-time About 6:00 AM 1
27 time low noise low noise” operation. (“Night-time 2. 2 7 About 7:00 AM 2
operation stop low noise” level setting should About 8:00 AM 3
also be made.)
Power transistor Used to troubleshoot DC OFF 0
check compressor. Inverter waveforms ON (10 Hz) 1
are output without wire
28 connections to the compressor. It 2. 2 8
is useful to determine whether the
relevant trouble has resulted from
the compressor or inverter PCB.
Capacity priority Cancel the low noise level control OFF 0
if capacity is required while low ON 1
29 2. 2 9
noise operation or night-time low
noise operation is in progress.

7 segment
7 segment display
No. display
1
1 2 3 1 2 3
Demand 1 Used to make a change to the Level 1 (60%) 1
setting targeted power consumption level Level 2 (65%) 2
when the demand 1 control signal Level 3 (70%) 3
is input. Level 4 (75%) 4
30 2. 3 0
Level 5 (80%) 5
Level 6 (85%) 6
Level 7 (90%) 7
Level 8 (95%) 8
Demand 2 Used to use a targeted power Level 1 (40%) 1
31 setting current level when the demand 2 2. 3 1 Level 2 (50%) 2
control signal is input. Level 3 (55%) 3
Normal demand Used to set permanent demand 1 OFF 0
32 setting or 2 control without inputting any 2. 3 2 Demand 1 (2-30) 1
external signal. Demand 2 (2-31) 2
Indoor fan tap Indoor fan speed is limited to L tap Indoor capacity ≥ 130% 0
setting depending on connection Indoor capacity ≥ 130% in 1
34 capacity. 2. 3 4 heating
Remote controller setting (Not 2
limited)
Emergency To prohibit a compressor or OFF 0
operation complete in “Master”. Since Master INV. 1 OFF 1
38 (master) module is permanent disabled, 2. 3 8 Master INV. 2 OFF 2
immediately replace the defective Master unit OFF 3
component(s).
operation complete “sub 1”. Since module is Sub 1 INV. 1 OFF 1
39 (sub 1) permanent disabled, immediately 2. 3 9 Sub 1 INV. 2 OFF 2
replace the defective Sub 1 unit OFF 3
component(s).
operation complete “sub 2”. Since module is Sub 2 INV. 1 OFF 1
40 (sub 2) permanent disabled, immediately 2. 4 0 Sub 2 INV. 2 OFF 2
replace the defective Sub 2 unit OFF 3
component(s).
Outdoor fan Outdoor fan noise Standard 0
42 countermeasure (limit fan speed). 2. 4 2 Mode A 1
Mode B 2
High difference For setting height difference when ≤ 50 m 0
setting outdoor unit is installed above ≤ 110 m 1
49 2. 4 9
indoor unit. ≤ 90 m 2
≤ 70 m 3
Sequence multi Sequence addressing between Automatic 0
51 outdoor master and sub units. 2. 5 1 Forced master 1
Forced sub 1 2
Forced sub 2 3
VRTsmart Used to change upper limit of Low 1 0
control target evaporation temperature in Low 2 1
Te upper limit VRTsmart control. Low 3 2
76 2. 7 6 Low 4 3
Low 5 4
Low 6 5
Standard 6
High 7
VRTsmart Used to change lower limit of Low 0
control target condensation temperature Standard 1
Tc lower limit in VRTsmart control. High 1 2
High 2 3
77 2. 7 7
High 3 4
High 4 5
High 5 6
High 6 7
VRT control Used to change upper limit of Standard 4
78 Te upper limit target evaporation temperature in 2. 7 8 High 6
VRT control.
VRT control Used to change lower limit of Standard 2
79 Tc lower limit target condensation temperature 2. 7 9 Low 3
in VRT control.
Cooling comfort Cooling comfort setting Eco 0
setting Mild 1
81 2. 8 1
Quick 2
Powerful 3

7 segment
7 segment display
No. display
1
1 2 3 1 2 3
Heating comfort Heating comfort setting Eco 0
setting Mild 1
82 2. 8 2
Quick 2
Powerful 3
Intermittent fan Used for intermittent fan operation OFF 0
operation setting. 30 minutes OFF, 1 minute ON 1
with medium fan speed
30 minutes OFF, 1 minute ON 2
with high fan speed
87 2. 8 7 15 minutes OFF, 1 minute ON 4
with high fan speed
with high fan speed
Continuously ON with 7
medium fan speed
Indoor unit Multi-tenant function setting Invalid 0
without power Valid (No U4 error 1
90 2. 9 0 generation)
Valid (Operating with U4 2
warning)
1: Numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the BS button.
: Setting does not return to factory setting when exit mode 2. To cancel the function,
change setting manually to factory setting.
: Once function is activated t01 appears. To stop current function, press once the
RETURN (BS3) button. For detailed description about each setting, refer to Details of
Setting Mode 2 on page 203.
Indication bold means factory setting.

2.5.3 Details of Setting Mode 2

Mode 2 is used to change the field settings of the system.
Consulting the current field setting value and changing the current field setting value is possible.
In general, normal operation can be resumed without special intervention after changing field
settings.
Some field settings are used for special operation (e.g., 1 time operation, recovery/vacuuming
setting, manual adding refrigerant setting, etc.). In such a case, it is required to abort the special
operation before normal operation can restart. It will be displayed in below explanations.
[2-2]: Low noise/demand address
Address for low noise/demand operation.
1 or more systems (maximum 10 systems wired by “F1F2 OUT/D”) can operate use
the LNO (Low Noise Operation) or/and the DE (Demand Operation) by instruction of
field supplied input to optional PCB DTA104A62.
To link the system to the corresponding DTA104A62, set the address same as the
DIP switches position on the related optional PCB DTA104A62.
Ensure that also field setting 2-12-1 is set to enable input from optional PCB
DTA104A62.
[2-5]: Cross wiring check by indoor FAN forced H
Default value: 0. Not active.
Set 1: force all connected indoor units to operate the indoor fan on high speed. This
setting can be made to check which units are missing in the communication if the
number of indoor units do not correspond to the system lay out. Ensure that after
cross wiring check was confirmed, to return setting to default 2-5-0. Once setting
2-5-1 is active, it is not automatically returning to default when exit mode 2.
[2-6]: Forced thermostat ON command all connected indoor units
Default value: 0. Not active.
Set 1: force all connected indoor units to operate under “Test” (forced thermostat
ON command to outdoor). Ensure that when the forced thermostat ON needs to be
ended, to return setting to default 2-6-0. Once setting 2-6-1 is active, it is not
automatically returning to default when exit mode 2.
[2-8]: Te target temperature (Te fix control)
Default value: 2
Value
Te target
[2-8]
0 Auto
2 (default) 6°C
3 7°C
4 8°C
5 9°C
6 10°C
7 11°C
Change [2-8] to 0, 2-7 in function of required operation method during cooling.

For more information and advice about the effect of these settings, refer to Energy Saving
and Optimum Operation on page 217.

[2-9]: Tc target temperature (Tc fix control)

Default value: 6
Value
Tc target
[2-9]
0 Auto
1 41°C
3 43°C
6 (default) 46°C
Change [2-9] to 0, 1, 3 or 6 in function of required operation method during heating.

[2-11]: Eco level setting for Eco mode via External control adaptor (Optional)
Value
[2-11] Meaning Level
0 (Default) Inactive —
Eco mode active by low noise terminal
1 short-circuit Standard
Eco mode active by demand terminal 2-C short circuit: Low

2
short-circuit 3-C short circuit: Standard
Eco mode can be activated by short circuit the terminal on External control adaptor (Optional)
according to [2-11] setting. ([2-23] should be 0).
This unit can operate with Te/Tc fix control and Eco mode.
If the terminal on external control adapter is not connected by short circuit with [2-11]≠0, the
system operates according to [2-8] or [2-9] setting.
[2-12]: Enable the night-time low noise function and/or power consumption limitation via
external control adaptor (DTA104A62)
If the system needs to run under night-time low noise operation or under power
consumption limitation conditions when an external signal is sent to the unit, this
setting should be changed. This setting will only be effective when the optional
external control adaptor (DTA104A62) is installed.
Default value: 0
To activate this function, change [2-12] to 1.
[2-13]: AIRNET address
When an AIRNET system will be used, outdoor unit needs an AIRNET address.
Also to facilitate the recognition of a system in the map lay out of the service checker
type III, set each system a unique address between 1 and 63.
When duplicating of AIRNET address, UC error code will appear on central control.
[2-18]: Fan high static pressure setting
In order to increase the static pressure the outdoor fan is delivering, this setting
should be activated. For details about this setting, see technical specifications.
Default value: 0

[2-21]: Refrigerant recovery/vacuuming mode

In order to achieve a free pathway to recovering refrigerant out of the system or to
remove residual substances or to vacuum the system it is necessary to apply a
setting which will open required valves in the refrigerant circuit so the recovering of
refrigerant or vacuuming process can be done properly.
Default value: 0
To stop the refrigerant recovery/vacuuming mode, press the RETURN (BS3) button.
If the RETURN (BS3) button is not pressed, the system will remain in refrigerant
recovery/vacuuming mode.
[2-22]: Automatic night-time low noise setting and level during night-time
By changing this setting, you can activate the automatic night-time low noise
operation function of the unit and define the level of operation. Depending on the
chosen level, the noise level will be lowered (3: Level 3 < 2: Level 2 < 1: Level 1).
The start and stop moments for this function are defined under setting [2-26] and
[2-27].
Default value: 0
Change [2-22] to 1, 2 or 3 in function of required level.
[2-23]: Eco mode invalid setting
Used to make setting of Eco mode invalid. When this configuration is set, it is not
possible to turn Eco mode ON/OFF using external control adaptor or other setting.
Default value: 0.
Value Eco mode invalid setting

[2-23]
0 (default) Eco mode active
1 Eco mode invalid for cooling operation (Te fix control)
2 Eco mode invalid for heating operation (Tc fix control)
3 Eco mode invalid (Te and Tc fix control)
[2-25]: Night-time low noise operation level via the external control adaptor
If the system needs to run under night-time low noise operation conditions when an
external signal is sent to the unit, this setting defines the level of night-time low noise
that will be applied
(3: Level 3 < 2: Level 2 < 1: Level 1).
This setting will only be effective when the optional external control adaptor
(DTA104A62) is installed and the setting [2-12] is activated.
Default value: 2
Change [2-25] to 1, 2 or 3 in function of required level.
[2-26]: Night-time low noise operation start time
Change [2-26] to 1, 2 or 3 in function of required timing.
Default value: 2
Value Start time automatic night-time low noise operation

[2-26] (approximately)
1 About 8:00 PM
2 (default) About 10:00 PM
3 About 12:00 AM
This setting is used in conjunction with setting [2-22].

[2-27]: Night-time low noise operation stop time

Default value: 3
Value Stop time automatic night-time low noise
[2-27] operation (approximately)
1 About 6:00 AM
2 About 7:00 AM
3 (default) About 8:00 AM

[2-28]: Power transistor check mode
To evaluate the output of the power transistors. Use this function in case error code
is displayed related to defective inverter PCB or compressor is locked.
Default value: 0. Power transistor check mode is not active.

Field setting 1: Power transistor check mode is active.
Function:
 Inverter PCB gives output of minimum Hz in sequence by all 6 transistors.
Remove the U/V/W terminals of the compressor, and connect to the inverter
checker module. If all 6 LEDs blink, the transistors switch correctly.
 When the power transistor check mode is set back to 0 (default), after turn off the
power supply, 2 LEDs will light up to indicate discharge of the DC voltage. Wait till
the LEDs are OFF before returning fasten terminals back to the compressor
terminals.
Minimum requirements to refer to the result on the inverter checker module:

 All 3 phases and neutral are available, and
 Inverter PCB control is active. Check if the green LED “HAP” on the inverter PCBs
are blinking normal (approx. 1/second). If LEDs are OFF, need to exit the “standby
mode” of the inverter:
 Disconnect and reconnect power supply control PCB, or
 Forced thermostat ON condition, or
 Briefly set 2-6-1 (forced thermostat ON indoor), or 2-20-1 (manual refrigerant
charge).
 Once the LED is blinking on the inverter PCB, change related setting immediately
back to set 0 to deactivate related function.
 Diode module generates the required 540 VDC for RXYQ-BYM.
Cautions:
 In case there is more than 1 compressor in a system (outdoor is multi outdoor
configuration), all compressor inverter PCBs will perform the power transistor check.
In such case, disconnect U/V/W fasten terminals on all compressors. Avoid
accidental touch of fasten terminals to short circuit or ground leak to casing.
 To stop the power transistor check mode, change setting to default 2-28-0.
 Output to U/V/W will also stop when outdoor unit main PCB decides standby
mode of inverter circuit.

The following time graph shows the different steps during the power transistor check mode.
 Switching sequence during power transistor check mode:
Disconnect U/V/W from compressor and connect them to

inverter checker before performing the power transistor check.
Power transistor check Power transistor check Power supply
mode activate; mode inactivate; OFF
Mode 2-28 set 0 → 1 Mode 2-28 set 1 → 0
VAC VDC
VAC output (Note)
Frequency output
About 45 seconds 10 VDC
Time
Check 1 Check 2 Check 3 Check 4 Check 5
VAC VDC VDC VAC VDC

L1B/L2B/L3B X3A/X4A = 1.42 × VAC U/V/W X3A/X4A
Check 1 : AC power input:

at terminal L1B, L2B, L3B for RXYQ-BYM (380-415 V unbalance maximum 2%).
Check 2 : DC voltage:
at connector X3A increases to ±540 VDC for RXYQ8-12BYM.
at connector X3A and X4A increases to ±540 VDC for RXYQ14-24BYM.
Check 3 : DC = 1.42 x VAC power supply:
calculation check from Check 1 and Check 2.
Check 4 : AC U/V/W minimum Hz intermediate:
check if voltage differences are within 10 V (at fasten U/V/W) (Note)
Check 5 : Voltage drop check:
check if voltage differences among U/V/W are within 10 VDC and the brightness of
2 LEDs (V Phase) reduces until OFF.
Note(s) Actual voltage value depends on multimeter characteristics: ±95 VAC.

[2-29]: Capacity priority. When the night-time low noise operation is in use, performance
of system might drop because airflow rate of outdoor unit is reduced.
Default value: 0. Capacity priority cannot be used.
Field setting 1: capacity priority can temporary cancel the night-time low noise
operation. Capacity priority can be initiated when certain operation parameters
approach the safety setting:
 Raise in high pressure during cooling.
 Drop in low pressure during heating.
 Raise of discharge pipe temperature.
 Raise of inverter current.
 Raise of fin temperature inverter PCB.
When operation parameters return to normal range, the capacity priority is switched
OFF, enable to reduce airflow rate depending on night-time low noise operation is
still required (end time for low night noise operation is not reached or external input
night-time low noise operation is still closed).

If capacity priority is set in

Operation capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased Time set with night-time low
Time set with night-time low according to the load of air noise operation end setting
noise operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier.
Rated
∗Night-time
Level 1
Level 2 ∗Low noise

∗Operation sound mode mode instructing
set with night-time low
noise operation setting
Level 3 Low noise mode ∗Operation sound set with
instructing Operation sound external low noise setting
set with external low noise
setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start Set with night-time low noise operation end
setting. (Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) setting. (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)
[2-30]: Power consumption limitation level (step 1) via the external control adaptor
(DTA104A62)
If the system needs to run under power consumption limitation conditions when an
external signal is sent to the unit, this setting defines the level power consumption
limitation that will be applied for step 1. The level is according to the table.
Default value: 3
Change [2-30]: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or 8 in function of required limitation
Value
Power consumption limitation (Approximate)
[2-30]
1 60%
2 65%
3 (default) 70%
4 75%
5 80%
6 85%
7 90%
8 95%
[2-31]: Power consumption limitation level (step 2) via the external control adaptor
(DTA104A62)
If the system needs to run under power consumption limitation conditions when an
external signal is sent to the unit, this setting defines the level power consumption
limitation that will be applied for step 2. The level is according to the table.
Default value: 1
Change [2-31] to 1, 2 or 3 in function of required limitation.
Value
Power consumption limitation (approximately)
[2-31]
1 (default) 40%
2 50%
3 55%

[2-32]: Forced, all time, power consumption limitation operation (no external control adaptor
is required to perform power consumption limitation)
If the system always needs to run under power consumption limitation conditions,
this setting activates and defines the level power consumption limitation that will be
applied continuously. The level is according to the table.
Default value: 0 (OFF).
Value
Restriction reference
[2-32]
0 (default) Function not active
1 Follows [2-30] setting
2 Follows [2-31] setting
[2-34]: Indoor fan tap setting

Indoor units fan speed limitation related to connection capacity and outdoor air
temperature for energy saving
Value
[2-34] Indoor fan tap setting
0 (default) Fan speed is limited to L tap when indoor units capacity  130%.
1 In heating mode, fan speed is limited to L tap when indoor units capacity  130%.
Fan speed follows the setting of remote controllers (not limited by indoor units
2
connection capacity).
Note(s) 1. Indoor condition A: Temperature difference average of (indoor air temperature – set
temperature) is less than 1.5°C.
2. Indoor condition B: Temperature difference average of (indoor air temperature – set
temperature) is 3°C or more.
[2-38]: Emergency operation “Master”
To disable compressor operation permanently: in case of single module or “Master”
unit of a multi outdoor system, this setting allows:
Default value: 0. Compressor operation enabled.
Field setting:
 Set 1: Master INV. 1 is disabled permanently.
 Set 2: Master INV. 2 is disabled permanently
 Set 3: Master module is disabled permanently.
[2-39]: Emergency operation “Sub 1”
To disable compressor operation of “Sub 1” unit of a multi outdoor system
permanently:
Field setting:
 Set 1: Sub 1 INV. 1 is disabled permanently.
 Set 2: Sub 1 INV. 2 is disabled permanently
 Set 3: Sub 1 module is disabled permanently.
[2-40]: Emergency operation “Sub 2”
To disable compressor operation of “Sub 2” unit of a multi outdoor system
permanently:
Field setting:
 Set 1: Sub 2 INV. 1 is disabled permanently.
 Set 2: Sub 2 INV. 2 is disabled permanently
 Set 3: Sub 2 module is disabled permanently.

[2-42]: Outdoor fan noise countermeasure

Change fans rotational speed and reduce noise by the interference of air blow noise
between outdoor units.
Default value: 0
Field setting:
 Mode A: 1
 Mode B: 2
[2-49]: Height difference setting
Default value: 0.
In case the outdoor unit is installed in the highest position (indoor units are installed
on a lower position than outdoor units) and the height difference between the lowest
indoor unit and the outdoor unit exceeds 50 m, the setting [2-49] has to be changed
as follows.
Value
Description
[2-49]
0 (default) ≤ 50 m
1 ≤ 110 m
2 ≤ 90 m
3 ≤ 70 m
Other changes/limitations to the circuit apply. For more information, refer to the
chapter System piping (length) limitations of the installation manual.
The setting [2-49] has to be changed to 1 if not sure about the height difference
between the lowest indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Note: The maximum height difference setting will be effect to performance of
system decrease.
[2-51]: Master/Sub setting Multi
When 2 modules are installed as a multi-outdoor (by common refrigerant piping and
wiring by terminals Q1Q2) configuration is automatically detected. In certain cases,
the sequence of the Sub unit need to be set manually (in case of AIRNET
monitoring).
Default value: 0. Automatic detection.
Field setting: ensure that the modules in a multi are set different status. Even some
modules in a multi are set manually to same status, U7 error will appear.
 1: forced “Master” (F1F2/Ind terminals should be connected to indoor units).
 2: forced “Sub 1” (only Q1Q2 terminals should be wired to “Master” module).
 3: forced “Sub 2” (only Q1Q2 terminals should be wired to “Master” module).
[2-81]: Cooling comfort setting
Default value: 2
Value Cooling comfort setting
[2-81]
0 Eco
1 Mild
2 (default) Quick
3 Powerful
Change [2-81] to 0, 1, 2 or 3 in function of required limitation.


[2-82]: Heating comfort setting

Default value: 2
Value
Heating comfort setting
[2-82]
0 Eco
1 Mild
2 (default) Quick
3 Powerful
Change [2-82] to 0, 1, 2 or 3 in function of required limitation.

[2-87]: Intermittent fan operation
Used for intermittent fan operation to assist snow discharge on outdoor fan.
Default value: 0.
Value
[2-87] Intermittent fan operation
0 (default) OFF
1 30 minutes OFF, 1 minute ON with medium fan speed
2 30 minutes OFF, 1 minute ON with high fan speed
7 Continuously ON with medium fan speed
[2-90]: Indoor unit without power

U4 error generation.
In case an indoor unit needs maintenance or repair on the electric side, it is possible
to keep the rest of the VRV DX indoor units operating without power supply to some
indoor unit(s).
Default value: 0 (not active)
Field setting 1: It is possible to operate system without U4 error when some indoor
units are temporarily without power supply.
Field setting 2: It is possible to operate system with U4 warning when some indoor
units are temporarily without power supply.
Following conditions need to fulfil:
 Maximum equivalent piping length of the farthest indoor less than 120 m.
 Index indoor units power simultaneously less than 30% of the nominal outdoor.
 Total capacity is less than 30% of the nominal one of the outdoor unit.
 Operation time is limited to 24 hours period.
 It is recommended to shut down connected indoor units at the same floor.
 Not possible to use service mode operation (e.g. recovery mode).
 Backup operation has priority over this special feature.

2.6 Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation

2.6.1 Night-Time Low Noise Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the low noise input of the outdoor unit external
control adaptor (optional), you can lower operating noise.
Setting Content
Level 1 Set the outdoor fan to Step 7 or lower.
A. When night-time low noise operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of
the external control adaptor for outdoor unit).
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminal of night-time low
noise operation (Refer below figure). If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the
adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
External control Demand

C Low
adaptor for outdoor unit 1 2 3 noise
X X X X X X
Host computer monitor Outdoor wiring indicated

panel or demand controller by dotted line
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an external low noise level for the item 2-25.
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON.
(If the condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the low
noise operation command will be ignored to put the system into normal operation mode.)
B. When night-time low noise operation is carried out automatically. (External control
adaptor for outdoor unit is not required.)
1. While in setting mode 2, select a night-time low noise operation level for the item 2-22.
2. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a starting time of night-time low noise operation
(i.e., 8:00 PM, 10:00 PM, or 12:00 AM) for the item 2-26. (Use the starting time as a guide
since it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an ending time of night-time low noise operation
(i.e., 6:00 AM, 7:00 AM, or 8:00 AM) for the item 2-27. (Use the ending time as a guide since
it is estimated according to outdoor air temperatures.)
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON.
(If the condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the system
will be put into normal operation mode even during night-time.)

Image of operation in the case of A
Operation
sound
Rated Operation sound

during low noise
Low noise mode instructing mode can be set with
Level 1 Approx. 55 dB (target) External low noise
level setting (Factory
setting is level 2.)
Level 2 Approx. 50 dB (target)
Level 3 Approx. 45 dB (target)

Operation sound level set with External low noise setting
Note 1: Above values are for reference only (measured in silent room)
Note 2: Above values are for 1 module only.
Image of operation in the case of B
Operation
sound
Time set with night-time low noise Time set with night-time low
operation start setting noise operation end setting
Rated
Operation sound during
night-time low noise
Night-time operation mode can be set
Level 1 with night-time low noise
operation level setting.
(Factory setting is OFF.)
Level 2
Level 3
Operation sound level set with
night-time low noise operation
setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM

Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B
Operation
sound
Time set with night-time low noise
Time set with night-time low noise operation end setting
operation start setting Operation sound during
Rated low noise mode can be
set with External quiet
operation level setting. (Factory
Night-time setting is level 2.)
Level 1
Operation sound during
night-time low noise operation
Level 2 Low noise mode can be set with night-time
Operation sound level set mode instructing low noise operation level
with night-time low noise setting. (Factory setting is OFF.)
operation setting When external low noise
Level 3 instruction is received during
Low noise mode Operation sound set with
instructing External low noise setting the operation with night-time
Operation sound set with low noise operation mode.
External low noise setting Level 2 precedes level 1 and
level 3 precedes level 2.
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)

2.6.2 Demand Operation

By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the outdoor unit external control
adaptor for outdoor unit (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved
suppressing the compressor operating condition.
Description of setting Setting procedure

Setting Description External control adaptor for Outdoor unit PCB
item outdoor unit
Operate with power of Short circuit between "1" and Set the item 2-32 to
Demand 1
60-95% or less of the rating. "C" of the terminal block (TeS1). Demand 1.
Operate with power of Short circuit between "2" and Set the item 2-32 to
Demand 2
40-55% or less of the rating. "C". Demand 2.
Operate with forced Short circuit between "3" and
Demand 3 thermostat OFF "C". —
However, the demand operation does not occur in the following operation modes.
1. Startup control
2. Oil return operation
3. Defrost operation
4. Pump down residual operation
If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
External control Demand

C Low
adaptor for outdoor unit 1 2 3 noise
X X X X X X
Host computer monitor Outdoor wiring indicated

panel or demand controller by dotted line
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outdoor unit).
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminals as required
(Refer to the figure above).
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.
B. When the Normal demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control adaptor
for outdoor unit is not required.)
1. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-32 (Setting of alternate demand) to ON.
2. While in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.
If carrying out demand or low-noise input, connect the terminals
of the external control adaptor for outdoor unit as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
Demand Low
C
1 2 3 noise
X X X X X X
Outdoor
To other external control adaptor wiring
for outdoor unit indicated by
dotted line.
Host computer monitor panel or demand controller

Image of operation in the case of A
Power consumption
Rated
The power
Demand level 1 Demand level 2 Demand level 3 consumption
instructing instructing instructing during the
demand level 1
70% instructing can be
set with the
Power consumption set by Demand 1 level
Demand 1 level setting. setting.
40% (70% of rated
power
consumption has
been set at
Forced thermostat OFF factory.)
(Fan operation)
Image of operation in the case of B
Power consumption When the

Normal demand
setting is set to
ON (OFF has
been set at
Rated factory.), the
power
consumption can
be set with the
70% Demand 1 level
The power consumption set with Demand 1 level setting. setting. (70% of
rated power
consumption has
been set at
factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B
Power consumption The power

consumption can
be set with the
Demand 1 level
setting. (70% of
rated power
Rated consumption has
been set at
factory.)
70%
The power consumption set with Demand level Demand level
Demand 1 level setting. 2 instructing 3 instructing
40%
During continuous
demand operation, when
Forced thermostat OFF the external demand
(Fan operation) instruction is received
repeatedly, the instruction
with higher demand level
has the precedence.

2.6.3 Setting Procedure of Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand

Operation
Detailed Setting Procedure of Night-time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation
1. Setting mode 1 (H1P OFF)
In setting mode 2, press the MODE (BS1) button once  Setting mode 1 is entered and H1P
turns OFF. While the setting mode 1 is displayed, In night-time low noise operation and In
demand operation are displayed.
2. Setting mode 2 (H1P ON)

1. In setting 1, press and hold the MODE (BS1) button for more than 5 seconds.  Setting
mode 2 is entered and H1P lights.
2. Press the SET (BS2) button several times and match the LED display with the Setting No.
you want.
3. Press the RETURN (BS3) button once, and the present setting content is displayed. 
Press the SET (BS2) button several times and match the LED display with the setting
content you want.
4. Press the RETURN (BS3) button two times.  Returns to (1).
5. Press the MODE (BS1) button once  Returns to the setting mode 1 and H1P turns OFF.

2.7 Energy Saving and Optimum Operation

This VRV system is equipped with advanced energy saving functionality (VRT). Detecting all
connected indoor unit type, advanced energy saving functionality type is selected automatically.
Depending on the priority, emphasizes can be put on energy saving or comfort level. Several
parameters can be selected, resulting in the optimal balance between energy consumption and
comfort for the particular application.
Several patterns are available and explained below.

Modify the parameters to the needs of your building and to realize the best balance between
energy consumption and comfort.
2.7.1 Target Temperature Settings

• Basic
The refrigerant temperature is fixed independent from the situation.
It corresponds to the standard operation which is known and can be expected from/under
previous VRV systems:
 To activate this operation method under cooling operation: Change field setting [2-23] to 1 or
disconnect the circuit between terminal on external control adaptor with [2-11] ≠ 0.
 To activate this operation method under heating operation: Change field setting [2-23] to 2 or
disconnect the circuit between terminal on external control adaptor with [2-11] ≠ 0.
• Automatic for VRT control

The refrigerant temperature is set depending on the outdoor air conditions. As such adjusting
the refrigerant temperature to match the required load (which is also related to the outdoor air
conditions).
E.g., when your system is operating in cooling, you do not need as much cooling under low
outdoor air temperatures (e.g., 25°C) as under high outdoor air temperatures (e.g., 35°C).
Using this idea, the system automatically starts increasing its refrigerant temperature,
automatically reducing the delivered capacity and increasing the system’s efficiency.
 This operation is selected automatically with checking connected indoor unit type.
E.g., when your system is operating in heating, you do not need as much heating under high
outdoor air temperatures (e.g., 20°C) as under low outdoor air temperatures (e.g., –5°C).
Using this idea, the system automatically starts decreasing its refrigerant temperature,
automatically reducing the delivered capacity and increasing the system’s efficiency.
• Automatic for VRTsmart control

The refrigerant temperature is set depending on the required capacity sent from every indoor
unit.
• Hi-sensible
The refrigerant temperature is set higher/lower (cooling/heating) compared to basic operation.
The focus under high sensible mode is comfort feeling for the customer.
The selection method of indoor units is important and has to be considered as the available
capacity is not the same as under basic operation.
 To activate this setting under cooling operation: change field setting [2-8] to the appropriate
value, matching the requirements of the pre-designed system containing a high sensible
solution.
Value Te target
[2-8]
2 6°C
3 7°C
4 8°C
5 9°C
6 10°C
7 11°C

 To activate this setting under heating operation: change field setting [2-9] to the appropriate
value, matching the requirements of the pre-designed system containing a high sensible
solution.
Value
Tc target
[2-9]
1 41°C
3 43°C
6 46°C
2.7.2 Comfort Settings

A comfort level can be set for VRT/VRTsmart control mode and hi-sensible mode. The comfort
level is related to the time and power (energy consumption) expended in order to achieve a
certain room temperature. The requested conditions are achieved more quickly by temporarily
changing the refrigerant temperature.
• Powerful
Overshoot (during heating operation) or undershoot (during cooling operation) is allowed
compare to the requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room
temperature very fast. The overshoot/undershoot is allowed from the start up moment.
In case of cooling operation the evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 3°C on
temporary base depending on the situation.
In case of heating operation the condense temperature is allowed to go up to 49°C on
When the request from the indoor units becomes more moderate, the system will eventually go
to the steady state condition which is defined by the operation method above.
 To activate the powerful comfort setting under cooling operation, change field setting [2-81]
to 3.
 To activate the powerful comfort setting under heating operation, change field setting [2-82]
to 3.
• Quick
compared to the requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room
temperature very fast. The overshoot/undershoot is allowed from the start up moment.
 To activate the quick comfort setting under cooling operation, change field setting [2-81] to 2.
 To activate the quick comfort setting under heating operation, change field setting [2-82] to
2.
• Mild
compared to the requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room
temperature very fast. The overshoot/undershoot is not allowed from the start up moment.
The start up occurs under the condition which is defined by the operation mode above.
The start up condition is different from the powerful and quick comfort setting.
 To activate the mild comfort setting under cooling operation, change field setting [2-81] to 1.
 To activate the mild comfort setting under heating operation, change field setting [2-82] to 1.

• Eco
The original refrigerant temperature target, which is defined by the operation method (see
above) is kept without any correction, unless for protection control.
 To activate the eco comfort setting under cooling operation, change field setting [2-81] to 0.
 To activate the eco comfort setting under heating operation, change field setting [2-82] to 0.
No matter which control is selected, variations on the behavior of the system are still possible
due to protection controls to keep the unit operating under reliable conditions. The intentional
target, however, is fixed and will used to obtain the best balance between energy consumption
and comfort, depending on the application type.

Test Operation SiMT342301E
3. Test Operation
After installation and once the field settings are defined, the installer is obliged to verify correct
operation.
Therefore a test operation must be performed according to the procedures described below.
3.1 Precautions Before Starting Test Operation

After the installation of the unit, first check the following items. Once all below checks are
fulfilled, the unit must be closed, only then can the unit be powered up.
1. Installation
Check that the unit is properly installed, to avoid abnormal noises and vibrations when
starting up the unit.
2. Field wiring
Be sure that the field wiring has been carried out according to the instructions described in
chapter Electrical wiring work in the installation manual, according to the wiring diagrams
and according to the applicable legislation.
3. Power supply voltage
Check the power supply voltage on the local supply panel. The voltage must correspond to
the voltage on the identification label of the unit.
4. Ground wiring
Be sure that the ground wires have been connected properly and that the ground terminals
are tightened.
5. Insulation test of the main power circuit
Using a megatester for 500 V, check that the insulation resistance of 1 M or more is
attained by applying a voltage of 500 VDC between power terminals and ground. Never use
the megatester for the transmission wiring.
6. Fuses, circuit breakers, or protection devices
Check that the fuses, circuit breakers, or the locally installed protection devices are of the
size and type specified in chapter Electrical wiring work in the installation manual. Be sure
that neither a fuse nor a protection device has been bypassed.
7. Internal wiring
Visually check the electrical component box and the inside of the unit on loose connections
or damaged electrical components.
8. Pipe size and pipe insulation
Be sure that correct pipe sizes are installed and that the insulation work is properly
executed.
9. Stop valves
Be sure that all stop valves are open.
10. Damaged equipment
Check inside of the unit on damaged components or squeezed pipes.
11. Refrigerant leak
Check inside of the unit on refrigerant leakage. If there is a refrigerant leak, try to repair the
leak. If the repair is unsuccessful, call your local dealer. Do not touch any refrigerant which
has leaked out from refrigerant piping connections. This may result in frostbite.
12. Oil leak
Check the compressor for oil leakage. If there is an oil leak, try to repair the leak. If the
repairing is unsuccessful, call your local dealer.
13. Air inlet/outlet
Check that the air inlet and outlet of the unit is not obstructed by paper sheets, cardboard, or
any other material.
14. Record the contents of field setting.
Record them on the accessory REQUEST FOR THE INDICATION label. And attach the
label on the back side of the front panel.
15. Record the installation date.
Record the installation date on the accessory REQUEST FOR THE INDICATION label. And
attach the label on the back side of the front panel.

SiMT342301E Test Operation
Caution Do not insert fingers, rods or other objects into the air inlet or outlet. When the fan is rotating at
high speed, it will cause injury.
Caution Do not perform the test operation while working on the outdoor units (multi system) and
the indoor units.
When performing the test operation, not only the outdoor unit, but the connected indoor unit will
operate as well. Working on an indoor unit while performing a test operation is dangerous.
Caution  During tests never pressurize the appliances with a pressure higher than the maximum
allowable pressure (as indicated on the nameplate of the unit).
 If refrigerant gas leaks, ventilate the area immediately. Toxic gas may be produced if
refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.
 Never directly touch any accidental leaking refrigerant. This could result in severe wounds
caused by frostbite.
Caution DO NOT TOUCH PIPING AND INTERNAL PARTS

Do not touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or internal parts during and immediately after
operation. The piping and internal parts may be hot or cold depending on the working condition
of the unit.
Your hand may suffer burns or frostbite if you touch the piping or internal parts. To avoid injury,
give the piping and internal parts time to return to normal temperature or, if you must touch
them, be sure to wear protective gloves.
Caution ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Switch off all power supply before removing the electrical component box service panel or
before making any connections or touching electrical parts.
Do not touch any switch with wet fingers. Touching a switch with wet fingers can cause
electrical shock. Before touching electrical parts, turn off all applicable power supply.
To avoid electric shock, be sure to disconnect the power supply 1 minute or more before
servicing the electrical parts. Even after 1 minute, always measure the voltage at the terminals
of the main terminal, main circuit capacitors or electrical parts and, before touching, be sure that
those voltages are 50 V DC or less.
When service panels are removed, live parts can easily be touched by accident. Never leave
the unit unattended during installation or servicing when the service panel is removed.
INFORMATION
Note that during the first running period of the unit, required power input may be higher. This
phenomenon originates from the compressor that requires a 50 hour run elapse before reaching
smooth operation and stable power consumption. Reason is that the scroll is made out of iron
and that it takes some time to smooth the surfaces that make contact.

Test Operation SiMT342301E
3.2 Test Operation Procedure

The procedure below describes the test operation of the complete system. This operation
checks and judges following items:
 Check of wrong wiring (communication check with indoor units).
 Check of the stop valves opening.
 Judgment of piping length.
On top of this system test operation, indoor units operation should also be checked separately.
 Make sure to carry out the system test operation after the first installation. Otherwise, the
error code U3 will be displayed on the remote controller and normal operation or individual
indoor unit test run cannot be carried out.
 Abnormalities on indoor units cannot be checked for each unit separately. After the test
operation is finished, check the indoor units one by one by performing a normal operation
using the remote controller. Refer to indoor unit installation manuals for more details
concerning the individual test run.
INFORMATION
 It may take 10 minutes to achieve a uniform refrigerant state before the compressor starts.
 During the test operation, the refrigerant running sound or the magnetic sound of a solenoid
valve may become loud and the display indication may change. These are not malfunctions.
Procedure
1. Close all front panels in order to not let it be the cause of misjudgment
2. Make sure all field settings you want are set.
3. Turn ON the power to the outdoor unit and the connected indoor units.
NOTICE
Be sure to turn on the power 6 hours before operation in order to have power running to the
crankcase heater and to protect the compressor.
4. Make sure the default (idle) situation is existing. Press the SET (BS2) button for 5 seconds
or more. The unit will start test operation.
 The test operation is automatically carried out, the outdoor unit display will indicate t01
and the indication "Test operation" and "Under centralized control" will display on the
remote controller of indoor units.
Steps during the automatic system test run procedure:
t01: control before start up (pressure equalization)
t02: cooling start up control
t03: cooling stable condition
t04: communication check
t07: pipe length check and pipe volume calculation
t09: pump down operation
t10: unit stop
INFORMATION
If use Automatic refrigerant charge function t07 on test run will not show. It have been
checked during the Automatic refrigerant charge operation.
 During the test operation, the progress rate (1) will be displayed alternately with the
display.
 During the test operation, it is not possible to stop the unit operation from a remote
controller. To abort the operation, press the RETURN (BS3) button. The unit will stop
after around 30 seconds.
1. The progress rate is displayed in 00P-99P, but it may advance rapidly.

SiMT342301E Test Operation
5. Check the test operation results on the outdoor unit 7-segment display.
Normal completion: no indication on the 7-segment display (idle)
Abnormal completion: indication of error code on the 7-segment display
Take actions for correcting the abnormality. When the test operation is fully completed,
normal operation will be possible after 5 minutes.
3.3 Correcting after Abnormal Completion

The test operation is only completed if there is no error code displayed on the user interface or
outdoor unit 7-segment display. In case an error code is displayed, refer to Error Codes and
Descriptions on page 236 to perform correcting actions. Carry out the test operation again and
confirm that the abnormality is properly corrected.
3.4 Error Code

In case an error code is displayed, perform correcting actions as explained in the error code
table referring to Outdoor Unit, System on page 239.
After correcting the abnormality, press the RETURN (BS3) button to reset the error code and
retry operation.
The error code which is displayed on the outdoor unit will indicate a main code and a sub code.
The sub code indicates more detailed information about the error code. The error code will be
displayed intermittent.
Example:
Main code Sub code
With an interval of 1 second, the display will switch between main code and sub code.

SiMT342301E
Part 6
Service Diagnosis
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................226

1.1 General Troubleshooting......................................................................226
1.2 With Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor ...................................................229
2. Troubleshooting with Remote Controller.............................................230
2.1 BRC1E63, BRC1F61............................................................................230
2.2 BRC1H62 Series ..................................................................................231
2.3 BRC2E61 .............................................................................................231
2.5 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .......................................................................234
3. Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB .......................................................235
4. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................236
4.1 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................236
4.2 Error Codes - Sub Codes .....................................................................238
4.3 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................249
4.5 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................251
4.6 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................253
4.7 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................255
4.8 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality .............................................................261
4.9 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality ......................................................263
4.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............266
4.11 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................267
4.12 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................268
4.13 Defective Capacity Setting ...................................................................269
4.14 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...270
4.15 Transmission Error ...............................................................................272
4.16 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Auto Grille
Control PCB) ........................................................................................273
4.18 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...276
4.19 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................277
4.21 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................279
4.22 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................284
4.23 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................285
4.24 Detection of Earth Leakage by Leak Detection Circuit.........................286
4.25 Missing of Earth Leakage Detection Core............................................287
4.26 Activation of High Pressure Switch ......................................................288
4.27 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor ......................................................290
4.28 Compressor Motor Lock .......................................................................291
4.29 Compressor Damage Alarm.................................................................293
4.30 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................295
4.31 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................297
224 Part 6 Service Diagnosis
SiMT342301E
4.32 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................298

4.33 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................300
4.34 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................302
4.36 High Pressure Switch Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit
Main PCB and Inverter PCB) ...............................................................304
4.37 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................305
4.38 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................306
4.39 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................307
4.40 Inverter PCB Abnormality.....................................................................308
4.41 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................309
4.42 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent ..............................................311
4.43 Compressor Overcurrent......................................................................313
4.44 Compressor Startup Abnormality .........................................................315
4.45 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor Unit Main
PCB ......................................................................................................317
4.46 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................319
4.47 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................321
4.48 Field Setting Abnormality after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB or
Combination of PCB Abnormality.........................................................323
4.49 Refrigerant Shortage ............................................................................324
4.50 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................325
4.51 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................327
4.52 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units, Open
Phase in Power Supply Wiring .............................................................328
4.53 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........331
4.54 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................332
4.55 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........338
4.56 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units in the
Same System .......................................................................................339
4.57 Improper Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit, Indoor Unit
and Remote Controller .........................................................................340
4.58 Address Duplication of Centralized Control..........................................343
4.59 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and Indoor Unit ...344
4.60 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................347
4.61 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............348
5. Check ..................................................................................................350
5.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................350
5.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................351
5.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................353
5.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................355
5.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................356
5.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................357
5.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................358
5.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................359
5.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................363
5.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................364
5.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................365
5.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Wire) ..........................................367
5.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check ...............................................369
Part 6 Service Diagnosis 225

Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiMT342301E
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
1.1 General Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn Off the power supply and then
replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) • If the knob of any breaker is in its
OFF position, turn ON the power
supply.
• If the knob of any circuit breaker is
in its tripped position, do not turn ON
the power supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
The connector loose or not fully Turn off the power supply to verify
plugged in the connection of the connector.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool or heat air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outdoor unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to LOW Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
Cooling operation Hang curtains or shades on
Direct sunlight received windows.
Cooling operation The model must be selected to
Too many people staying in a room match the air conditioning load.
Cooling operation
Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
Dry operation Change the system to cooling
The reason is that the dry operation operation.
serves not to reduce the room
temperature where possible.
4 The system does The system stops and If the operation lamp on the remote Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts controller turns ON, the system will automatically start operation after a
operation. be normal. These symptoms lapse of five minutes.
indicate that the system is controlled
Pressing the temperature so as not to put unreasonable loads
setting button immediately on the system.
resets the system.
The remote controller displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
the mark for centralized centralized controller. Blinking COOL/HEAT central remote
control which blinks for a display indicates that the system controller.
period of several seconds cannot be operated using the
when the OPERATION button remote controller.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation mode Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power of microcomputer operation. one minute.
supply.
5 The system The remote controller displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical noises.
makes error codes U4 or U5, and the interruption in communication If these causes are removed, the
intermittent system stops but restarts after between units caused by electrical system will automatically restart
stops. a lapse of several minutes. noises coming from equipment other operation.
than air conditioners.

SiMT342301E Symptom-based Troubleshooting

6 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation mode Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling or
heating The remote controller displays In thermal storage operation, the Normal operation.
operation. the mark for centralized unit is set to fan operation in cooling
control; no cooling or heating or heating operation, and the remote
operation is performed. Switch controller shows the mark for
to fan operation. centralized control.
7 The airflow rate is Even pressing the airflow rate In heating operation, when the room Normal operation.
not reproduced setting button makes no temperature reaches the set degree,
according to the changes to the airflow rate. the outdoor unit will stop while the
setting. indoor unit is brought to fan LL
operation so that no one gets cold
air.
Furthermore, if fan operation mode
is selected when other indoor unit is
in heating operation, the system will
be brought to fan LL operation.
8 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the controller.
setting. The flap does not swing.
9 A white mist Indoor unit Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling operation, the due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. ambient humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
Indoor unit Hot gas (refrigerant) that has flowed Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling in the indoor unit results to be vapor
operation stopping, the from the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
Indoor and outdoor units Defrosted moisture turns to be Normal operation.
After the completion of defrost vapor and comes out from the units.
control, the system is switched
to heating operation.
10 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended from the system.
period of time.
11 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit should
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor unit be cleaned.
are blown out.
After air conditioner is turned For units with streamer cleaning Normal operation. It is not a
off unit, the air outlet may emit a slight malfunction.
odor as trace amounts of ozone are
generated due to streamer
discharge. However, the amount is
negligible and is not harmful to your
health. (Ozone concentration in the
room 0.1 ppm or less)
This is because streamer operation
is being performed.
12 There is no sound of streamer discharge during During streamer operation, the unit Normal operation. It is not a
streamer operation. automatically decides whether or malfunction.
not to perform streamer discharge.

Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiMT342301E

13 The system Indoor unit These are operating sounds of the Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON electronic expansion valve of the This sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit indoor unit. lapse of approximately one minute.
produces ringing sounds.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing respectively
continuously produced while in through the indoor and outdoor
cooling or defrost control. units.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced when Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are produced the gas (refrigerant) stops or
immediately after the startup changes flowing.
or stop of the system, or the
startup or stop of defrost
control.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Creaking sounds are resin parts expanding and
produced while in heating contracting with temperature
operation or changes.
after stopping the operation.
Indoor unit On VRV systems, these sounds are Normal operation.
Sounds like trickling or the like produced when other indoor units in
are produced from indoor units operation. The reason is that the
in the stopped state. system runs in order to prevent oil or
refrigerant from dwelling.
For units with streamer This is the sound of streamer Normal operation. It is not a
Hissing or snapping sounds discharge. malfunction.
Outdoor unit The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
Pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.
14 Outdoor fan does In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
not rotate. are controlled to put the operation to
the optimum state.
15 LCD display 88 Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
or Checking the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
connection. controller is normal. of approximately one minute at
Please stand by maximum.
appears on the
remote controller.
16 The outdoor unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outdoor fan approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
does not stop.
17 The outdoor gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor is Normal operation.
hot. warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
18 Hot air comes out Hot air is felt while the system On VRV systems, small quantity of Normal operation.
from the system stops. refrigerant is fed to indoor units in
even though it the stopped state when other indoor
stops. units are in operation.
19 Remote controller displays warning symbol, and There is a malfunction of streamer.
after pressing and holding for 5 seconds, (The air conditioner can be turned on and operate normally without
Press ON/OFF indication displays. streamer.)
(For units with streamer)

SiMT342301E Symptom-based Troubleshooting
1.2 With Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

Problem Measure
"Louver operation different from setting" or "No downward Refer to the flowchart below.
1
airflow in heating operation"
2 Individual airflow direction setting different from the actual Check the "Louver operation different from setting" error
airflow direction diagnosis.
3 While not operating, the louver does not close completely. Turn off the circuit breaker and then turn it on again.
The remote controller menu does not display energy saving Refer to Infrared presence/floor sensor error (CE) in
operating mode for when people are not present. troubleshooting.
The remote controller menu does not display the stop function
4
for when people are not present.
The remote controller menu does not display the automatic
draft prevention function.
The menu does not display the eco-friendly display function. No defect.
5 Set the clock.
During cooling and dry operation, the louver automatically No defect.
6 switches from horizontal (P0) to one-level downward (P1). When relative ambient humidity is higher, automatic louver
control will be activated.
During heating operation, the use of an airflow block will not No defect.
7 cause other louvers to turn downward (P4). In heating operation, if an airflow block is set, then the air outlet
control outside the airflow block will be within the range P0-P3.
When using airflow block, the airflow block will be routinely No defect.
8
lifted (become horizontal) during heating operation. Set louver to horizontal (P0) during thermostat OFF.
The infrared presence sensor determines that there is Check if there are any objects that generate temperature
someone in the room while no one is there. change when moving.
For example:
· An electric heater with swing function
9
· Doors, curtains, blind switches
· Output of paper from a fax machine or a printer
· Turning on/off of incandescent lights
· Moving objects
The infrared presence sensor determines that there is no one Check for the following conditions.
in the room while someone is there. · Lack of movement
10 · Facing away from the sensor
· Little skin exposed
· Slight movement in a place far from the sensor
Large difference between floor temperature and actual Check for the following conditions.
temperature · Sensor detection zone affected by solar radiation
· High or low temperature objects in the sensor detection zone
11 · Large difference between floor temperature and temperature
of the living space
· Sensors installed near walls may be affected by wall
temperature.
Error diagnosis of "Louver operation different from setting"
Is the individual YES

Normal
airflow set? Reset (Cancel)
individual airflow.
NO
Is the YES Is the
automatic draft prevention YES
airflow direction set to Normal
automatic? function "enabled"? Automatic draft prevention
NO NO function switches flap to
horizontal position when
presence is detected.
Is the connection YES Is the wire YES

of the step motor harness broken? Replace the wire
connector normal? harness.
NO
Replace the step
NO motor. (Motor failure)
Connect to the connector

correctly before action
verification.

Troubleshooting with Remote Controller SiMT342301E
2. Troubleshooting with Remote Controller

2.1 BRC1E63, BRC1F61
The illustrations are for BRC1E63 as representative.
The following message is displayed on the screen when an error (or a warning) occurs during
operation.
Check the error code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
Menu/Enter button
(1) Check if it is error or warning.

Operation Status Display
Abnormal The system stops The operation lamp (green)
shutdown operating. starts to blink. The message
Error: Push Menu button
blinks at the bottom of the
screen.
Warning The system The operation lamp (green)

continues its remains on. The message
operation. Warning: Push Menu button
blinks at the bottom of the
screen.
(2) Take corrective action.

Press the Menu/Enter button to check the
error code. Error code
FXFSQ25AVM
Take the corrective action specific to the RXYQ8BYM Applicable
model names
model.

SiMT342301E Troubleshooting with Remote Controller
2.2 BRC1H62 Series

Home screen
When the indoor unit is in error, the controller will display
30 ˚C on the home screen.
28 ˚C
Information screen
Press and hold on the Home screen for 5 seconds.
12:34 The unit number and error code will be displayed at the
bottom of the information screen.
A3 (Unit 00)
2.3 BRC2E61
In case of malfunction, the error code will be displayed on the screen.
Warning When the air conditioner is malfunctioning (e.g., giving off a burning odor), stop the air
conditioner and turn off the power.
Continued operation under such circumstances may result in failure, electric shock or a fire.


If the unit stops due to an error, the operation indicating LED on the signal receiving part of
indoor unit blinks.
The error code can be determined by the following procedure. The error code is displayed when
an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the last occurred error code is displayed.
UP button
DOWN button
Unit number
MODE button
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to enter inspection mode. Then the figure 0 blinks on the
unit number display.
2. Press UP button or DOWN button and change the unit number until the receiver of the
remote controller starts to beep.
3 short beeps : Follow all steps below.
1 short beep : Follow steps 3 and 4. Continue the operation in step 4 until you hear a
continuous beep.
This continuous beep indicates that the error code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : There is no abnormality.
3. Press MODE button. The left 0 (upper digit) indication of the error code blinks.
4. Press UP button or DOWN button to change the error code upper digit until the receiver of
the indoor unit starts to beep.
 The upper digit of the code changes as shown below.
O0 A C E H F J L P U 9 8 7 6 5 4
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.
5. Press MODE button. The right 0 (lower digit) indication of the error code blinks.
6. Press UP button or DOWN button and change the error code lower digit until the receiver of
the indoor unit generates a continuous beep.
 The lower digit of the code changes as shown below.
0123456789AHCJEF
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.

SiMT342301E Troubleshooting with Remote Controller
7. Press MODE button to return to the normal mode. If you do not press any button for 1
minute, the remote controller automatically returns to the normal mode.
2. Change the unit number with

Normal mode UP button or DOWN button.
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to enter

inspection mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
3. Press MODE
button.
The upper digit
7. When MODE button is blinks.
pressed or no button is
pressed for 1 minute,
equipment returns to
normal mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
6. Change the lower

digit with UP
button or DOWN 4. Change the
button. upper digit with
UP button or
5. Press MODE button. DOWN button.
The lower digit blinks.

2.5 BRC4M, BRC7M Series

When the air conditioner stops in emergency, the operating indicator lamp on the indoor unit
starts blinking.
Take the following steps to read the error code that appears on the display. It will help pinpoint
the cause of the trouble, speeding up the repair.
35
7
24
6
1
1. Press the INSPECTION button to select the inspection mode “ ”.
0 appears on display and blinks.
“UNIT No.” appears.
2. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the unit number.
Press to change the unit number until the indoor unit beeps and perform the following
operation according to the number of beeps.
Number of beeps
3 short beeps.............Perform all steps from 3 to 6.
1 short beep .............Perform 3 and 6 steps.
1 long beep .............Normal state
3. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
0 on the left-hand of the error code blinks.
4. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit beeps twice.
5. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
0 on the right-hand of the error code blinks.
6. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit makes a long beep.
The error code is fixed when the indoor unit makes a long beep.
7. Reset of the display
Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button to get the display back to the normal
state.

SiMT342301E Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB
3. Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB

Follow the procedure described below. This procedure is different than indicated in previous
Monitor mode.
The error codes for forced stop outdoor or retry are item:
 17, 18, 19: description of error (outdoor system stopped operation).
 23, 24, 25: description of retry.
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
To enter monitor mode, press the MODE

(BS1) button while in normal mode. BS1
MODE
Selecting error/retry item
Press the SET (BS2) button to set the 7 BS2

segment display to show one of 17-19
or 23-25. SET
Displaying check 1
Press the RETURN (BS3) button. BS3

Error (Retry) codes will appear on the
7 segment display.
RETURN
BS2 Press
SET (BS2)
button. Displaying check 2
SET
Press the SET (BS2) button. BS2
Detailed error (retry) codes will appear
on the 7 segment display. SET
BS3
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to return RETURN

to the initial state of monitor mode.
BS1
Press the MODE (BS1) button to return MODE

to normal mode.
Normal
Legend Segment : OFF : ON : BLINKS : hold 5 seconds
 The tables on next pages show a full list of possible error codes displayed on the 3 digit 7
segment display of the outdoor unit. The error code contains an upper and lower digit. To
scroll between upper and lower error digit, use the SET (BS2) button when the select
number in the monitor mode is chosen:
 No. 17-19 for error: System operation stopped.
 No. 23-25 for retry: System attempts to keep operation.
 The errors cover problems detected in the outdoor unit or the communication.
 Errors detected on the indoor unit are not shown on the outdoor display. For inspecting error
code on indoor unit, please consult:
 Display of the remote controller connected to the indoor units.
 If there are no remote controllers, there should be a central control device set up. Prior to
start up, make the necessary group number settings on each indoor unit.

Troubleshooting by Error Code SiMT342301E
4. Troubleshooting by Error Code

4.1 Error Codes and Descriptions
k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Error Operation Reference
Error contents
code lamp Page
A0 l External protection device abnormality 249
A1 l Indoor unit PCB abnormality 250
A3 l Drain level control system abnormality 251
Indoor fan motor lock, overload 253
A6 l
Indoor unit fan motor abnormality 255
A7 k Swing flap motor abnormality 261
A8 l Power supply voltage abnormality 263
A9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality, dust clogging 266
AF k Humidifier system abnormality 267
AH l Auto grille unit error 268
AJ l Defective capacity setting 269
Indoor Unit Transmission abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 270
C1 l Transmission error 272
Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB and auto grille control PCB) 273
C4 l Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor abnormality 275
C5 l Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor abnormality 275
Combination abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 276
C6 l Capacity setting abnormality 277
Indoor unit PCB abnormality 278
C9 l Suction air thermistor abnormality 275
CA k Discharge air thermistor abnormality 275
CE k Infrared presence/floor sensor error 279
CJ k Remote controller thermistor abnormality 284
E1 l Outdoor unit main PCB abnormality 285
Detection of earth leakage by leak detection circuit 286
E2 l
Missing of earth leakage detection core 287
E3 l Activation of high pressure switch 288
E4 l Activation of low pressure sensor 290
E5 l Compressor motor lock 291
E6 l Compressor damage alarm 293
E7 l Outdoor fan motor abnormality 295
E9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality 297
F3 l Discharge pipe temperature abnormality 298
F4 k/l Wet alarm 300
F6 l Refrigerant overcharged 302
H1 l Box air thermistor (R17T) abnormality 303
Outdoor Unit High pressure switch harness abnormality (between outdoor unit main PCB
H3 l 304
and inverter PCB)
H7 l Outdoor fan PCB abnormality 305
H9 l Outdoor air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 303
J3 l Discharge pipe thermistor (R13T, R15T) abnormality 303

Compressor body thermistor (R14T, R16T) abnormality
J5 l Suction pipe before accumulator thermistor (R5T) abnormality 303
Heat exchanger deicer (R3T, R10T) thermistor abnormality
J6 l Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R11T, R12T) abnormality 303
J7 l Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R8T) abnormality 303

J8 l Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R2T, R9T) abnormality 303
Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality
J9 l 303
Electrical box air outlet thermistor (R4T) abnormality
JA l High pressure sensor abnormality 306
JC l Low pressure sensor abnormality 307

SiMT342301E Troubleshooting by Error Code
Error Operation Reference

Error contents
code lamp Page
L1 l Inverter PCB abnormality 308
L4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality 309
L5 l Compressor instantaneous overcurrent 311
L8 l Compressor overcurrent 313
L9 l Compressor startup abnormality 315
Outdoor Unit
LC l Transmission error between inverter PCB and outdoor unit main PCB 317
P1 l Power supply voltage imbalance 319
P4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature abnormality 321
Field setting abnormality after replacing outdoor unit main PCB or
PJ l combination of PCB abnormality 323
U0 k Refrigerant shortage 324

U2 l Power supply insufficient or instantaneous abnormality 325
U3 l Check operation not executed 327
Transmission error between indoor units and outdoor units, open phase in
U4 l 328
power supply wiring
U5 l Transmission error between remote controller and indoor unit 331
U7 l Transmission error between outdoor units 332
U8 l Transmission error between main and sub remote controllers 338
System
Transmission error between indoor units and outdoor units in the same
U9 l 339
system
Improper combination of indoor unit and outdoor unit, indoor unit and
UA l remote controller 340
UC k Address duplication of centralized controller 343

UE l Transmission error between centralized controller and indoor unit 344
UF l System not set yet 347
UH l System abnormality, refrigerant system address undefined 348
: The system can keep operating, however, be sure to check and repair.

4.2 Error Codes - Sub Codes

If an error code like those shown below is displayed when a wired remote controller (navigation
or stylish) is in use, make a detailed diagnosis or a diagnosis of the relevant unit referring to the
list of detailed error codes.
4.2.1 Indoor Unit

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Diagnosis
Fan motor locked A locked fan motor current has been detected.
A6 - 01 Turn the fan by hand to check for the connection of
connectors.
Fan overcurrent error A fan motor overcurrent has been detected.
Check for the connection of the connector between the fan
A6 - 10 motor and the PCB for the fan. If the connection is normal,
replace the fan motor. If this still cannot solve the error,
replace the PCB for the fan.
Fan position detection error An error in the detection of position of the fan motor. Check for
the connection of the connector between the fan motor and the
A6 - 11 PCB for the fan. If the connection is normal, replace the fan
motor. If this still cannot solve the error, replace the PCB for the
fan.
A8 - 01 Power supply voltage error Check for the input voltage of the fan motor.
Electronic expansion valve error There is an error in the electronic expansion valve coil or a
A9 - 01 connector disconnected.
Refrigerant leakage detection error Refrigerant leaks even if the electronic expansion valve is
A9 - 02
closed. Replace the electronic expansion valve.
Transmission error (between the self-cleaning Check for the connection of the harness connector between the
decoration panel and the indoor unit) panel PCB and the indoor unit PCB.
AH - 03
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is
mounted)
Dust detection sensor error Check for the connections of the connector X12A on the panel
AH - 04 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is PCB and the connectors X18A and X19A on the sensor PCB.
mounted)
Dust collection sign error Check for clogging with dust at the dust collection port as well
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is as in the brush unit, S-shaped pipe, and dust box. Furthermore,
AH - 05 mounted) check for any stains of the light receiving and emitting parts of
the infrared unit.
Air filter rotation error Check for anything getting in the way of rotating the filter (e.g.
AH - 06 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is the filter comes off or the drive gear is clogged with foreign
mounted) matter).
Damper rotation error The damper does not rotate normally. Check for any foreign
AH - 07 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is matter around the damper and for the operation of the gear and
mounted) limit switch.
Filter self-cleaning operation error The unit has not yet completed the filter self-cleaning operation
AH - 08 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is even after the lapse of specified period of time. Check for any
mounted) external noise, etc.
Filter self-cleaning operation start disabled error The unit has been put into a state in which the filter self-
AH - 09 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is cleaning operation is disabled. Check the unit for the operating
mounted) conditions.
Auto grille unit error It is detected that the grille does not operate properly. Check
AH - 12 (when the auto grille unit is mounted) whether the grille does not contact with something or the wire
does not snaggle.
Capacity setting error There is an error in the capacity setting of the indoor unit
AJ - 01
PCB.
Electronic expansion valve setting error There is a fault in the setting of the gear type electronic
AJ - 02
expansion valve/direct acting type electronic expansion valve.
C1 - 01 Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB Check for the conditions of transmission between the indoor unit
and the PCB for the fan) PCB and the PCB for the fan.
Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB Refer to C1-06 flowchart.
C1 - 06
and auto grille control PCB)
Defective combination of indoor unit PCB and the A combination of indoor unit PCB and the PCB for the fan is
C6 - 01 PCB for the fan defective. Check whether the capacity setting adaptor is correct
and the type of the PCB for the fan is correct.
C6 - 05 Indoor unit PCB abnormality Refer to C6-05 flowchart.
Power module thermistor error (fan PCB) There is a fault in the power module thermistor on fan PCB.
C6 - 06
(FXDBQ-A)
Power module overheating error (fan PCB) The temperature of the power module on fan PCB is abnormally
C6 - 07
(FXDBQ-A) high.

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Diagnosis
Infrared presence sensor error The output of the infrared presence sensor is not detected.
CE - 01 Check if the connector is properly connected, and if the harness
is not broken.
Infrared floor sensor error A disconnection of the temperature correction circuit
CE - 02 (thermistor) of the infrared floor sensor has been detected.
Check if the connector is properly connected.
Infrared floor sensor error A short-circuit of the temperature correction circuit (thermistor)
of the infrared floor sensor has been detected.
CE - 03
Check if the pins of the connector are touching each other, and
if any foreign matter on the PCB is causing a short-circuit.
Infrared floor sensor error An abnormality other than the ones mentioned above has been
detected.
CE - 04 Check if the temperature nearby the sensor is too high, and if
there is any foreign matter that may cause noise.
U4 - 01 Indoor-Outdoor transmission error Refer to the U4 flowchart.
Refrigerant type error The type of refrigerant used for the indoor unit is different from
UA - 13
that used for the outdoor unit.
Not applicable for self-cleaning decoration panel An outdoor unit is not applicable for the self-cleaning decoration
UA - 15 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is panel is connected.
mounted)
As there are various combinations of indoor and outdoor units, the sub codes of A0 - A3 are not
shown in this table.
4.2.2 Outdoor Unit, System

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Description of diagnosis
E1 - 01 Outdoor unit PCB error (Master)
E1 - 02 Outdoor unit PCB error (Sub 1) Refer to the E1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
on the Error code shown to the left.
E1 - 03 Outdoor unit PCB error (Sub 2)
E2 - 01 Earth leakage detection error (Master)
E2 - 02 Earth leakage detection error (Sub 1)
E2 - 03 Earth leakage detection error (Sub 2) Refer to the E2 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E2 - 06 Missing of earth leakage detection core (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
E2 - 07 Missing of earth leakage detection core (Sub 1)
E2 - 08 Missing of earth leakage detection core (Sub 2)
E3 - 01 High pressure switch (S1PH) activated (Master)
E3 - 02 High pressure standby (Master)
E3 - 03 High pressure switch (S1PH) activated (Sub 1)
E3 - 04 High pressure standby (Sub 1)
E3 - 06 High pressure standby (Sub 2)
E3 - 07 High pressure switch activated (Batch) Refer to the E3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E3 - 13 Liquid stop valve check error (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
E3 - 14 Liquid stop valve check error (Sub 1)
E3 - 15 Liquid stop valve check error (Sub 2)
E3 - 18 Overall retry of high pressure switch
E3 - 20 High pressure switch (S2PH) activated (Master)
E4 - 01 Low pressure sensor error (Master)
Refer to the E4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E4 - 02 Low pressure sensor error (Sub 1)
E4 - 03 Low pressure sensor error (Sub 2)
E5 - 01 Compressor M1C lock (Master)
E5 - 02 Compressor M1C lock (Sub 1)
E5 - 03 Compressor M1C lock (Sub 2) Refer to the E5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E5 - 07 Compressor M2C lock (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.

Troubleshooting
Error code
E6 - 11 Compressor damage error: Compressor M1C (Master)
E6 - 12 Compressor damage error: Compressor M2C (Master)
E6 - 13 Compressor damage error: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)
Compressor damage warning: Compressor M1C Refer to the E6 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E6 - 17 on the Error code shown to the left.
(Master)
Compressor damage warning: Compressor M2C
E6 - 18
(Master)
E6 - 19 Compressor damage warning: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)
E7 - 01 Fan motor M1F lock (Master)
E7 - 02 Fan motor M2F lock (Master)
E7 - 05 Fan motor M1F momentary overcurrent (Master)
E7 - 06 Fan motor M2F momentary overcurrent (Master)
E7 - 09 Fan motor M1F IPM error (Master)
E7 - 10 Fan motor M2F IPM error (Master)
E7 - 13 Fan motor M1F lock (Sub 1)
E7 - 17 Fan motor M1F momentary overcurrent (Sub 1) Refer to the E7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E7 - 18 Fan motor M2F momentary overcurrent (Sub 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
E7 - 21 Fan motor M1F IPM error (Sub 1)
E7 - 29 Fan motor M1F momentary overcurrent (Sub 2)
E7 - 30 Fan motor M2F momentary overcurrent (Sub 2)
E9 - 01 Electronic expansion valve coil Y1E error (Master)
E9 - 05 Electronic expansion valve coil Y1E error (Sub 1)
E9 - 10 Electronic expansion valve coil Y3E error (Sub 2) Refer to the E9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E9 - 11 Electronic expansion valve coil Y6E error (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.

Troubleshooting
Error code
F3 - 01 Discharge pipe M1C high temperature error (Master)
F3 - 03 Discharge pipe M1C high temperature error (Sub 1)
F3 - 11 Discharge pipe M2C high temperature error (Master)
F3 - 15 Discharge pipe M2C high temperature error (Sub 2) Refer to the F3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
F3 - 20 Compressor M1C overheat error (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
F3 - 21 Compressor M1C overheat error (Sub 1)
F3 - 25 Compressor M2C overheat error (Master)
F4 - 02 Wet alarm for compressor M1C (Master)
F4 - 03 Wet alarm for compressor M2C (Master)
F4 - 04 Wet alarm for compressor M1C (Sub 1)
Refer to the F4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
F4 - 08 Wet error for compressor M1C (Master)
F4 - 09 Wet error for compressor M2C (Master)
F4 - 10 Wet error for compressor M1C (Sub 1)
F4 - 14 Indoor unit failure alarm
F6 - 02 Excess refrigerant charge error Excess refrigerant charge was detected during test run.
H1 - 01 Defective box air thermistor R17T (Master)
Refer to the H1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
H1 - 02 Defective box air thermistor R17T (Sub 1)
H1 - 03 Defective box air thermistor R17T (Sub 2)
High pressure switch harness abnormality between main
H3 - 02
PCB and inverter PCB 1 (Master)
H3 - 03 High pressure switch harness abnormality between main

PCB and inverter PCB 2 (Master)
H3 - 04
PCB and inverter PCB 1 (Sub 1) Refer to the H3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
High pressure switch harness abnormality between main on the Error code shown to the left.
H3 - 05
PCB and inverter PCB 2 (Sub 1)
H3 - 06 High pressure switch harness abnormality between main

H3 - 07
H7 - 21 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A4P) (Master)
H7 - 22 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A7P) (Master)
H7 - 23 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A4P) (Sub 1) Refer to the H7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
H7 - 24 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A7P) (Sub 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
H7 - 25 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A4P) (Sub 2)
H7 - 26 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A7P) (Sub 2)
H9 - 01 Defective outdoor air thermistor R1T (Master)
Refer to the H9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
H9 - 02 Defective outdoor air thermistor R1T (Sub 1)
H9 - 03 Defective outdoor air thermistor R1T (Sub 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
Defective M1C discharge pipe R13T* thermistor: Open
J3 - 16 (Master)
*In case of RXYQ8-12B type, R15T
Defective M1C discharge pipe R13T* thermistor: Short
J3 - 17 (Master)
J3 - 18 Defective M2C discharge pipe R15T thermistor: Open

(Master)
Defective M2C discharge pipe R15T thermistor: Short
J3 - 19
(Master)
J3 - 22 (Sub 1)
J3 - 23 (Sub 1)
Defective M2C discharge pipe R15T thermistor: Open
J3 - 24
(Sub 1)
J3 - 25 (Sub 1)
J3 - 28 (Sub 2)
J3 - 29 (Sub 2)
Defective M2C discharge pipe R15T thermistor: Open
J3 - 30
(Sub 2)
J3 - 31
(Sub 2)
Defective M2C compressor body thermistor R16T: Open
J3 - 38 (Master) Refer to the J3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Defective M2C compressor body thermistor R16T: Short
J3 - 39
(Master)
J3 - 42
(Sub 1)
Defective M2C compressor body thermistor R16T: Short
J3 - 43
(Sub 1)
J3 - 44
(Sub 2)
J3 - 45 Defective M2C compressor body thermistor R16T: Short

(Sub 2)
Defective M1C compressor body thermistor R14T*: Open
J3 - 47 (Master)
Defective M1C compressor body thermistor R14T*: Short
J3 - 48 (Master)
J3 - 49 (Sub 1)
J3 - 50 (Sub 1)
J3 - 51 (Sub 2)
J3 - 52 (Sub 2)
J3 - 56 Discharge pipe warning (Master)
J3 - 57 Discharge pipe warning (Sub 1)
J3 - 58 Discharge pipe warning (Sub 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
J5 - 01 Defective suction pipe before accumulator thermistor
R5T (Master)
Defective suction pipe before accumulator thermistor Refer to the J5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
J5 - 03
R5T (Sub 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
Defective suction pipe before accumulator thermistor
J5 - 05
R5T (Sub 2)
J6 - 01 Defective heat exchanger main deicer thermistor R3T

(Master)
Defective heat exchanger main deicer thermistor R3T
J6 - 02
(Sub 1)
Defective heat exchanger main deicer thermistor R3T
J6 - 03
(Sub 2)
Defective heat exchanger main gas pipe thermistor R11T
J6 - 08 (Master)
J6 - 09
(Sub 1)
J6 - 10
(Sub 2) Refer to the J6 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Defective heat exchanger sub gas pipe thermistor R12T on the Error code shown to the left.
J6 - 11 (Master)
Defective heat exchanger sub gas pipe thermistor R12T
J6 - 12
(Sub 1)
Defective heat exchanger sub gas pipe thermistor R12T
J6 - 13
(Sub 2)
Defective heat exchanger sub deicer thermistor R10T
J6 - 22 (Master)
J6 - 23
(Sub 1)
J6 - 24
(Sub 2)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe
J7 - 06 thermistor R8T (Master)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe Refer to the J7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
J7 - 07
thermistor R8T (Sub 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
J7 - 08 Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe

thermistor R8T (Sub 2)
Defective heat exchanger main liquid pipe thermistor R2T
J8 - 01
(Master)
Defective heat exchanger main liquid pipe thermistor R2T
J8 - 02
(Sub 1)
J8 - 03 Defective heat exchanger main liquid pipe thermistor R2T

(Sub 2) Refer to the J8 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Defective heat exchanger sub liquid pipe thermistor R9T on the Error code shown to the left.
J8 - 08
(Master)
Defective heat exchanger sub liquid pipe thermistor R9T
J8 - 09
(Sub 1)
J8 - 10 Defective heat exchanger sub liquid pipe thermistor R9T

(Sub 2)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor
J9 - 01
R6T (Master)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor
J9 - 02
R6T (Sub 1)
Defective subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor Refer to the J9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
J9 - 03 on the Error code shown to the left.
R6T (Sub 2)
J9 - 17 Defective electrical box air outlet thermistor R4T (Master)
J9 - 18 Defective electrical box air outlet thermistor R4T (Sub 1)
J9 - 19 Defective electrical box air outlet thermistor R4T (Sub 2)
JA - 06 Defective high pressure sensor S1NPH: Open (Master)
JA - 07 Defective high pressure sensor S1NPH: Short (Master)
JA - 08 Defective high pressure sensor S1NPH: Open (Sub 1) Refer to the JA flowchart and make a diagnosis based
JA - 09 Defective high pressure sensor S1NPH: Short (Sub 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
JA - 10 Defective high pressure sensor S1NPH: Open (Sub 2)
JA - 11 Defective high pressure sensor S1NPH: Short (Sub 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
JC - 06 Defective low pressure sensor S1NPL: Open (Master)
JC - 07 Defective low pressure sensor S1NPL: Short (Master)
JC - 08 Defective low pressure sensor S1NPL: Open (Sub 1) Refer to the JC flowchart and make a diagnosis based on
JC - 09 Defective low pressure sensor S1NPL: Short (Sub 1) the Error code shown to the left.
JC - 10 Defective low pressure sensor S1NPL: Open (Sub 2)
JC - 11 Defective low pressure sensor S1NPL: Short (Sub 2)
L1 - 01 IPM error: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 02 Defective current sensor 1: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 04 IGBT error: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 05 Jumper settings error: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 07 IPM error: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)
L1 - 08 Defective current sensor 1: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)
L1 - 10 IGBT error: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)
L1 - 15 Jumper settings error: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)
L1 - 17 IPM error: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 20 IGBT error: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 21 Jumper settings error: Compressor M2C (Master)
The inverter PCB may be defective or a PCB other than
L1 - 22 IPM error: Compressor M2C (Sub 1) the specified is mounted.
L1 - 23 Defective current sensor 1: Compressor M2C (Sub 1) Refer to the L1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L1 - 36 EEPROM abnormality: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 37 EEPROM abnormality: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 38 EEPROM abnormality: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)
L1 - 47 15 V power supply error: Compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 48 15 V power supply error: Compressor M2C (Master)
L1 - 49 15 V power supply error: Compressor M1C (Sub 1)

Troubleshooting
Error code
L4 - 01 Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter PCB for M1C
(Master)
Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter PCB for M1C
L4 - 02
(Sub 1)
L4 - 03
(Sub 2)
L4 - 06 Radiation fin temperature rise: Fan M1F (Master)
L4 - 07 Radiation fin temperature rise: Fan M2F (Master)
L4 - 09
(Master)
L4 - 10
(Sub 1)
L4 - 11 (Sub 2)
Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality M1C Refer to the L4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L4 - 12
(Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality M1C
L4 - 13
(Sub 1)
L4 - 14 (Sub 2)
L4 - 15
(Master)
L4 - 16
(Sub 1)
L4 - 17 (Sub 2)
L4 - 18 Radiation fin temperature rise: Fan M1F (Sub 1)
L5 - 03 Compressor M1C momentary overcurrent (Master)
L5 - 05 Compressor M1C momentary overcurrent (Sub 1)
L5 - 07 Compressor M1C momentary overcurrent (Sub 2) Refer to the L5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L5 - 14 Compressor M2C momentary overcurrent (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L8 - 03 Compressor M1C overcurrent (Master)
L8 - 06 Compressor M1C overcurrent (Sub 1)
L8 - 07 Compressor M1C overcurrent (Sub 2) Refer to the L8 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L8 - 11 Compressor M2C overcurrent (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L9 - 01 Compressor M1C startup error (Master)
L9 - 05 Compressor M1C startup error (Sub 1)
L9 - 10 Compressor M2C startup error (Master)
L9 - 12 Compressor M2C startup error (Sub 2) Refer to the L9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L9 - 13 Compressor M1C output open phase (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
L9 - 14 Compressor M1C output open phase (Sub 1)
L9 - 16 Compressor M2C output open phase (Master)

Troubleshooting
Error code
LC - 14 Transmission error (inverter PCB 1) (Master)
LC - 15 Transmission error (inverter PCB 1) (Sub 1)
LC - 19 Transmission error (fan PCB 1) (Master)
LC - 20 Transmission error (fan PCB 1) (Sub 1)
LC - 24 Transmission error (fan PCB 2) (Master)
Refer to the LC flowchart and make a diagnosis based
LC - 30 Transmission error (inverter PCB 2) (Master)
LC - 33 Transmission error (sub PCB) (Master)
LC - 34 Transmission error (sub PCB) (Sub 1)
LC - 35 Transmission error (sub PCB) (Sub 2)
P1 - 01 Inverter 1 unbalanced power supply voltage (Master)
P1 - 02 Inverter 1 unbalanced power supply voltage (Sub 1)
P1 - 03 Inverter 1 unbalanced power supply voltage (Sub 2) Refer to the P1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
P1 - 07 Inverter 2 unbalanced power supply voltage (Master) on the Error code shown to the left.
P4 - 01 Defective radiation fin thermistor (Master: Inverter PCB 1)
P4 - 02 Defective fan M1F fin sensor (Master)
P4 - 03 Defective fan M2F fin sensor (Master)
P4 - 04 Defective radiation fin thermistor (Sub 1: Inverter PCB 1)
P4 - 06 Defective radiation fin thermistor (Master: Inverter PCB 2)
P4 - 09 Defective inverter diode bridge fin sensor M1C (Master) Refer to the P4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
P4 - 10 Defective inverter diode bridge fin sensor M1C (Sub 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
P4 - 11 Defective inverter diode bridge fin sensor M1C (Sub 2)
P4 - 12 Defective inverter diode bridge fin sensor M2C (Master)
P4 - 15 Defective fan M1F fin sensor (Sub 1)
PJ - 04 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 1 (Master)
PJ - 05 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 1 (Sub 1)
PJ - 09 Incorrect type of fan PCB 1 (Master)
PJ - 10 Incorrect type of fan PCB 2 (Master)
PJ - 12 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 2 (Master) Refer to the PJ flowchart and make a diagnosis based
PJ - 13 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 2 (Sub 1) on the Error code shown to the left.
PJ - 15 Incorrect type of fan PCB 1 (Sub 1)

Troubleshooting
Error code
U0 - 08 Low pressure standby error (Master)
U0 - 09 Low pressure standby error (Sub 1)
Refer to the U0 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U0 - 10 Low pressure standby error (Sub 2)
U0 - 31 Refrigerant shortage warning (cooling)
U0 - 32 Refrigerant shortage warning (heating)
U2 - 01 Shortage of inverter 1 power supply voltage (Master) Make a diagnosis of the relevant unit based on the
following.
U2 - 02 Inverter 1 open phase power supply (Master)
U2 - 03 Defective capacitor in inverter 1 main circuit (Master) Shortage of power supply voltage
If the other units detect shortage of power supply voltage,
U2 - 08 Shortage of inverter 1 power supply voltage (Sub 1) power supply voltage during operation may be unstable.
U2 - 09 Inverter 1 open phase power supply (Sub 1) Check the power supply condition.
If a particular unit detects the error, operation of 52C may
U2 - 10 Defective capacitor in inverter 1 main circuit (Sub 1) be defective. Follow the U2 flowchart.
U2 - 11 Shortage of inverter 1 power supply voltage (Sub 2)
Open phase of power supply
U2 - 12 Inverter 1 open phase power supply (Sub 2) The wiring between power supply and inverter PCB may
U2 - 13 Defective capacitor in inverter 1 main circuit (Sub 2) be disconnected. Check that power supply is connected
to terminal block, terminal block is connected to PCB
U2 - 22 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Master) without broken wire or disconnection, and reactor wiring
U2 - 23 Inverter 2 open phase power supply (Master) is secured. If no abnormality is found, follow the U2
flowchart.
U2 - 24 Defective capacitor in inverter 2 main circuit (Master)
U2 - 25 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Sub 1) Defective capacitor in main circuit
P-N on the inverter PCB (electrolytic capacitor, power
U2 - 26 Inverter 2 open phase power supply (Sub 1) module) may be damaged and short circuited. Operation
U2 - 27 Defective capacitor in inverter 2 main circuit (Sub 1) of current limiting relay may be defective or the wiring
between the reactor and PCB may be disconnected.
U2 - 28 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Sub 2) Measure the resistance between P-N on the inverter PCB
U2 - 29 Inverter 2 open phase power supply (Sub 2) and check for short circuit. If no abnormality is found,
follow the U2 flowchart.
U2 - 30 Defective capacitor in inverter 2 main circuit (Sub 2)
U2 - 36 Fan motor 1 undervoltage (Master)
U2 - 37 Fan motor 1 undervoltage (Sub 1)
U2 - 39 Fan motor 2 undervoltage (Master)
Initial installation alarm / Test operation failed due to
U3 - 02
indoor unit error
U3 - 03 Test operation not yet executed
U3 - 04 Abnormal end of test operation
Premature end of test operation during initial
U3 - 05
transmission error Refer to the U3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Premature end of test operation during normal
U3 - 06
transmission error
U3 - 07 Premature end of test operation due to transmission error

in any of the units
Premature end of test operation due to transmission error
U3 - 08
of all units
Transmission error between indoor units and outdoor
U4 - 01
units Refer to the U4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Transmission error between indoor unit and system: on the Error code shown to the left.
U4 - 03
check indoor unit error
Error when external control adaptor for outdoor unit is
U7 - 01
installed
Alarm when external control adaptor for outdoor unit is
U7 - 02
installed
U7 - 03 Transmission error between master and Sub 1 units
U7 - 04 Transmission error between master and Sub 2 units Refer to the U7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U7 - 05 Multi system error
U7 - 06 Error in address settings of Sub 1 and 2
Connection of four or more outdoor units in the same
U7 - 07
system
U7 - 11 Error in indoor unit connection capacity for test operation
Other indoor units and outdoor unit abnormality Refer to the U9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U9 - 01

Troubleshooting
Error code
UA - 03 Connection of excessive indoor units
UA - 17 Connection of excess indoor units
UA - 18 Connection of incorrect models of indoor units
Refer to the UA flowchart and make a diagnosis based
UA - 20 Improper combination of outdoor units on the Error code shown to the left.
UA - 21 Wrong connection
UA - 31 Multi system combination error
UA - 49 Wrong combination outdoor units
UF - 01 Wrong wiring check error Refer to the UF flowchart and make a diagnosis based
UF - 05 Defective stop valve for test operation on the Error code shown to the left.
UH - 01 Wiring error Refer to the UH flowchart.

4.3 External Protection Device Abnormality

Applicable All indoor unit models
Models
Error Code A0
Method of Error Detects open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision An open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set for
Conditions external ON/OFF input.
Supposed  Activation of external protection device

Causes  Improper field setting
 Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
External
protection device is
connected to terminals T1 and YES Activation of external
T2 of the indoor unit protection device.
terminal block.
NO
Check the setting state of the

ON/OFF input from outside by remote
controller.
External
ON/OFF input (mode
No. 12, first code No. 1) has
YES Change the second code
been set to external protection
device input (second code No. to 01 or 02.
No. 03) by remote
controller.
NO
Replace the indoor unit

control PCB (A1P).

4.4 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code A1
Method of Error Data from EEPROM is checked.
Detection
Error Decision Data cannot be correctly received from the EEPROM

Conditions EEPROM: Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
supply is turned OFF.
Supposed  Defective indoor unit control PCB

Causes  External factor (Noise etc.)
Troubleshooting
Turn the power supply OFF,

then the power ON again.
Does the YES

system return to The indoor unit control
normal? PCB (A1P) is normal.
External factor other than
NO error (for example, noise
etc.).
control PCB (A1P).

4.5 Drain Level Control System Abnormality

Applicable FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXZQ-B, FXCQ-B, FXEQ-A, FXKQ-MA, FXDSQ-A,
Models FXDQ-PDVE, FXDQ-NDVE, FXDQ-T, FXDQ-SP, FXSQ-PA, FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-P (Option),
FXMQ-M (Option), FXUQ-A, FXHQ-MA (Option), FXHQ-B (Option), FXAQ-A (Option),
FXMQ-MFV1 (Option), FXMQ-AF
Error Code A3
Method of Error By float switch OFF detection
Detection
Error Decision Float switch goes OFF when the conditions for water level rise are not met
Conditions
Supposed  220-240 V power supply is not provided.

Causes  Defective float switch or short circuit connector
 Defective drain pump
 Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
 Defective indoor unit control PCB
 Loose connection of connector
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220-240 V provided? Provide 220-240 V power
supply.
YES
The float switch is NO A short circuit NO

connected to the indoor connector is Connect either a short circuit
unit PCB. (1) connected. (1) connector or float switch and
turn ON again.
YES YES
The float
switch contact is Becomes
forming a short circuit YES normal when the NO
(continuity check with connector (1) of the indoor Replace the indoor unit
the connector (1) unit PCB is short control PCB (A1P).
disconnected) circuited.
NO YES
Defective connection of
connector.
Water builds up NO The float switch NO

in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace the float switch (S1L).
YES YES Modify the float switch's

connection and turn ON again.
The
drain pump is NO
connected to the Connect the drain pump and
indoor unit PCB. turn ON again.
(2)
YES
A Go to the next page.

The drain
pump works when the YES
power supply is reset for the Check the drain piping for
indoor unit. clogging or upward slope, etc.
NO
The
voltage of
drain pump
terminals (∗2) is in NO
accordance to the criteria Replace the indoor unit control
(∗3) (within 5 minutes of PCB (A1P).
resetting the power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or
check for dirt, etc.
Note(s)
1: Float switch (S1L) / 2: Drain pump (M1P) 3: Drain pump (M1P)
Model Note
short circuit connector connector voltage
FXFTQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXFSQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXFRQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXFQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXZQ-B X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXCQ-B X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXEQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXKQ-MA X8A Y1, Y2 220-240 VAC —
FXDSQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXDQ-PDVE X8A X25A 220-240 VAC —
FXDQ-NDVE X8A X25A 220-240 VAC —
FXDQ-T X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXDQ-SP X8A X25A 220-240 VAC —
FXSQ-PA X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXMQ-PA X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXMQ-P X15A X25A 13 VDC Option
FXMQ-M X8A Y1, Y2 220-240 VAC Option
FXUQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC —
FXHQ-MA X8A X25A 220-240 VAC Option
FXHQ-B X15A X25A 13 VDC Option
X3A (S1L) and X4A
FXAQ-A X2A on optional PCB 220-240 VAC Option
(S2L) on optional PCB
FXMQ-MFV1 X8A Y1, Y2 220-240 VAC Option
FXMQ-AF X15A X25A 13 VDC —

4.6 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload

Applicable FXZQ-B, FXCQ-B, FXEQ-A, FXDSQ-A, FXDQ-T, FXSQ20-125PA, FXMQ20-40PA, FXUQ-A,
Models FXHQ-B, FXAQ-A, FXNQ-A2, FXMQ80AF
Error Code A6
Method of Error Abnormal fan revolutions are detected by a signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision The fan revolutions do not increase.

Conditions
Supposed  Broken wires in, short circuit of, or disconnection of connectors from the fan motor harness
Causes  Defective fan motor
(Broken wires or defective insulation)
 Abnormal signal output from the fan motor (defective circuit)
 Instantaneous disturbance in the power supply voltage
 Fan motor lock
(Due to motor or external causes)
 The fan does not rotate due to foreign matter blocking the fan.
 Disconnection of the connector between the high-power PCB and the low-power PCB:
FXCQ80/125B, FXSQ20-125PA, FXMQ20-40PA

Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply, and

then wait for a period of 10 minutes.
Are there any YES

foreign matter around Remove the foreign matter.
the fan?
NO
Is the
connector properly NO
connected to the indoor Properly connect the connector.
unit control PCB?
(1)
YES
By disconnecting
the connector, the fan NO Replace the fan motor (M1F).
can be lightly rotated
by hand.
YES
CHECK 17
Disconnect the connector from the fan
motor, and then make measurement
of resistance between pins.
Is the
resistance between NO
the pins less than the Replace the indoor unit control
judgment criteria? PCB (A1P).
YES
Replace the fan motor and the
indoor unit control PCB (A1P).
Note(s) 1: Check the following connectors.

Model Connector
FXZQ-B X20A, Relay connector
FXCQ20-63B X20A
FXCQ80/125B X8A, X9A
FXEQ-A X20A
FXDSQ-A X20A, Relay connector
FXDQ-T X20A, Relay connector
FXSQ20-125PA X8A
FXMQ20-40PA X8A
FXUQ-A X20A, Relay connector
FXHQ-B X20A, Relay connector
FXAQ20-32A X20A, Relay connector
FXAQ40-63A X20A
FXNQ-A2 X20A, Relay connector
FXMQ80AF X8A
Reference CHECK 17 Refer to page 367.

4.7 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality

4.7.1 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXDQ-SP,
FXHQ-MA)
Applicable FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXDQ-SP, FXHQ-MA
Models
Error Code A6
Method of Error This error is detected if there is no revolution detection signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When no revolutions can be detected even at the maximum output voltage to the fan
Conditions
Supposed  Defective indoor fan motor

Causes  Broken wires
 Defective contact
Troubleshooting
Are the
X4A and X27A NO
connectors securely Properly connect the connectors.
connected? (At this time, check for any
defective connector contact or
YES broken wires.)
Is
the
power of 12
VDC supplied
between the Pins 1
and 3 when the X27A is YES CHECK 16
disconnected and the Check the indoor fan motor and
power supply turns
the wiring circuits of the fan
ON?
motor.
NO
Replace the indoor unit control

PCB (A1P).

4.7.2 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXSQ140PA, FXMQ50-140PA,

FXMQ-P, FXMQ140-250AF)
Applicable FXSQ140PA, FXMQ50-140PA, FXMQ-P, FXMQ140-250AF
Models
Error Code A6
Method of Error  Error from the current flow on the fan PCB
Detection  Error from the rotation speed of the fan motor in operation
 Error from the position signal of the fan motor
 Error from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision  An overcurrent flows.

Conditions  The rotation speed is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
 A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed  Clogging of a foreign matter

Causes  Disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A)
 Disconnection of the connectors between the indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
(A2P)
 Defective fan PCB (A2P)
 Defective fan motor

Troubleshooting
Turn off the power and wait for

10 minutes.
There is a YES
foreign matter around the Remove the foreign matter.
fan.
NO
The fan
motor connectors
(X1A and X2A) of the fan PCB YES
(A2P) are disconnected.
Connect the connector
properly.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor unit YES
PCB (A1P) and the fan Connect the connector
PCB (A2P) are properly.
disconnected.
NO
The fuse (F3U, white) NO

on the fan PCB (A2P) Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
has continuity.
YES
The fan
can be moved lightly
by hand after the fan motor NO
connector of the fan PCB Replace the indoor fan
(A2P) is removed. motor (M1F).
YES
The
resistance between
the power wire terminals of YES
the fan motor and motor frame Replace the indoor fan
(metal part) is 1 M or motor (M1F).
below.
NO
CHECK 16
Remove the power wire
connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases.

The resistance YES

among U, V, and W are unbalanced Replace the indoor fan
or below 1 . motor (M1F).
NO
CHECK 17
Remove the signal connector
from the fan motor and check
the resistance.
Between
VCC and GND
terminals, and between GND YES
Replace the indoor fan
and HW, HV, or HU terminals motor (M1F).
are below 1 .
NO
Turn on the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor
unit PCB (A1P) blinks and the YES
Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
HAP lamp of the fan PCB
(A2P) is off.
NO
Replace the indoor fan
motor (M1F).

4.7.3 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A,

FXFQ-A, FXDBQ-A)
Applicable FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXDBQ-A
Models
Error Code A6-10

Method of Error  Detection from the current flow on the PCB for the fan
Detection  Detection from the rotation speed of the fan motor in operation
 Detection from the position signal of the fan motor
 Detection from the current flow on the PCB for the fan when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision  An overcurrent flows

Conditions  The rotation speed is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
 A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed  Clogged foreign matter

Causes  Disconnection of fan motor connectors
 Fan motor lock
Troubleshooting
Caution Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Turn OFF the power supply and
wait for 10 minutes.
There is a foreign YES

matter around the fan. Remove the foreign matter.
NO
The fan motor

connector (1) is connected NO
Connect the connector correctly.
to the indoor unit PCB for
the fan.
YES
It is
possible to rotate the
fan manually when the fan NO
motor connector is disconnected Replace the fan motor (M1F).
from the indoor unit PCB
for the fan.
YES
Resistance
between UVW of fan YES
motor is unbalanced, or Replace the fan motor (M1F).
short-circuited.
NO
Turn ON the power supply and
check the HAP lamp on the indoor
unit PCB for the fan.

The HAP
lamp on the indoor unit NO
PCB for the fan is Replace the indoor unit PCB for
blinking. the fan.
YES
Replace the fan motor (M1F).
1. Check also if the relay connector between the indoor unit control PCB and the fan motor are
correctly connected.

4.8 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality

Applicable FXKQ-MA, FXHQ-MA
Models
Error Code A7
Method of Error Utilizes ON/OFF of the limit switch when the motor turns.
Detection
Error Decision When ON/OFF of the micro-switch for positioning cannot be reversed even though the swing
Conditions flap motor is energized for a specified amount of time (about 30 seconds).
Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed  Defective swing motor

Causes  Defective connection cable (power supply and limit switch)
 Defective airflow direction adjusting flap-cam

Troubleshooting
NO
Is power supply 220-
240 V provided? Provide 220-240 V power
supply.
YES
Indoor unit is a NO
model equipped with a swing Replace the indoor unit control
flap function PCB (A1P).
YES
The swing The

motor works when the YES connector is NO
power supply is turned OFF connected to the indoor Connect the connector (∗1)
and then restart. unit PCB. (∗1) and turn the power supply on
again.
NO YES
The limit switch NO

functions normally. Replace the defective swing
motor. (∗2)
YES
The relay YES

After cable is short circuited or Replace the limit switch
turning the disconnected. relay cable.
swing-flap ON
and then stopping
with the remote NO
controller, the voltage of
the connector (∗1) is NO
220-240 VAC (50 Hz) PCB (A1P).
when turned ON
again (within 30
seconds of
turning ON
again).
YES
The relay cable has no YES

Replace the power supply
continuity. relay cable.
NO
When
the airflow
direction flap-cam
mechanism is disconnected NO
from the swing motor, operation Replace the defective
is normal when turned swing motor. (∗2)
ON again.
YES
Take the flap-cam mechanism
apart, reassemble and turn ON
again.
Note(s)
Model 1: Swing motor connector 2: Swing motor
FXKQ-MA X6A M1S
FXHQ-MA X6A M1S

4.9 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality

4.9.1 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality (FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-AF)
Applicable FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-AF
Models
Error Code A8
Method of Error Error is detected by checking the input voltage of the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the input voltage of fan motor is 150 V or less, or 386 V or more.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective power supply voltage.

Causes  Defective connection on signal line.
 Defective wiring.
 Instantaneous power failure, others.
Troubleshooting
Check the condition of the power

supply.
(1) Check if power supply voltage is
220-240 V ± 10%.
(2) Check if there is power open
phase or defective wiring.
(3) Check if power supply voltage
unbalance is within 6 V.
There are
problems on the YES
condition of power supply Correct any fault.
described above.
NO
A8 YES
Reoccurrence of Check and correct each wiring.
error.
NO
It is possible there was an

external cause, such as
brownout or instantaneous
power failure.

4.9.2 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality (FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A,

FXFQ-A)
Applicable FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A
Models
Error Code A8-01

Method of Error This error is detected by checking the voltage status with the microcomputer.
Detection
Error Decision Overvoltage or voltage drop is detected on the fan driver.

Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of power supply connector

Causes  Defective indoor unit PCB (A1P)
 External factors (e.g. noise)

Troubleshooting
Check the condition of the power

supply.
Check if power supply voltage is
220-240 V±10%.
There are
problems YES
on the condition of power Correct any fault.
supply described
above.
NO
Is the X27A
connector on the main NO
Properly connect the connector.
PCB properly connected?
YES
Is the
harness connecting YES
the X27A and the terminal block Replace the harness.
(X2M) disconnected?
NO
Is there any external YES

factor such as noise? Remove the external factor.
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again. Then, start operation
with remote controller.
Does the error NO

A8 reoccur? Normal.
YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB
(A1P).

4.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust

Clogging
Models
Error Code A9, A9-02

Method of Error Electronic expansion valve coil conditions are checked via microcomputer.
Detection The electronic expansion valve main body is checked for dust clogging via microcomputer.
Error Decision Pin input for electronic expansion valve coil is abnormal when initializing microcomputer.
Conditions Either of the following conditions is seen/caused/occurs while the unit stops operation.
 Temperature of suction air (R1T) – temperature of liquid pipe (R2T) > 8°C.
 Temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) shows fixed degrees or below.
Supposed  Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes  Defective indoor unit control PCB
 Defective relay cables
Troubleshooting
NO
Power is supplied. Replace the electronic expansion
valve main body.
YES
NO
valve is connected to Shut the power supply OFF after
X5A/X7A of indoor connection and then restart.
unit PCB.
YES
CHECK 18
Check of electronic NO
expansion valve coil Replace the electronic expansion
indicates normal. valve coil.
YES
Relay cables short YES

circuit or Replace the relay cables.
disconnected.
NO
When restarting the operation

after shutting the power supply
OFF does not work, replace the
indoor unit control PCB (A1P).

4.11 Humidifier System Abnormality

Applicable FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXZQ-B, FXCQ-B, FXEQ-A, FXKQ-MA, FXDSQ-A,
Models FXDQ-PDVE, FXDQ-NDVE, FXDQ-T, FXDQ-SP, FXSQ-PA, FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-P (Option),
FXMQ-M (Option), FXUQ-A, FXHQ-MA (Option), FXHQ-B (Option), FXAQ-A (Option),
FXMQ-MFV1 (Option), FXMQ-AF
Error Code AF
Method of Error Water leakage from the humidifier system is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation
Detection while the compressor is not in operation.
Error Decision The float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is not in operation.
Conditions  Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed  Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes  Defective drain piping (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting
Field drain
piping has a defect such as YES
Modify the drain piping.
upward sloping.
NO
A humidifier
unit (optional accessory) is YES
installed on the Check if the humidifier unit is
indoor unit. leaking.
NO
Defective indoor unit
control PCB (A1P).

4.12 Auto Grille Unit Error

Applicable FXFSQ-A (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EBSF is installed)
Models FXFQ-A (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EBSF is installed)
Error Code AH-12

Method of Error This error is determined when an abnormal signal from the auto grille kit is detected.
Detection
Error Decision Any of the following conditions is established while the grille is elevating.
Conditions  The storage detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
 The position detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
 The position detection limit switch detects a position for less than one second while the grille
is moving downward.
Supposed  A large load on the grille

Causes  Tangled wire
 Defective motor
 Defective limit switch
Troubleshooting
Is there any YES

abnormality on appearance of Check the items below.
the grille? • The grille is elevating while
tilted in a horizontal direction.
NO • The grille is caught by
something.
• The grille is not mounted.
After correcting any of the
items above, perform
elevating operation again.
A large load YES

is applied to the grille. Eliminate the load on the grille.
Perform elevating operation
again.
NO
YES
A wire is tangled. Correct the winding of wire.
NO
YES
Is the drive unit normal? Normal.
NO
Check the limit switch, gear,
motor of the drive unit.

4.13 Defective Capacity Setting

Models
Error Code AJ
Method of Error Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
Detection inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PCB, and whether the value is normal or abnormal is
determined.
Error Decision The capacity code is not saved to the PCB, and the capacity setting adaptor is not connected.
Conditions A capacity that does not exist for that unit is set.
Supposed  The capacity setting adaptor was not installed.

Causes  Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
The NO
indoor unit PCB was replaced Replace the indoor unit control
with a spare PCB. PCB (A1P).
YES
The
capacity setting NO
adaptor was installed when Install a capacity setting
replacing the PCB. adaptor.
YES Replace the indoor unit control

PCB (A1P).

4.14 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB

and Fan PCB)
Applicable FXCQ80/125B, FXDBQ-A, FXSQ-PA, FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-P, FXMQ-AF
Models
Error Code C1
Method of Error Transmission conditions between the indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P) are
Detection checked via microcomputer.
Error Decision When normal transmission is not carried out for a certain duration.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of the connector between indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
Causes (A2P)
 Defective indoor unit control PCB (A1P)
 Defective fan PCB (A2P)
 External factor, such as instantaneous power failure

Troubleshooting
Is the
connector between
indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan NO Connect the connector accurately.
PCB (A2P) accurately
connected? (∗1)
YES
Confirm the condition of
transmission on indoor unit
PCB using field setting mode.
(∗2)
Under above
field setting mode, NO Replace the indoor unit control
second code No. is 01. PCB (A1P).
YES
Connect the connector X70A
and turn ON the power again.
C1
YES Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
Reoccurrence
of error.
NO
Continue the operation (It is

possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous power failure).
Note(s) 1. Pull out and insert the connector once and check if it is absolutely connected.
2. Method to check transmission part of indoor unit control PCB.
(1) Turn OFF the power and remove the connector X70A of indoor unit control PCB (A1P).
(2) Short circuit X70A.
(3) After turning ON the power, check below numbers under field setting from remote controller.
(Confirmation: Second code No. at the condition of first code No. 21 on mode No. 41)
Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission error on indoor unit control PCB
 After confirmation, turn OFF the power, take off the short circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.

4.15 Transmission Error

Models
Error Code C1-01

Method of Error Check the condition of transmission using microcomputer.
Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when transmission has been lost for 15 seconds and the error code is
Conditions displayed on the remote controller 60 seconds later.
Supposed  Defective connection of the transmission connector

Causes  Defective indoor unit control PCB
 External factor such as noise
Troubleshooting
Is the
transmission connector on NO
the indoor unit control PCB Connect the connector correctly.
connected correctly?
YES
Is there any YES

external factor such as Remove the external factor.
noise other than failure?
NO
Turn OFF the power supply and
then turn it ON again. Then, start
operation with remote controller.
NO
Error is displayed again. Normal.
YES
Check the indoor unit control
PCB (A1P).

4.16 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Auto

Grille Control PCB)
Applicable FXFSQ-A (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EBSF is installed)
Models FXFQ-A (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EBSF is installed)
Error Code C1-06

Method of Error The status of communication between the indoor unit PCB (X70A) and the auto grille control
Detection PCB (X12A) is checked with the microcomputer.
Error Decision When transmission communication between the indoor unit PCB and the auto grille control PCB
Conditions is not normally performed for a certain period of time or more.
Supposed  Defective connection of the transmission communication connector between the indoor unit
Causes PCB and the auto grille control PCB
 Defective auto grille control PCB

Troubleshooting
Is the X70A
connector on the indoor NO
unit PCB properly
connected?
YES
Is the X12A NO
connector on the auto grille Properly connect the connector.
control PCB properly
connected?
YES
Is the harness YES

disconnected? Replace the harness.
NO
Is there any YES

external factor such as Remove the external factor.
noise?
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again. Then, start grille
operation with remote controller.
Is
"Auto grille
elevation operation" NO
displayed in the remote Check the indoor unit PCB and
controller menu? the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Can NO
the target unit be Check the indoor unit PCB and
selected? the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Normal.

4.17 Thermistor Abnormality

Applicable C4, C5, C9: All indoor unit models
Models CA: FXVQ-N models only
Error Code C4, C5, C9, CA

Method of Error The error is determined by the temperature detected by the thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision The thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective thermistor

 Disconnection of connector
Troubleshooting
Remove the thermistor from

the indoor unit PCB. Then,
insert the connector again.
Does the unit YES

operate normally? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO
Remove the thermistor from
the indoor unit PCB, and then
measure the resistance of the
thermistor using a multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
Normal? Replace the thermistor.
YES
control PCB (A1P).
Note(s) Error code and thermistor

Error Code Thermistor Symbol
C4 Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R2T
C5 Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R3T
C9 Suction air thermistor R1T
CA Discharge air thermistor R4T

4.18 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and

Fan PCB)
Applicable FXCQ80/125B, FXDBQ-A, FXSQ-PA, FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-P, FXMQ-AF
Models
Error Code C6
Method of Error Transmission conditions with the fan PCB (A2P) are checked using the indoor unit PCB (A1P).
Detection
Error Decision Fan PCB (A2P) communication data is determined to be incorrect.

Conditions
Supposed  Defective fan PCB (A2P)

Causes  Defective connection of capacity setting adaptor
 Field setting error
Troubleshooting
Does the
fan PCB part No. NO
match that of the spare Replace it with the correct
parts list? fan PCB (A2P).
YES
Has the
indoor unit control PCB NO After establishing
(A1P) been replaced with a
spare PCB? transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.
YES
Was
the correct
capacity setting
adaptor installed when NO
Install the correct capacity
replacing it with a spare setting adaptor.
PCB?
YES
After establishing
transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.

4.19 Capacity Setting Abnormality

Applicable FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXDBQ-A, FXMQ-PVM
Models
Error Code C6-01

Method of Error This error is detected by checking communication between the PCB (A1P) and the fan
Detection microcomputer.
Error Decision Based on the communication data, decide whether the combination of capacity setting and the
Conditions type of fan driver is correct.
Supposed  Defective connection of the capacity setting adaptor

Causes  Wrong field setting
Troubleshooting
Is the indoor
NO
unit PCB (A1P) replaced by After transmission between
the spare PCB? the indoor and the outdoor
PCBs is established, perform
operation again and then
YES
perform diagnosis again.
Is a proper
capacity setting adaptor NO
installed when replaced by the Install a proper capacity
space PCB? setting adaptor.
YES
After transmission between

the indoor and the outdoor
PCBs is established, perform
operation again and then
perform diagnosis again.

4.20 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code C6-05

Method of Error This error is detected by checking the current sensor value.
Detection
Error Decision When an abnormal signal is detected at the start of operation of the fan motor.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of the connector of the fan motor lead wire

Causes  Defective fan motor (Broken wires or defective insulation)
 Defective PCB (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply, and then

wait for a period of 10 minutes.
Is the fan
motor connector (X901A) NO
connected properly?
YES
Resistances
between UVW phases of
YES
the fan motor are imbalanced, or Replace the fan motor.
there is a short circuit
between UVW.
NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB

(A1P).

4.21 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error

Applicable FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXDSQ-A
Models
Error Code CE
Method of Error The contents of a failure vary with the detailed error code. Check the code and proceed with the
Detection flowchart.
Error Decision Error is detected based on sensor output signals

Conditions
Supposed  Defective or disconnected infrared presence sensor connector: CE-01

Causes  Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation circuit disconnection): CE-02
 Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation short circuit): CE-03
 Defective infrared floor sensor element: CE-04
Troubleshooting
Error type varies according

to error code. Check the
error code and take the
following steps.
Error code
See diagnosis procedure 1.
CE-01
Error code
CE-02
Error code
CE-03
Error code
CE-04

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis procedure 1
Infrared presence sensor
error (Error code CE-01)
Is the
connection
of the connector
on infrared presence NO
sensor PCB (A3P) and Connect the connector correctly.
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
connection of the NO
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared presence sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 22-25.
Displays
15 by the above NO
Normal.
verification method.
YES
Turn off the power and then reconnect.
Displays CE-01
again or 15 for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
Infrared floor sensor error
(Error code CE-02)
Is the
connection
of the connector
on infrared floor NO
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to sensor

and address data No. 26.
Displays
"--" by the above NO
Normal.
YES
Displays CE-02
again or "--" for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-03)
Is the
connection
of the connector
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
YES
Displays
CE-03 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-04)
Is the
connection
of the connector
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
verification
method.
YES
Displays
CE-04 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

4.22 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code CJ
Method of Error Error detection is carried out by the temperature detected by the remote controller thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the remote controller thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is
Conditions running.
 Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed  Defective remote controller thermistor

Causes  Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Clear the error code history.

(While in inspection mode,
press and hold the ON/OFF
button for a period of 4
seconds or more.)
Is CJ YES
displayed on the remote Replace the remote
controller? controller.
NO
External factor other than
equipment error.
(for example, noise etc.)
Note(s) 1: How to delete “history of error codes”.

Press the ON/OFF button for 4 seconds and more while the error code is displayed in the
inspection mode.

4.23 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality

Applicable All outdoor unit models
Models
Error Code E1
Method of Error Abnormality is detected under the communication conditions in the hardware section between
Detection the indoor unit and outdoor unit.
Error Decision When the communication conditions in the hardware section between the indoor unit and the
Conditions outdoor unit are not normal.
Supposed  Defective outdoor unit main PCB (A1P)

Causes  Defective connection communication line between indoor and outdoor units
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power once and

turn ON again.
YES External factor other than

Return to normal?
error (for example, noise
etc.).
NO
Check if
inside/outdoor
relay wires of outdoor YES
Connect the communication
unit main PCB is line correctly.
disconnected.
NO
Replace the outdoor unit

main PCB (A1P).

4.24 Detection of Earth Leakage by Leak Detection Circuit

Models
Error Code E2
Sub code: 01, 02, 03
Method of Error Detect leakage current in the earth leakage detection circuit and detect error on the outdoor unit
Detection main PCB.
Error Decision The leakage current is detected.

Conditions
Supposed  Earth fault

Causes  Improper wiring passing through the current sensor
 Temporary liquid compression or melting in compressor
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply,

and then disconnect
compressor lead wire.
Is wiring
passing through the NO
current sensor (T1A) Pass proper wiring through the
proper? sensor.
YES
Insulation failure of YES

Replace the compressor.
compressor
NO
Insulation failure of YES

component except Replace the relevant
compressor component.
NO
Reinstall wiring, and then turn

ON the power supply again.
Normal (Continue operation)

The error is considered to have
resulted from temporary liquid
compression or penetration in
the compressor.
Take care of the liquid when
power is shut down over an
extended period of time due
to power failure or else.

4.25 Missing of Earth Leakage Detection Core

Models
Error Code E2
Sub code: 06, 07, 08
Method of Error Error is detected according to whether or not there is continuity across the connector X101A for
Detection leakage detection circuit (Q1LD).
Error Decision No current flows at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of connector X101A

Causes  Wiring disconnection
 Defective outdoor unit main PCB
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply, and

then disconnect compressor leads.
Is the system reset to YES

The error is considered to have
normal? resulted from external factors
other than failures (e.g. noise).
NO
Ensure the unit

corresponding to the error
code E2 in monitor mode.
E2-06: Master
E2-07: Sub 1
E2-08: Sub 2
NO
Is X101A connected? Properly connect the connector.
YES
Confirm if there is a NO
leakage with a Megger Replace the outdoor unit main
tester. PCB (A1P).
YES

4.26 Activation of High Pressure Switch

Models
Error Code E3
Method of Error Detect continuity across the high pressure switch in the protection device circuit.
Detection
Error Decision When part of the protection device circuit opens.

Conditions (Reference) Operating pressure of the high pressure switch:
 Operating pressure: 4.0 MPa
 Resetting pressure: 3.0 MPa
Supposed  Activation of high pressure switch

Causes  Defective high pressure switch
 Defective outdoor unit main PCB (A1P)
 Momentary power failure
 Defective high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Check for the following 3 points:

(1) Is the stop valve open?
(2) Is the high pressure switch connector properly
connected to the outdoor unit main PCB?
(3) Is there continuity across the high pressure switch?
Are the NO
above 3 points Remedy defective points.
OK?
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure
service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote controller,
and then restart the operation.
Is the operating
Does the error E3 YES pressure of the high NO
pressure switch normal Replace the high pressure
recur?
(4.0 MPa)? switch (S1PH).
NO YES

CHECK 12
Compare the
voltage
measurement of the
connector of the pressure
sensor (1) with the NO
Replace the high pressure sensor
measurement of the pressure
gauge. Are the (S1NPH).
characteristics of the (1) Use the table on CHECK 12 to
high pressure convert the voltage measurement into
sensor
normal? pressure measurement.
YES
CHECK 12
Service Checker
Connect the service checker, and then compare the high pressure value
measured by the service checker with the voltage measurement of the
connector of the pressure sensor (1)
Are both
pressure values NO
the main PCB (A1P).
same?
YES
-The high pressure sensor is normal, and outdoor unit main PCB is also
normal.
-The high pressure has really become high.
CHECK 1 : Eliminate factors that cause the high pressure to rise.

4.27 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor

Models
Error Code E4
Method of Error Make judgment of pressure detected by the low pressure sensor with the outdoor unit main
Detection PCB.
Error Decision When low pressure caused a drop while the compressor is in operation:
Conditions  Operating pressure: 0.07 MPa
Supposed  Abnormal drop in low pressure

Causes  Defective low pressure sensor
 The stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the low pressure service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote controller, and then restart the operation.
CHECK 12
Compare the voltage
measurement of the connector of the
pressure sensor (1) with the measurement NO
Replace the low pressure sensor
of the pressure gauge. Are the (S1NPL).
characteristics of the low
pressure sensor (1) Use the table on CHECK 12 to
normal? convert the voltage measurement into
pressure measurement.
YES
CHECK 12
Service Checker
Connect the service checker, and then compare the low pressure value
measured by the service checker with the voltage measurement of the
connector of the pressure sensor (1)
Are both NO
pressure values the Replace the outdoor unit
same? main PCB (A1P).
YES
-The low pressure sensor is normal, and outdoor unit main PCB is also
normal.
-The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 2 : Eliminate factors that cause the low pressure to fall.

4.28 Compressor Motor Lock

Models
Error Code E5
Method of Error Inverter PCB takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and
Detection compressor, and the error is detected when any abnormality is observed in the phase-current
waveform.
Error Decision This error will be output when the compressor motor does not start up even in forced startup
Conditions mode.
Supposed  Compressor lock

Causes  High differential pressure (0.5 MPa or more)
 UVW connection error
 Defective inverter PCB
 Stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Is the stop NO
valve open? Field factor
Open the stop valve.
YES
Check the compressor
cable for disconnection
and flaws.
Is the
connection
line of the NO
Replace the connection line,
compressor and then securely connect the
normal?
connector.
Power OFF YES
Are wire
connections
made to phases U, NO
V and W in the proper Make proper wire connections.
order and
manner? W
YES U
Are wire V
connections
made according to the NO Make proper wire connections.
Wiring Diagram?
YES

The insulation
resistance of the relevant YES
compressor is low
(< 100 k)
Power OFF NO
The internal
wiring of the YES
compressor coil is
defective.
NO
Restart the
compressor, and
then check for the NO Quit work.
operation. Does the Pressure equalization failure
error recur? may have occurred. Check for
the refrigerant system.
Power ON YES
Has the
compressor started up
at high differential YES
Pressure equalization failure.
pressure (0.5 MPa Check for the refrigerant
or more)? system.
NO
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
Power OFF Replace the inverter PCB.
transistor
normal?
YES
The error recurs at NO Continue operation.

Power ON
startup. The error could have
resulted from instantaneous
power failure.
YES
Replace the inverter
Power OFF PCB.
The error recurs NO

Power ON Continue operation.
at startup.
YES
This is not a failure of the
inverter PCB. Reinstall the
PCB.

4.29 Compressor Damage Alarm

Models
Error Code E6
Method of Error Determine the symptom to be error by detecting the revolutions of the compressor and pressure
Detection values detected by the high and low pressure sensors, and further making a comparison
between a theoretical current value of the compressor calculated from parameters detected and
an actual current value detected by the power transistor.
Error Decision When a state in which the actual current value of the compressor is abnormally high (by 130%
Conditions or more) compared to the theoretical current value continues for a period of 30 minutes.
 In case of a system with multi outdoor units, the system will return an alarm if there is any
operational unit other than that applicable to E6 or determine to be error if not.
Supposed  Defective compressor

Causes  Defective high pressure sensor
 Defective low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the high and low pressure

service ports.
(2) Reset the power supply, and then restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of NO
the high pressure Replace the high pressure sensor
sensor normal? (S1NPH).
(1)
YES
Are the
characteristics of NO
the low pressure Replace the low pressure sensor
sensor normal? (S1NPL).
(1)
YES
CHECK 12
Service Checker
Connect the service checker to compare the high
pressure and low pressure checked by the service
checker and the actual measured values of the high and
low pressure sensors. (1)

Are
the high
pressure and
ow pressure checked
by the service checker the NO
same as the actual measured Replace the outdoor unit main
values of the high and PCB (A1P).
low pressure
sensors?
YES
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power transistor Replace the inverter PCB.
normal?
YES

4.30 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality

Models
Error Code E7
Method of Error Detects according to the value of current flowing through the fan PCB.
Detection
Error Decision  Overcurrent is detected from the fan PCB (Detecting overcurrent 4 times will shut down the
Conditions system).
 Current does not increase at fan motor startup or while the fan motor is in operation
(Detecting 4 times will shut down the system).
Supposed  Fan motor failure

Causes  Neglect to connect or defective connection of harness/connector between the fan motor and
the PCB
 Fan does not rotate due to foreign matter caught in it.
 Clearing condition: fan motor performs normal operation for a period of 5 minutes
Troubleshooting
Check in Monitor Mode
For models equipped with 2 fan motors, check the fan motor
M1F or M2F applicable to the error code E7 while in monitor
mode of the outdoor unit.
Turn OFF the power supply, and then wait for a period of 10 minutes.
There are
foreign matter around the YES
Remove the foreign matter.
applicable fan.
NO
Check for Connection of Connector
Check for the connections of all fan motor connectors.
Some connectors are YES

Insert the connector.
disconnected.
NO
Check for Colors of Connectors
Check for any wire connection errors in 2 fan motors.
M1F: Connectors are white both on the PCB side and motor side.
M2F: Connectors are white on the PCB side and red on the motor side.
There is a relay YES

connection error. Correct the connection of the
relay harness.
NO
There is no
continuity across the fuse YES
Replace the fan PCB.
(F101U) on the fan
PCB.
NO

The fan
cannot be
rotated by hand when YES
disconnecting the Replace the relevant fan motor
connector from the (M1F, M2F).
fan motor.
NO
Resistance
between the fan
motor power supply cable YES
terminal and the motor Replace the relevant fan motor
frame (metallic part) is (M1F, M2F).
less than
1 M.
NO
U V W
CHECK 16 (Red) (White) (Black)
Check for the connector (power
supply cable) of the fan motor.
Resistance
between U, V, W
phases of the fan motor
power supply cable has lost YES
Replace the relevant fan motor
balance or short circuit is
caused between U, V, (M1F, M2F).
W phases.
NO
Turn ON the power supply to check for the HAP lamps on the fan
PCB.
The HAP
lamp on the fan YES
PCB does not blink.
NO
Replace the relevant fan motor.
(M1F, M2F)

4.31 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Models
Error Code E9
Method of Error Detects according to whether or not there is continuity across the electronic expansion valve
Detection coils.
Error Decision When no current flows through common (COM[+]) at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of connectors from electronic expansion valves

Causes  Defective electronic expansion valve coil
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply
once, and then turn it ON again.
YES Investigate external causes other than

Return to normal?
failures (e.g. noise).
NO
Check for electronic expansion valves applicable to the error code E9 while in monitor mode.
Sub code
E9-01/05/08: Y1E (Master / Sub 1 / Sub 2)
Connector for
the electronic expansion NO
Properly and securely connect the
valve of the outdoor unit
is connected. connector.
YES
The
resistance of the
electronic expansion NO
Replace the electronic expansion
valve coil is normal.
valve.
CHECK 18
YES
Replace the outdoor unit PCB.

4.32 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality

Models
Error Code F3
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the discharge pipe or compressor body
Detection thermistor.
Error Decision  When discharge pipe temperature becomes abnormally high (i.e., 135°C or more)
Conditions  When discharge pipe temperature sharply rises (remains at 120°C or more for a period of
consecutive 10 minutes)
 When compressor surface temperature becomes abnormally high (i.e., 120°C or more)
 When compressor surface temperature sharply rises (remains at 115°C or more for a period
of consecutive 10 minutes)
Supposed  Abnormal discharge pipe temperature

Causes  Defective discharge pipe thermistor
 Abnormal compressor surface temperature
 Defective compressor body thermistor

Troubleshooting
Connect the Service Checker.

Reset the system operation,
and then restart it.
CHECK 11
Are the
characteristics of the
discharge pipe and NO Replace the relevant thermistor.
compressor surface
temperature
thermistors
normal?
YES
Service Checker
Connect the Service Checker, and then make a
comparison between discharge pipe temperature (or
compressor surface temperature and low pressure
checked by the Service Checker and the
measurements of discharge pipe surface temperature
(or compressor surface temperature.)
Is the
temperature
checked by the NO
Service Checker same as the Replace the outdoor unit main
measurement of the PCB (A1P).
temperature?
YES
• All thermistors are normal, and temperature detection

with the outdoor unit main PCB is also normal.
• The discharge pipe temperature (or compressor surface
temperature) has really become high.
CHECK 3 : Eliminate the causes of superheat operation.

4.33 Wet Alarm

Models
Error Code F4
Method of Error In cooling operation, detect the condition under which liquid refrigerant returns to the
Detection compressor, according to the temperature and pressure of each part.
Error Decision When the following wet state continues for a period of 90 minutes, an alert is issued.
Conditions An error is defined for 120 minutes.
 Wet state in outdoor units
When the following wet state continues for a period of 45 minutes, an alert is issued.
 Wet state in some of indoor units
Supposed  Defective suction pipe thermistor

Causes  Defective accumulator inlet thermistor
 Defective discharge pipe thermistor
 Defective high pressure sensor
 Defective indoor unit electronic expansion valve
 Dirty air filter

Troubleshooting
Connect the Service Checker.
Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure
service port.
Reset the operation, and then restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of
the suction pipe
thermistor and the NO
Replace the relevant
compressor suction thermistor.
thermistor normal?
YES
Are the
discharge pipe NO
thermistor characteristics Replace the discharge
normal? pipe thermistor.
YES
Are the high

pressure sensor NO
Replace the high
characteristics pressure sensor
normal? (S1NPH).
YES
Service Checker
Use the Service Checker to find indoor units operating under the following conditions:
& •• Electronic
Gas pipe temperature – Liquid pipe temperature < 2.5°C
expansion valve opening < 300 pulses
Stop the relevant indoor units while the system

is in cooling operation, and then check for the
liquid pipe temperature of these indoor units
after the system is stabilized.
The liquid
pipe temperature is YES
low (equivalent to the Replace the indoor
evaporating unit electronic
temperature). expansion valve.
NO
Clean the air filters
of the indoor units.

4.34 Refrigerant Overcharged

Models
Error Code F6
Method of Error Detect overcharged refrigerant according to outdoor air temperature, heat exchanger deicer
Detection temperature, and liquid pipe temperature during check operation.
Error Decision When the amount of refrigerant, which is calculated using outdoor air temperature, heat
Conditions exchanger deicer temperature, and liquid pipe temperature during check operation, exceeds the
regular charge amount by 30% or more
(If refrigerant is charged slightly over the regular charge amount, F6 may be displayed on the
remote controller.)
Supposed  Refrigerant overcharged

Causes  Disconnection of outdoor air thermistor
 Disconnection of heat exchanger deicer thermistor
 Disconnection of liquid pipe temperature thermistor
Troubleshooting
Check for the conditions of

mounting of the temperature
sensors of the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
thermistor, and liquid pipe
thermistor to the piping.
Are the temperature NO

sensors properly Properly connect the thermistors,
mounted? and then operate the system.
YES
Disconnect the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
thermistor, and liquid pipe
thermistor from the outdoor
unit main PCB, and then make
measurement of resistance
using a multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
Normal? Replace the abnormal thermistors,
and then operate the system.
YES
Remedy refrigerant overcharging.

4.35 Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code H1, H9, J3, J5, J6, J7, J8, J9

Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with individual thermistors.
Detection
Error Decision The system is in operation and the thermistor causes wiring disconnection or short circuit in it.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of thermistor

Causes  Defective thermistor
 Defective outdoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Thermistor is NO
connected to the Connect the connector and turn
connector. ON again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the NO
thermistor from the Replace the thermistor (1).
outdoor unit PCB.
CHECK 11
YES
Replace the outdoor unit PCB.
Note(s) 1. Check the error code and sub code, and replace the corresponding thermistor.

4.36 High Pressure Switch Harness Abnormality (between

Outdoor Unit Main PCB and Inverter PCB)
Models
Error Code H3
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions of the following high pressure switch jumpers between
Detection the PCBs using microcomputer:
 8-12 HP
Between X40A (A1P) and X63A (A3P)
 14-24 HP
Error Decision Normal transmission between PCBs is not possible while the compressor is not operating.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of high pressure switch jumpers between PCBs

Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB
 Defective inverter PCB (A3P, A6P)
Troubleshooting
Check for the transmission

conditions of the jumpers
between the PCBs.
• 8-12 HP
X40A (A1P) ↔ X63A (A3P)
• 14-24 HP
X40A (A1P) ↔ X63A (A3P)
X41A (A1P) ↔ X63A (A6P)
YES
Harness error Return the relevant harness to
NO normal.
Replace the outdoor unit main

PCB (A1P).
NO
H3 error recurs. Complete countermeasures.
YES
Replace the inverter PCB.
8-12 HP: A3P
14-24 HP: A3P, A6P

4.37 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code H7
Method of Error Detect with current sensor value.
Detection
Error Decision When the current sensor shows abnormality.

Conditions
Supposed Defective fan PCB

Causes
Troubleshooting
Check for fan PCB applicable to the error code H7 while in

monitor mode.
H7-21/23/25: Fan PCB (M1F) Master / Sub 1 / Sub 2
H7-22/24/26: Fan PCB (M2F) Master / Sub 1 / Sub 2

and wait for 10 minutes.
Is the
connector of relevant NO
fan motor normally Properly connect the connector.
connected?
YES
Resistance
between U, V, W
phases of the fan motor
power supply cable has lost NO Replace the relevant fan motor.
balance or short circuit is (M1F, M2F)
caused between U,
V, W phases.
YES

4.38 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Models
Error Code JA
Method of Error Detects according to temperature detected with the high pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The high pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-4.3 MPa)
Supposed  Defective high pressure sensor

Causes  Connection of low pressure sensor in mistake for high pressure sensor
 Defective connection of high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

high pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Are the
characteristics
of the high pressure
sensor normal? (Make a NO
comparison between voltage Replace the high pressure sensor
characteristics and gauge (S1NPH).
pressure.)
CHECK 12
YES
Is the PCB
detection pressure
normal? Make a
comparison between data on NO
pressure checked by the Service Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
Checker and the voltage (A1P).
characteristics.
CHECK 12
YES
Reset the operation, and restart
operation.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
high pressure sensor Replace the high pressure sensor
normal? (S1NPH).
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).

4.39 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Models
Error Code JC
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the low pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-1.7 MPa)
Supposed  Defective low pressure sensor

Causes  Connection of high pressure sensor in mistake for low pressure sensor
 Defective connection of low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

low pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Check 12
Are the
characteristics of
the low pressure sensor
normal? (Make a comparison NO
Replace the low pressure sensor
between voltage (S1NPL).
characteristics and
gauge pressure.)
YES
Check 12
Is the PCB
detection pressure
normal? Make a comparison NO
between data on pressure checked Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
by the Service Checker and (A1P).
the voltage
characteristics.
YES
Reset the operation, and then
restart operation.
Are the
characteristics of the low NO
pressure sensor normal? Replace the low pressure sensor
(S1NPL).
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).

4.40 Inverter PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code L1
Method of Error  Detect current value during the output of waveform before compressor startup
Detection  Detect current value with the current sensor during synchronous operation for startup
Error Decision  When the overcurrent flows during the output of waveform
Conditions  When the current sensor error during synchronous operation
 When IPM error occurs
Supposed  Inverter PCB

Causes  IPM failure
 Current sensor failure
 Drive circuit failure
Troubleshooting

once, and then turn it ON
again.
YES The error could have resulted from

Return to normal?
external factors other than failures
(e.g. external noise or thunder).
NO
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
Is the
YES insulation to
ground resistance of the NO Replace the compressor and the
relevant compressor 100
k or more? inverter PCB together.
YES
CHECK 4
Is the power NO Replace the inverter PCB and the fan
transistor of the fan
driver normal? PCB.
YES

4.41 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality

4.41.1 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality (Inverter PCB)
Models
Error Code L4
Sub code: 01-03, 09-11
Method of Error Detect temperature of power module of the inverter PCB.

Detection
Error Decision Thermistor located inside the power module of the inverter PCB for compressor and fan motor.
Conditions Cooling tube plate poor heat-exchange.
Supposed  Cooling tube plate not fixed with screws

Causes  U0 error
 High outdoor air temperature
 Incorrect power supply voltage
 Defective connection of connectors
Troubleshooting
Check for the cooling

conditions of cooling tube
used to cool the inverter.
(1) Is the cooling tube plate
fixed with screws?
(2) Error code U0 is displayed
on the Error History
screen.
NO Rectify troubles.
Normal?
YES
Turn ON the
power supply, and then NO
press the ON button Continue operation.
continuously. Does Field factor. Power module temperature
the error may have risen due to high outdoor air
recur? temperature.
YES
Power
supply voltage YES
Power falls within ±10% of Replace the inverter PCB.
OFF the rated voltage?
NO
Connect to power supply within ±10%
of the rated voltage.

4.41.2 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality (Fan PCB)

Models
Error Code L4
Sub code: 06, 07, 18, 19, 20, 21
Method of Error Fan PCB radiation fin temperature is detected by the thermistor located inside the fan PCB
Detection circuit.
Error Decision Detected temperature exceeds a certain level.

Conditions
Supposed  Radiation fin plate not fixed with screws

Causes  U0 error
 Defective fan PCB
 High outdoor air temperature
Troubleshooting
Check for the cooling

conditions of radiation fin
used to cool the inverter.
(1) Is the radiation fin plate
fixed with screws?
(2) Error code U0 is displayed
on the Error History
screen.
NO
Normal? Rectify troubles.
YES
Turn ON the
power supply, and YES
then press the ON button. Replace the fan PCB.
Does the error
recur?
NO
Continue operation.
Field factor. Radiation fin temperature
may have risen due to high outdoor air
temperature.

4.42 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent

Models
Error Code L5
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.
Detection
Error Decision When overcurrent flows instantaneously through the power transistor.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective compressor coil (such as wiring disconnection or insulation failure)

Causes  Compressor startup failure (mechanical lock)
Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Check the compressor cable
for disconnection and flaws.
Are the
Power OFF leads of the relevant NO
Replace the leads of the
compressor normal? relevant compressor.
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the relevant Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES
The
insulation
compressor is 100 kΩ Replace the
or less. compressor.
NO
The
internal wiring of YES
the compressor coil is Replace the
defective. compressor.
NO

Power OFF
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
YES
Restarting
the system results NO
in the recurrence of Continue operation.
( )
the error. The error could have
resulted from causes
YES such as instantaneous
power failure.
Restarting
the error.
YES
Replace the
compressor.

4.43 Compressor Overcurrent

Models
Error Code L8
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the secondary-side inverter current exceeds a certain value.
Conditions
Supposed  Compressor overloaded

Causes  Wiring disconnection in compressor coil
 Disconnection of compressor wiring
 Incorrect power supply voltage
Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Check the compressor cable
for disconnection and flaws.
Are the
Power OFF leads of the relevant NO
compressor Replace the leads of the
normal? relevant compressor.
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the relevant Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES
The
insulation
resistance of the YES
relevant compressor is Replace the
100 kΩ or less to compressor.
ground.
NO
The
internal wiring of YES
the compressor coil is Replace the
defective. compressor.
NO

Power OFF
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
YES
Restarting
( )
the error. The error could have
resulted from causes
YES such as instantaneous
power failure.
Difference
between High
pressure and Low pressure NO
Pressure equalization
before the compressor failure. Check the
restart is below 0.2 refrigerant system.
MPa?
YES
Restarting
the system results in NO
the recurrence of Continue operation.
the error.
YES
Power
supply voltage YES
Power OFF falls within ±10% of the Replace the
rated voltage? compressor.
NO
Connect to power supply
within ±10% of the rated
voltage.

4.44 Compressor Startup Abnormality

Models
Error Code L9
Method of Error Detect error according to the signal waveform of compressor.
Detection
Error Decision When compressor startup operation has not been completed.
Conditions
Supposed  The stop valve is not opened

Causes  Defective compressor
 Error in wire connections to compressor
 Large differential pressure before compressor startup
Troubleshooting
Startup for
the first time after NO
A
installation?
Go to the next page.
YES
Is a proper NO
amount of refrigerant Charge a proper amount of
charged? refrigerant.
YES
Is the stop valve NO

Open the stop valve.
open?
YES
Refrigerant is
stagnated. (The unit is out YES
of power supply for more Solve the refrigerant stagnation.
than 6 hours.) (Power should be supplied for more
than 6 hours.)
NO
Is the
insulation NO
resistance of the relevant Replace the compressor.
compressor 100 kΩ
or more?
YES
Are the
leads of the YES
compressor Connect the leads of the compressor.
disconnected?
NO
Apply power, and then restart
operation.

Refrigerant is
stagnated. (The unit is out YES
of power supply for more Solve the refrigerant stagnation.
than 6 hours.) (Power should be supplied for more
than 6 hours.)
NO
Is the
insulation
resistance of the relevant NO
compressor 100 k Replace the compressor.
or more?
YES
The internal YES

wiring of the Replace the compressor.
compressor coil is
defective
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter PCB.
transistor normal?
YES
Recheck for the compressor and the

refrigerant system.

4.45 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor

Unit Main PCB
Models
Error Code LC
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Detection using a microcomputer.
Error Decision When normal transmission is disabled for a given period of time or more.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB (transmission block)
 Defective noise filter, compressor or fan motor
 Failure of inverter PCB or fan PCB
Troubleshooting
Is the
connector
between each outdoor NO
unit main PCB and each Properly connect the connector.
inverter PCB securely
connected?
(1)
YES
Does the
inverter PCB part NO
No. match that of the spare Replace with a proper PCB.
parts list?
YES
The insulation
relevant compressor is Replace the compressor.
less than 100 k.
NO
The
insulation
Replace the fan motor.
fan motor is less than
1 M
NO

The
microcomputer
normal monitor indication NO
lamp (green) on the outdoor This is not the LC error.
unit main PCB (A1P) Recheck the error code.
is blinking.
YES
The
microcomputer
normal monitor indication NO The fuse of the NO
lamp (green) on the outdoor noise filter PCB has Replace the inverter PCB.
unit main PCB (A1P) is blown out.
blinking.
YES YES
Replace all of the inverter PCB, fan
Is the PCBs, and noise filter PCBs.
connector
between the outdoor NO
unit main PCB and the sub Properly connect the connector.
PCB securely
connected?
YES
Is the
normal operation NO
indication LED on the sub Properly connect the connector on the
PCB blinking? sub PCB.
YES
YES Replace the outdoor unit main PCB

The LC error recurs.
(A1P).
NO
Continue operation.
The error could have resulted from
causes such as instantaneous
power failure.
Note(s) 1. Connect and disconnect the connector once to ensure that it is securely connected.

4.46 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance

Models
Error Code P1
Method of Error Detect voltage imbalance through inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When power supply voltage imbalance exceeds approximately 12 V.

Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P1 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed  Open phase

Causes  Interphase voltage imbalance
 Defective capacitor in the main circuit
 Defective magnetic relay
 Defective wiring in the main circuit

Troubleshooting
Is supply
voltage imbalance over YES Open phase? YES Correct the open phase of
approximately
12 V? (1) power supply.
NO NO
Rectify the power supply
voltage imbalance.
Take countermeasures (listed
Is the below).
imbalance of voltage
applied to the inverter over YES Defective noise filter, magnetic
approximately relay, or wiring
12 V? (2) Turn OFF the power supply,
and then check and repair
NO wirings in the main circuit and
<If voltage can be monitored> defective components.
(1) Loose contact and wiring
Use equipment capable of constantly disconnection between the
recording power supply voltages (e.g. power supply and the
Memory HiCorder) to record power inverter
supply voltages between phases (R-S, (2) Adhesion, meltdown, or
S-T, and R-T) for a period of loose contact of magnetic
consecutive 1 week. relay
(3) Wiring disconnection in or
loose contact of noise filter
Even though the power Power supply voltage imbalance

supply voltage is normal, the Even though power supply voltage
error recurs. remains balanced when making
measurement, it often becomes
imbalanced during night-time (from
6:00 PM to 10:00 PM).
Take countermeasures.
Explanation to users  Use the document “Notice of Inspection Results” attached to spare part.
Be sure to explain user that “power supply
Hand the “Notice of Inspection Results” to user to ask
voltage imbalance” will occur and Daikin
him/her to rectify the imbalance.
accepts no responsibility for the imbalance.
Note(s)
1. Make measurement of voltage at the power supply terminal block (X1M).
2. Make measurement of voltage at the L1, L2 and L3 terminals of diode module
located on the inverter PCB during the compressor is in operation.

4.47 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality

4.47.1 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality (Inverter PCB)
Models
Error Code P4
Sub code: 09-14
Method of Error Detect the resistance of the following thermistors while the compressor is not running:
Detection  Radiation fin thermistor
 Thermistor located in PCB circuit
 Heat sink thermistor
Error Decision When the resistance of the thermistor comes to a value equivalent to open or short circuit.
Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P4 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed  Defective radiation fin temperature thermistor

Causes  Defective inverter PCB
 Defective compressor
Troubleshooting
Make measurement of
resistance of the radiation fin
thermistor.
Is the
resistance of the NO
relevant thermistor Replace the inverter PCB.
normal?
YES
The
insulation
relevant compressor is not Replace the compressor.
more than 100 k.
NO
The insulation
Replace the fan motor
fan motor is not more
than 1 M. (M1F, M2F).
NO
Turn ON
the power supply. YES
Does the error Replace the inverter PCB.
recur?
NO
Continue operation.

4.47.2 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality (Fan PCB)

Models
Error Code P4
Sub code: 02, 03, 15, 16, 17, 18
Method of Error Detects the resistance of the thermistor located inside the fan PCB circuit while the fan motor is
Detection not in operation.
Error Decision The resistance of the thermistor comes to a value equivalent to open or short circuit.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective fan PCB

Causes  Defective fan motor
Troubleshooting
Check for fan PCB applicable to the error code P4 while in

monitor mode.
P4-02/15/17: Fan PCB (M1F) Master / Sub 1 / Sub 2
P4-03/16/18: Fan PCB (M2F) Master / Sub 1 / Sub 2
The insulation
Replace the fan motor
fan motor is not more (M1F, M2F).
than 1 M.
NO
Turn ON
the power supply. YES
Does the error Replace the fan PCB.
recur?
NO
Continue operation.

4.48 Field Setting Abnormality after Replacing Outdoor Unit

Main PCB or Combination of PCB Abnormality
Models
Error Code PJ
Method of Error This error is detected according to communications with the inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Make judgement according to communication data on whether or not the type of the inverter
Conditions PCB is correct.
Supposed  Mismatching of type of PCB

Causes  Improper (or no) field setting after replacing outdoor unit main PCB
Troubleshooting
Does the
inverter PCB part No. NO
match that of the spare Replace with a correct
parts list? inverter PCB.
YES
Does the
fan PCB part No. NO
match that of the spare Replace with a correct fan
parts list? PCB.
YES
Has the
DIP switch
setting been made NO
properly to replace the Properly make DIP switch
outdoor unit main setting.
PCB? (After completion of setting,
reset the power supply.)
YES
Does the
“Under Preparation”
indication lamp (H2P) on NO
Modify the connection
the outdoor unit wiring.
main PCB turn
OFF?
YES
main PCB (A1P).

4.49 Refrigerant Shortage

Models
Error Code U0
Method of Error Detect refrigerant shortage according to a low pressure level or a difference in heat exchanging
Detection temperature from the suction pipe.
Error Decision Low pressure becomes 0.1 MPa or less.

Conditions  Error is not determined. The unit continues the operation.
Supposed  Refrigerant shortage or refrigerant clogging (wrong piping)

Causes  Defective thermistor
 Defective low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge at the service port on the low

pressure side.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote controller then
restart.
Is the
Is the low NO characteristics of NO
pressure 0.1 MPa low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure
or less? (1) normal? (2) sensor (S1NPL).
YES YES

main PCB (A1P).
Eliminate factors that cause
decreasing low pressure.
CHECK 2
Note(s)
1. Check the low pressure value by using pressure gauge in operation.
2. Compare the actual measurement value by pressure sensor with the value by the
pressure gauge.
(To gain actual measurement value by pressure sensor, measure the voltage at the
connector [between (2)-(3)] and then convert the value into pressure. CHECK 12)

4.50 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality

Models
Error Code U2
Method of Error Detect the voltage of capacitor of the main circuit in the inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When the voltage in the DC circuit (between diode module and power module) falls below 300
Conditions VDC.
Supposed  Abnormal power supply voltage

Causes  Instantaneous power failure
 Open phase
 Defective compressor
 Defective main circuit wiring
 Defective connection of signal cable
Troubleshooting
Check for power supply

conditions.
(1) Power supply voltage falls
within ±10% of the rated
voltage?
(2) Any open phase in the
power supply wiring or any
wrong wiring?
(3) Imbalance in the power
supply voltage is
maintained within 12 V?
There are
some defects in the YES
power supply conditions Fix the defects.
aforementioned.
NO
The insulation
compressor is less than Replace the compressor.
100 k.
NO

The insulation
resistance of the fan YES
motor is not more than Replace the fan motor
1 M. (M1F, M2F).
If the motor gets severely
damaged, the inverter
NO PCB should also be
replaced.
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
YES
Connect and disconnect the

connectors connecting the
main PCB to inverter PCB.
The YES
inverter PCB has Replace the inverter PCB.
damage. If the inverter PCB gets
severely damaged, the
NO compressor and the fan
motor (M1F, M2F) may
have been damaged.
Turn ON the power supply,
and then press the ON button.
The
system enters
standby mode before the YES
outdoor fan starts
rotating.
NO
The
system enters
standby mode before YES
completing the startup Replace the inverter PCB.
operation of the If the inverter PCB gets
compressor. severely damaged, check
for the compressor.
NO
YES
The error U2 recurs. Check for wirings.
NO
Continue operation.
The error could have
resulted from causes such
as instantaneous power
failure.

4.51 Check Operation Not Executed

Models
Error Code U3
Method of Error The check operation has not been executed.
Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Conditions
Supposed Check operation not executed.

Causes
Troubleshooting
The contents of individual

failures vary with sub code.
Ensure the sub code, and
then go to the following:
U3-03 Conduct the test operation.

(The test operation has not
been conducted.)
U3-04 Check for the refrigerant

piping, and then conduct
the test operation.
U3-05 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-06 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-07 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.
U3-08 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.

4.52 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor

Units, Open Phase in Power Supply Wiring
Models All outdoor unit models
Error Code U4
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor and outdoor units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed  Open phase in power supply wiring

Causes  Short circuit in indoor-outdoor or outdoor-outdoor transmission wiring (F1/F2), or wrong
wiring
 Outdoor unit power supply is OFF
 System address does not match
 Multi-tenant function is ON.

Troubleshooting
Check for details of error in

monitor mode.
NO
U4-01 Refer to troubleshooting
U4-03
YES (Indoor unit system
Check the power supply wiring. transmission error)
Any
open phase in
the power supply wiring YES
or any wrong wiring of the Correct the power supply
outdoor unit? wiring.
NO
Has the
indoor or
outdoor unit main
PCB been replaced, or YES
has the indoor-outdoor or Press and hold the RETURN
outdoor-outdoor (BS3) button on the master
transmission outdoor unit main PCB for a
wiring been period of 5 seconds or more.
modified? (The system will not operate
for a period of 12 minutes at
maximum.)
NO
Do all Are the
indoor unit indoor-outdoor and
remote controllers in NO YES
outdoor-outdoor Replace the indoor unit
the same refrigerant transmission wirings
system display control PCB.
normal?
U4?
YES NO
Modify the transmission
wirings.
Reset the power supply once.
Correct the voltage.
Is ∗1. :OFF :ON :BLINK

Does the voltage between
microcomputer L1 and N terminals of (1) SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
normal monitor indication NO NO
the outdoor unit main PCB
lamp (HAP) on the outdoor within ±10% of the voltage
unit main PCB range?
blink?
(2)
YES YES
Does the Fuse on the

seven-segment NO YES
outdoor unit main PCB
display show (1) or (2)? has blown out.
(∗1)
Replace the fuse.
YES NO
The main PCB.
lamp does not turn YES
OFF for a period of 12 Press and hold the RETURN
minutes or more. (BS3) button on the outdoor
unit main PCB for a period of
5 seconds or more.
NO

Are the
indoor-outdoor
and outdoor-outdoor NO
Modify the transmission
transmission wirings wirings.
normal?
YES
Disconnect
the outdoor-outdoor
transmission wiring. NO
Does the system normally Replace the outdoor unit main
operate with a single PCB (A1P).
transmission
line?
YES
Mount the DIII-NET extension
adaptor.
U4-03
Indication after YES

launch test Check controller indoor units :
operation? (1) Some error about
thermistor, or fan motor
(M1F, M2F), electronic
NO expansion valve, or
defective PCB.
Operate all indoor units. (2) Test operation was
interrupted by the MODE
(BS1) button.
NO
Do all units display U9? Check all indoor error
indication.
YES
Did 2 minutes or more NO

elapse after U9 is Carry out the diagnosis again
displayed? after a lapse of 2 minutes or
more.
YES
The PCB of indoor units

displaying U9 are normal.
Check for indoor units of
other systems to troubleshoot
them according to relevant
error codes.

4.53 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and

Indoor Unit
Models
Error Code U5
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.
Detection
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between indoor unit and remote controller

Causes  Connection of 2 main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
 Defective remote controller PCB
 Transmission error caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Main/Sub
Control by YES setting of both remote YES
2 remote controllers Set one of the remote
controllers is set to controllers to Sub, turn OFF
Main. the power supply temporarily,
NO then restart operation.
NO
Resets
All indoor unit normally when
control PCB microcomputer NO NO
power supply is turned Replace the indoor unit
normal monitors OFF temporarily. control PCB.
blinking
YES YES
The error could be produced by
Replace the remote controller noise. Check the surrounding
and restart operation. area and restart operation.
(Ex.: Heavy-duty wireless
equipment, etc.)
YES
Is operation normal? Normal.
NO

PCB and restart operation.
YES
Is operation normal? Normal.
NO
The error could be produced by
noise. Check the surrounding
area and restart operation.
Reference Refer to page 92 for Main/Sub setting.

4.54 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units

Models
Error Code U7
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between outdoor units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed  Connection error of transmission wirings between outdoor unit and external control adaptor
Causes for outdoor unit
 Connection error of transmission wirings between outdoor units
 Cool/Heat selection setting error
 Cool/Heat unified address setting error (functional unit, external control adaptor for outdoor
unit)
 Defective external control adaptor for outdoor unit

Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or

the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then
go to the following:
U7-01
Error code Sub code
Go to Diagnosis Flowchart-1.
(Transmission error when the
external control adaptor is
mounted)
U7-02
Error code Sub code
external control adaptor is
mounted)
U7-03
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between
Master and Sub 1)
U7-04
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between
Master and Sub 2)
U7-05
Error code Sub code
(Multi system error)
U7-06
Error code Sub code
(Manual address setting error for
Sub 1, 2)
U7-07
Error code Sub code
(Connection 4 or more outdoor
units to the same system)
U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units for test operation)

Diagnosis Flowchart-1
U7-01
Error code Sub code

external control adaptor is mounted)
Is
there any
wiring
disconnection or wiring NO
error in the transmission Modify the transmission wirings
wirings to the external to the external control adaptor for
control adaptor for outdoor unit.
outdoor unit?
YES
Is the
microcomputer
normal monitor on the NO Is power supplied to NO
outdoor unit main PCB Supply power to the outdoor
the outdoor unit? unit.
blinking?
YES YES
PCB (A1P).
Is the
Is the power supply
microcomputer cable of the external
normal monitor on the NO NO
control adaptor for outdoor Connect the power supply cable
external control adaptor unit connected to the
for outdoor unit of the external control adaptor
16 VDC power for outdoor unit to the 16 VDC
blinking? supply line? power supply line.
YES YES
Replace the external control
adaptor PCB.
main PCB (A1P).

U7-02
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error when the external

control adaptor for outdoor unit is mounted)
Unified Cool/Heat NO
Set Cool/Heat selection
selection for the external control
adaptor for outdoor unit
to “IND.”
YES
Cool/Heat
selection for the
external control adaptor YES
Unified Cool/Heat
for outdoor unit is set to addresses for outdoor
“Unified Master”. units in the
outdoor-outdoor
transmission are
NO duplicated. Make
address setting again.
Cool/Heat
selection for the
external control adaptor for NO
outdoor unit is set to main PCB (A1P).
“Unified Slave”.
YES
Is the
microcomputer
normal monitor on the NO Is power supplied NO
to the outdoor unit? Supply power to the
outdoor unit control outdoor unit.
PCB blinking?
YES
YES Replace the outdoor unit
main PCB (A1P).
Is the Is the power
microcomputer supply cable of the
normal monitor on the NO external control adaptor for NO
external control adaptor for outdoor unit connected to Connect the power
outdoor unit the 16 VDC power supply cable of the
blinking? supply line? external control adaptor
for outdoor unit to the
16 VDC power supply
YES line.
YES
Does
the error
recur when setting
Cool/Heat selection for NO
the external control Replace the external control
adaptor for outdoor adaptor for outdoor unit main
unit to “IND”? PCB (A1P).
YES
main PCB (A1P).

U7-03
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between Master

and Sub 1)
The
multi transmission
wirings to multi Sub 1 have NO
caused wiring disconnection Replace the outdoor unit main
in them or are being PCB (A1P) for multi Sub 1.
disconnected.
YES
Modify the outdoor unit multi

transmission wirings, and then
reset the power supply.
U7-04
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between Master

and Sub 2)
The
multi transmission
wirings to multi Sub 2 have NO
caused wiring disconnection Replace the outdoor unit main
in them or are being PCB (A1P) for multi Sub 2.
disconnected.
YES

U7-05
Error code Sub code
(Multi system error)
Multi outdoor unit NO

system? PCB (A1P).
YES
Disconnect the outdoor unit multi


U7-06
Error code Sub code
(Manual address setting error for

Sub 1, 2)
One of
outdoor unit
multi transmission wirings has NO
caused wiring disconnection in it Replace the outdoor unit main
or been disconnected. PCB (A1P) for multi Sub unit.
YES
U7-07
Error code Sub code
(Connection of 4 or more outdoor units

in the same system)
4 or more
outdoor units are NO
connected using the outdoor Replace the outdoor unit main
unit multi transmission
wirings. PCB (A1P).
YES

U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor units

for test operation)
There is
an error in the
connection of YES
indoor-outdoor, indoor-indoor, and Rectify the error in the connection
outdoor multi transmission of transmission wirings, and then
wirings. reset the power supply.
NO
The capacity to
connect indoor units falls NO
within the specified range. Check the capacity to connect
indoor units.
YES
PCB (A1P).

4.55 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote

Controllers
Models
Error Code U8
Method of Error In case of controlling with 2 remote controllers, check the system using microcomputer if signal
Detection transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub remote controller) is
normal.
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between main and sub remote controller

Causes  Connected remote controllers are both sub remote controllers
 Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Main/Sub
Using 2 remote NO setting of the remote NO
controllers control. Set Main/Sub setting of the
controller is set to remote controller to Main.
Main. Turn OFF the power supply,
YES YES and restart operation.
Main/Sub
setting of both remote NO
controllers are set to Turn the power OFF and
Sub. then restart. If an error
occurs, replace the remote
YES controller PCB.
Set Main/Sub setting of one
remote controller to Main.
Turn OFF the power supply,
and restart operation.
Reference Refer to page 92 for Main/Sub setting.

4.56 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor

Units in the Same System
Error Code U9
Method of Error Detect the error signal for the other indoor unit within the circuit by outdoor unit main PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When the error decision is made on any other indoor unit within the system concerned
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between other indoor and outdoor units

Causes  Defective electronic expansion valve of other indoor unit
 Defective indoor unit control PCB of other indoor unit
 Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
 Multi-tenant function is ON.
Troubleshooting
Turn ON all indoor units.
All the units NO

display U9. Continue the operation.
YES
U9 has
been displayed for 2 NO
Re-diagnose by display after
minutes or more. passage of 2 minutes or more.
YES
The outdoor unit main PCB
indicated by the error code U9 is
normal.
Check for the indoor unit of other
system, and then conduct
troubleshooting by diagnosis
according to the Error Code
Flowchart.

4.57 Improper Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit,

Indoor Unit and Remote Controller
Error Code UA
Method of Error A difference occurs in data by the type of refrigerant between indoor and outdoor units.
Detection The number of indoor units connected is out of the allowable range.
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as either of the abnormalities aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Excess of connected indoor units

Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB
 Mismatch of the refrigerant type of indoor and outdoor unit.
 Setting of outdoor unit main PCB was not carried out after replacing to spare PCB.
Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then go to the following:
UA-17
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units)
UA-18
Error code Sub code
(Connection of incorrect models
of indoor units)
UA-20
Error code Sub code
(Improper combination of outdoor
units)
UA-21
Error code Sub code
(Wrong connection)
UA-31
Error code Sub code
(Multi system combination error)

UA-17
Error code Sub code
The number
of indoor units
connected to the same YES
system is less than 64. PCB (A1P).
NO
Excess indoor units are
connected.
Diagnosis Flowchart-2 Check for the connection to
connect the proper number of
UA-18 indoor units.
Error code Sub code
Check if
the refrigerant
type of the outdoor YES
unit corresponds to that Replace the outdoor unit main
of the indoor unit. PCB (A1P).
NO
Match the refrigerant types of the
outdoor unit and the indoor unit.
UA-20
Error code Sub code
NO
Multi connection? Replace the outdoor unit main
PCB (A1P).
YES
Was the A
outdoor unit NO different model NO
main PCB replaced with a of outdoor unit is Replace the outdoor unit main
spare PCB? connected. PCB (A1P).
YES YES
Check for the model of outdoor
unit.
NO
Was proper setting of Make setting again, and then
spare PCB made? reset the power supply.
YES
Replace the spare PCB.

UA-21
Error code Sub code
PCB (A1P).
UA-31
Error code Sub code
Is the multi
combination of NO
Correct the multi combination of
outdoor units outdoor units.
proper?
YES
Was the
outdoor unit main NO
PCB replaced with a Replace the outdoor unit main
spare PCB? PCB (A1P).
YES
Is the
procurement of the NO
Procure a proper spare PCB.
spare PCB proper?
YES
Is the setting of the NO

Make setting again, and then reset
spare PCB proper? the power supply.
YES

PCB (A1P).

4.58 Address Duplication of Centralized Control

Models Centralized controller
Error Code UC
Method of Error An indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Address duplication of centralized controller

Troubleshooting
The centralized address is

duplicated. Make setting change so that
the centralized address will
not be duplicated.

4.59 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and

Indoor Unit
Models Schedule timer
Central remote controller
intelligent Touch Controller
Error Code UE
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between optional controllers for centralized control and indoor unit
Causes  Connector for setting main controller is disconnected.
(or disconnection of connector for independent / combined use changeover switch.)
 Defective PCB for centralized controller

Troubleshooting
Check
the indoor
unit for which
UE is displayed. Is YES
A
the transmission error
UE caused on
all indoor
units?
NO
Is the
power supply of NO
the indoor unit, on which Make sure there are no
the UE occurred, hazardous situations, and
turned ON? then turn ON the power
supply.
YES
Has
the setting of
central control Can the
NO setting of central YES
group No. been made with Make correct setting of the
the indoor unit on control group No be
made? central control group No.
which the UE
occurred?
NO
YES For
VRV systems,
can the setting of NO
central control group No. be Check outdoor units to which
made in one and the the refrigerant system is
same refrigerant connected.
system?
YES
Was the Check whether or not there
central control NO are no problems with the
group No. for indoor transmission wiring length,
unit changed? types of cables and wires,
number of units connected,
YES and others. If no problems,
replace the indoor unit PCB.
Reset the power supplies of
every centralized controller.
For the intelligent Touch
controller, register the air
conditioner again while in
DIII-NET test run menu.

Check
the transmission
wiring between NG
centralized controller for Correct the wiring.
any broken wire.
CHECK 15
OK
Check the
transmission
wiring between main NG
centralized controller for Correct the wiring.
any broken wire.
CHECK 15
OK
Has the main

centralized controller setting NO
connector been Correct the connection of the
connected? connector.
YES
Disconnect the transmission
wiring of the main centralized
controller, and then check the
voltage between the
transmission terminals (F1 and
F2) of the master unit
transmission equipment using
a multimeter.
Is the
voltage
between the NO
terminals F1 (+) and F2 (-) Replace the centralized
in the range of 15.2 controller.
to 17.6 VDC?
YES
Centralized controller:
Normal
It is supposed that the error
results from external factors
(e.g. noises) from other
equipment.

4.60 System Not Set Yet

Error Code UF
Method of Error On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Detection that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Error Decision The error is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Conditions checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Supposed  Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and

Causes outdoor-outdoor units
 Failure to execute check operation
 Stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Are the stop NO

valves opened? Open the stop valve.
YES
Is
Is the check indoor-outdoor YES
NO and outdoor-outdoor unit
operation Replace the indoor unit PCB.
carried out? transmission wiring
normal?
YES
NO
Is
indoor-outdoor NO
and outdoor-outdoor unit After fixing incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring press and hold the RETURN
normal? (BS3) button on the outdoor
unit main PCB for 5 seconds.
YES The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may

not have been carried out
successfully.

4.61 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address

Undefined
Error Code UH
Method of Error System detects an indoor unit whose address is not defined by automatic address function.
Detection *Automatic address refers to the automatic designated address of indoor unit and outdoor unit
when connected to the power after installation or wiring replacement (with the RETURN (BS3)
button pressed for more than 5 seconds).
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and

Causes outdoor-outdoor units
 Defective outdoor unit main PCB (A1P)

Troubleshooting
Is
electricity Does
being introduced an error occur
even after 12 minutes
for the first time after YES NO
elapses from the time when Normal
installation or after an indoor electricity is introduced
or outdoor unit PCB to indoor and
has been outdoor units?
replaced?
NO YES
Is
indoor-outdoor
and outdoor-outdoor unit NO After fixing the incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring press the RETURN (BS3)
normal? (1) button on the outdoor unit main
PCB for 5 seconds.
YES  The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Press the RETURN (BS3)
button on the outdoor unit
PCB for 5 seconds.
Error is displayed NO Normal

again?
YES
Disconnect
the outdoor-outdoor
unit transmission wiring to
YES Install the DIII-NET extension
create the one-system status,
and then check whether or adaptor.
not the system is
normal.
NO
Does a
UH error occur for all NO Replace the indoor unit control
indoor units in the PCB.
system?
YES
PCB (A1P).
Note(s)
1. Refer to the installation manual for correct "indoor unit and outdoor unit
connection wiring”.

Check SiMT342301E
5. Check
5.1 High Pressure Check
CHECK 1 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Stop valve closed Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local
pressure High pipe Bent or crashed pipe Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise resistance
Clogging of foreign Is there any temperature difference caused before
materials and after the filter or branch pipe?
[In cooling]
If the outdoor unit electronic Defective outdoor Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
expansion valve is throttled: unit electronic
(1) expansion valve Defective valve body
A temperature
Rise in high difference in excess of
pressure 10°C between the inlet
and the outlet is
deemed to be abnormal.
Defective high pressure sensor Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective corresponding to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
control Defective main
Are the voltage characteristics normal?
PCB
Defective
high pressure Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation
control Defective indoor
unit electronic normal?
expansion valve Defective valve body
Defective high pressure sensor Is the pressure value checked with the Service
Checker corresponding to the measurement value of
[In heating] the pressure sensor?
If the indoor unit electronic Defective Defective indoor unit
control liquid pipe thermistor Is the connector properly connected?
expansion valve excessively Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
throttled: Defective main
(2) PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
[In cooling] Short circuit Is the suction air temperature more than 43C?
High suction air
temperature of
High suction outdoor unit High outdoor air Is the outdoor air temperature more than 43C?
air temperature
temperature
of the High suction Short circuit Is the suction air temperature more than 27C?
condenser air temperature
of indoor unit High room
temperature Is the room temperature more than 27C?
Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
[In heating]
High suction air temperature of outdoor unit Is the outdoor air temperature more than 16CWB?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outdoor unit Is the connector properly connected?
Degradation Dirty condenser Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)

in condensing
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Defective fan Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

Decreased motor Are the motor coil resistance and
fan insulation normal?
Decreased output Defective main
airflow rate PCB (Including If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
capacity setting) setting properly made?
High Dirty filter Is the air filter clogged?

airflow
passage
resistance Obstacle Is there any obstacle in the airflow passage?
Excessive refrigerant charging Refer to CHECK 6.
Improper model selection [In heating] Is the indoor unit too small compared to
the large-sized outdoor unit?
Note(s)
1. In cooling, it is normal if the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve (main) is fully open.
2. In heating, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for subcooling degree
control.

SiMT342301E Check
5.2 Low Pressure Check

CHECK 2 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points
[In cooling] Defective low pressure
(1) sensor Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective
compressor corresponding to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
Defective Defective main PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
low pressure capacity
control control
Defective low pressure Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
sensor corresponding to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
Defective
low pressure Defective hot gas Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
[In both cooling protection solenoid valve
control
and heating] Defective main PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
(2)
Abnormal drop in [In cooling] Defective indoor
low pressure unit electronic Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
(Low evaporating If the indoor unit expansion valve
temperature) electronic Defective valve body
expansion valve is
throttled too much: Defective gas pipe Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
(3) thermistor of indoor unit
Defective
control
Defective electronic Defective liquid pipe Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
expansion valve thermistor of indoor unit
control
Defective main PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Defective outdoor Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
unit electronic
[In heating]
If the outdoor unit Defective low pressure Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
electronic sensor corresponding to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
expansion valve Defective Defective suction pipe Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
excessively control thermistor
throttled:
(4) Defective main PCB
[In cooling]
Low suction air Short circuit Is the suction air temperature less than 14°C?
temperature of
indoor unit Low room temperature Is the room temperature less than 14°C?
Low suction air Is the connector properly connected?

Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
temperature of
the evaporator
Low suction air temperature of outdoor unit Is the outdoor air temperature less than –20°C?
Is the connector properly connected?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outdoor unit
[In heating]
Abnormal piping length Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
Bent or crashed pipe
resistance
Clogging of foreign materials Is there any temperature difference caused before
and after the filter or branch pipe?
Stop valve closed Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Less
circulation
quantity of Refrigerant shortage Refer to CHECK 7.
refrigerant
Moisture choke Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation. (Refer to CHECK 8)
Dirty Is the heat exchanger clogged?
evaporator
Degradation
in evaporating Defective fan motor Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
capacity Decreased Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
fan output
Decreased Defective main PCB If a spare PCB is mounted, is the
airflow rate (Including capacity setting) capacity setting properly made?
High
airflow
passage Dirty filter Is the air filter clogged?
resistance
Obstacle Is there any obstacle in the airflow passage?
Note(s)
1. For details of compressor capacity control while in cooling refer to Compressor PI Control
on page 118.
2. The low pressure protection control includes low pressure protection control and hot gas
bypass control.
3. In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for superheating degree
control.
4. In heating, the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve (main) is used for superheating
degree control of outdoor heat exchanger.

Check SiMT342301E

SiMT342301E Check
5.3 Superheat Operation Check

CHECK 3 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points
Hot gas circuit clogging

Defective hot Defective solenoid
gas bypass valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
control
Defective solenoid
(1) valve body
Defective main PCB
Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and

Defective insulation normal?
Defective [In cooling only]
subcooling Defective valve
discharge electronic body
expansion Is the pressure value checked with the
pipe Defective valve Defective low
temperature subcooling pressure sensor Service Checker corresponding to the
control electronic measurement value of the pressure sensor?
expansion Defective subcooling
Defective heat exchanger outlet Is the connector properly connected?
valve control control thermistor Are the thermistor resistance characteristics
(2) normal?
Defective main Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Temperature PCB
increase of
discharge
pipe Four way valve is in the
Defective four middle position. Check if the piping temperature connected
way valve to the four way valve is normal.
operation Leak from hot gas bypass
valve
Superheat due to
shaft damage
Compressor
overheat Superheat due to
defective compressor
Defective indoor Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
unit electronic
[In cooling] expansion valve Defective valve body
If the indoor unit
electronic Defective gas pipe Is the connector properly connected?
expansion valve is thermistor of indoor unit Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
throttled too much: Defective
(3) control Defective thermistor for Is the connector properly connected?
Defective indoor unit liquid pipe Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
superheating
degree Defective main
control. PCB
Defective Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
outdoor unit
electronic
[In heating]
Defective low pressure Is the pressure value checked with the Service
If the outdoor unit Checker corresponding to the measurement
electronic sensor
value of the pressure sensor?
expansion valve Defective Defective suction pipe
thermistor Is the connector properly connected?
excessively control
throttled: (4) Defective main Are the voltage characteristics normal?
PCB
Refrigerant
shortage Refer to CHECK 7.
Abnormal piping length Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
Bent or crashed pipe Conduct visual checks.
High pipe
resistance (Including moisture choke) Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation. (Refer to CHECK 8)
Stop valve closed. Check if the stop valve is open.
Note(s)
1. Refer to Low pressure protection control for hot gas bypass control.
2. Refer to Subcooling electronic expansion valve control.
3. Superheating temperature control in cooling is conducted by indoor unit electronic
expansion valve.
4. Superheating temperature control in heating is conducted by outdoor unit electronic
expansion valve (main).

Check SiMT342301E
5. Judgment criteria of superheat operation:

(1) Suction gas superheating degree: 10°C and over.
(2) Discharge gas superheating degree: 45°C and over, except immediately after
compressor starts up or is running under dropping control.
(Use the above values as a guide. Depending on the other conditions, the unit may
be normal despite the values within the above range.)

SiMT342301E Check
5.4 Power Transistor Check

CHECK 4 Perform the following procedures prior to check.
(1) Power OFF.
(2) Remove all the wiring connected to the PCB where power transistors are mounted on.
Preparation
 Multimeter ? Prepare the analog type of multimeter.
For the digital type of multimeter, those with diode
check function are available for the checking.
Point of Measurement and Judgment Criteria

 Turn OFF the power supply. Then, after a lapse of 10 minutes or more, make
measurement of resistance.
When using an analog multimeter, When using a digital multimeter,

Measuring
point make measure the resistance in the measure in diode check mode ( ).
No. x1k range.
+ – Judgement Criteria Remarks Judgement Criteria Remarks
1 P2 U Due to condenser
charge and so on,
2 P2 V 50 k ~ 500 k — OL resistance
measurement may
3 P2 W require some time.
4 U P2 Due to condenser
charge and so on,
5 V P2 resistance
6 W P2 50 k and more measurement may
require some time. 0.3 ~ 0.7 V —
7 N31 U (including )
8 N31 V
9 N31 W
10 U N31 Due to condenser
charge and so on,
11 V N31 50 k ~ 500 k — OL resistance
measurement may
12 W N31 require some time.
PCB and Circuit Diagram

W V U
380-415 V 1P/16P
/% /% /% ;$
;$
95

;$
P2 &
3 3 +$3 ;$
N32
9' & 3

:+7
:+7
& )8 3

1 :+7
;$
5
.5

95 36 1
;$
8 9 : ;$

Check SiMT342301E
5.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check

CHECK 6 In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the overcharge of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgment, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of refrigerant overcharge

1. High pressure rises. Consequently, overload control is conducted to cause insufficient
cooling capacity.
2. The superheating degree of suction gas lowers (or wet operation is performed).
Consequently, the compressor becomes lower in discharge pipe temperature despite of
pressure loads.
3. The subcooling degree of condensate rises. Consequently, in heating, the temperature of
discharge air through the subcooled section decreases.
Cooling
High pressure
dropping control
High pressure Frequency comes to
gradually rises with the minimum level.
increase in
frequency. Subcooling degree
becomes higher.
(Liquid connection
High pressure pipe temperature
lowers.)
(Low pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises due
to decreased
compressor output.
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, frequency

increases under the capacity
control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper amount Higher degree of overcharge
The outdoor unit electronic expansion valve

Heating is closed due to the overload control.
Frequency comes to
the minimum level.
(High pressure is maintained
at a constant level.)
High pressure
High pressure drops or rises

immediately after the overload
control is complete.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises
due to decreased
frequency.
Low pressure drops due to
closed outdoor unit
electronic expansion valve.
Frequency Hot gas bypass is activated
for low pressure protection,
i.e., hunting at low pressure.
To maintain high pressure,
frequency decreases under the
capacity control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper amount Higher degree of overcharge

SiMT342301E Check
5.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check

CHECK 7 In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the shortage of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of shortage of refrigerant

1. The superheating degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the compressor discharge gas
temperature becomes higher.
2. The superheating degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the electronic expansion valve
turns open.
3. Low pressure drops to cause the unit not to demonstrate cooling/heating capacity.
Cooling
The opening degree of the indoor unit Fan control is activated for high
electronic expansion valve becomes pressure protection under
larger. cooling control at low outdoor
Either of the electronic expansion air temperature, i.e., the fan is
valves becomes fully open. hunting at high pressure.
Frequency comes to the minimum level.
High pressure
(Low pressure
is maintained at High pressure drops
a constant with decrease in
level.) compressor capacity.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises as the
opening degree of the indoor
unit electronic expansion
valve becomes larger.
Frequency slightly increases If frequency comes to the
under the capacity control. minimum level, low
Frequency pressure cannot be
maintained.
To maintain low
pressure,
frequency drops
due to the
capacity control.
Heating
The opening degree of the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve becomes larger.
The outdoor unit electronic expansion valve fully opens and frequency increases.
Discharge pipe or low pressure dropping control
Frequency comes to
High pressure the minimum level.
(High pressure
is maintained at
a constant
level.)
Low pressure
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, Frequency drops

frequency drops due to the due to the dropping
capacity control.
control.
(Degree of refrigerant shortage)

Proper amount Higher degree of shortage

Check SiMT342301E
5.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure

CHECK 8 Conduct vacuuming and dehydration in the piping system following the procedure for Normal
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Furthermore, if moisture may get mixed in the piping system, follow the procedure for Special
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Normal vacuuming and dehydration

1. Vacuuming and dehydration
 Use a vacuum pump that enables vacuuming up to –100.7 kPaG (5 Torr, –755 mmHgG).
 Connect manifold gauges to the service ports of liquid pipe and gas pipe and run the
vacuum pump for a period of two or more hours to conduct evacuation to –100.7 kPaG or
less.
 If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPaG or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of two hours, moisture will have entered the system or refrigerant
leakage will have been caused. In this case, conduct evacuation for a period of another
one hour.
 If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPaG or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of three hours, conduct the leak tests.
2. Leaving in vacuum state
 Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPaG or less for a period of
one hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not
rise. (If the reading rises, moisture may have remained in the system or refrigerant
leakage may have been caused.)
3. Additional refrigerant charge
 Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
amount of refrigerant.
Special vacuuming and dehydration

Use this procedure if moisture may get into the piping, such as construction during the rainy
season (dew condensation may occur, or rainwater may enter the piping during construction
work).
 Follow the same procedure as that for Normal vacuuming and dehydration described
above.
2. Vacuum break
 Pressurize with nitrogen gas up to 0.05 MPaG.
 Conduct vacuuming and dehydration for a period of one hour or more. If the degree of
vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPaG or less even though evacuation is conducted for a
period of two hours or more, repeat vacuum break - vacuuming and dehydration.
4. Leaving in vacuum state
 Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPaG or less for a period of
one hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not
rise.
5. Additional refrigerant charge
 Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
amount of refrigerant.

SiMT342301E Check
5.8 Thermistor Check

CHECK 11 Thermistor type of indoor units
Indoor heat Indoor heat
Suction air Discharge air
exchanger exchanger
thermistor thermistor
Model (liquid) thermistor (gas) thermistor
R1T R2T R3T R4T
R4T for FXMQ-AF
FXFTQ-A —
FXFSQ-A —
Type C
FXFRQ-A —
Type A
FXFQ-A —
FXZQ-B Type B —
FXCQ-B Type C —
FXEQ-A —
FXKQ-MA —
FXDSQ-A —
Type J
FXDBQ-A —
FXDQ-PD —
FXDQ-ND —
FXDQ-T Type B Type A —
FXDQ-SP Type J —
FXSQ-PA Type A —
FXMQ-PA Type A Type J —
FXMQ-PV1A Type A —
FXMQ-M —
Type J
FXMQ-PVM —
FXUQ-A Type C Type A —
FXHQ-MA —
FXHQ-B —
FXAQ-A —
FXLQ-MA —
FXNQ-MA —
FXNQ-A2 Type B Type J —
FXVQ-N Type J
FXBQ-P —
FXBPQ-P —
FXMQ-MF Type J
FXMQ-AF —

Check SiMT342301E
Thermistor type of outdoor units

Electric symbol Thermistor Type
R1T Outdoor air thermistor N
R2T Heat exchanger main liquid pipe thermistor A
R3T Heat exchanger main deicer thermistor A
R4T Electrical box air outlet thermistor A
R5T Suction pipe before accumulator thermistor A
R6T Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor A
R8T Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor A
R9T Heat exchanger sub liquid pipe thermistor for 22/24 HP A
R10T Heat exchanger sub deicer thermistor for 22/24 HP A
R11T Heat exchanger main gas pipe thermistor for 22/24 HP A
R12T Heat exchanger sub gas pipe thermistor for 22/24 HP A
R13T M1C discharge thermistor for 14-24 HP H
R14T M1C body thermistor for 14-24 HP H
M1C discharge thermistor for 8-12 HP
R15T H
M2C discharge thermistor for 14-24 HP
M1C body thermistor for 8-12 HP
R16T H
M2C body thermistor for 14-24 HP
R17T Box air thermistor A

SiMT342301E Check
Thermistor Resistance (k)

temperature
(°C) Type A Type B Type C
–30 363.8 — —
–25 266.8 — —
–20 197.8 — —
–15 148.2 — —
–10 112.0 111.1 111.8
–5 85.52 84.95 85.42
0 65.84 65.53 65.80
5 51.05 50.95 51.07
10 39.91 39.92 39.97
15 31.44 31.50 31.51
20 24.95 25.02 25.02
25 19.94 20.00 20.00
30 16.04 16.10 16.10
35 12.99 13.04 13.04
40 10.58 10.63 10.63
45 8.669 8.720 8.711
50 7.143 7.189 7.179
55 5.918 — —
60 4.928 — —
65 4.123 — —
70 3.467 — —
75 — — —
80 — — —
85 — — —
90 — — —
95 — — —
100 — — —
105 — — —
3SA48002
3SA48004
3SA48018
3SA48019
3S480003 3SA48016
3SA48001
Drawing No. (AD94A045) 3P283292 (AD100008)
3SA48013 3S480014
(AD210486)
(AD100026) (AD150384)
3S480020
(AD160282)
3S480021
(AD160283)
This data is for reference purposes only.

Check SiMT342301E
Thermistor Resistance (k)

temperature
(°C) Type H Type J Type N
–30 3407 352.1 363.4
–25 2540 261.2 266.7
–20 1910 195.4 197.8
–15 1449 147.3 148.2
–10 1108 111.8 112.1
–5 853.8 85.49 85.51
0 662.7 65.80 65.80
5 517.9 51.15 51.11
10 407.4 40.08 40.01
15 322.5 31.64 31.54
20 256.9 25.16 25.04
25 205.7 20.14 20.00
30 165.7 16.23 16.09
35 134.3 13.16 13.02
40 109.4 10.73 10.60
45 89.58 8.800 8.685
50 73.73 7.255 7.153
55 60.98 6.012 5.923
60 50.67 5.010 4.929
65 42.29 4.196 4.122
70 35.45 3.532 3.463
75 29.84 2.987 —
80 25.21 2.538 —
85 21.38 2.166 —
90 18.21 1.857 —
95 15.57 1.598 —
100 13.36 1.380 —
105 11.49 1.196 —
110 9.92 1.041 —
115 8.594 0.908 —
120 7.465 0.795 —
125 6.499 0.698 —
130 5.675 0.615 —
135 4.968 0.543 —
140 4.360 0.481 —
145 3.836 0.428 —
150 3.384 0.381 —
3SA48006 3SA48005 3S480024
Drawing No.
(AD190115) (AD190114) (AD180053)
This data is for reference purposes only.

SiMT342301E Check
5.9 Pressure Sensor Check

CHECK 12 Pressure Sensor and Voltage Characteristics
Detected Pressure
4.15 4.15
PH (MPa) = × VH – × 0.5
P H, P L 3.0 3.0
(kg/cm2)(MPa) 1.7 1.7
PL (MPa) = × VL – × 0.5
51.0 5.0 3.0 3.0
PH : High pressure (MPa)

45.9 4.5
High Pressure (PH) PL : Low pressure (MPa)
VH : Output Voltage (High Side) (VDC)
40.8 4.0 VL : Output Voltage (Low Side) (VDC)
35.7 3.5
30.6 3.0
25.5 2.5
20.4 2.0
Low Pressure (PL)
15.3 1.5
10.2 1.0
5.1 0.5
0 0
–5.1 –0.5
–0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Output Voltage VH, VL (VDC)
Voltage Measurement Point of the High Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X32A (Red)
(4) Red
Black High
(3)
pressure
sensor
(2)
Microcomputer
A/D input (1) White
Make measurement of DC
voltage between these wires.
Voltage Measurement Point of the Low Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X31A (Blue)
(4) Red
(3) Black Low

pressure
Microcomputer
(2) White sensor
A/D input
(1)
Make measurement of DC voltage between these wires.

Check SiMT342301E
5.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires

CHECK 15 1. Procedure for checking outdoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires
On the system shown below, turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short circuit
between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit A" that is farthest
from the central remote controller, and then conduct continuity checks between the
transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the central remote controller using a
multimeter. If there is continuity between the said terminal blocks, the outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the
outdoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit A" short circuited, conduct continuity
checks between the transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the unified ON/OFF
controller. If there is no continuity as well, conduct continuity checks between the
outdoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit E", between the outdoor-outdoor unit
terminal of the "Outdoor Unit D", between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor
Unit C", … in the order described, thus identifying the place with continuity.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity.
2. Procedure for checking indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires (for
checking the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring of the "Outdoor Unit C" for broken
wires)
Turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short circuit between the indoor-outdoor unit
terminal F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit C, and then conduct continuity checks between the
transmission wirings F1 and F2 of the "Indoor Unit a" that is farthest from the "Outdoor Unit
C" using a multimeter. If there is continuity between the said transmission wirings, the
indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the
indoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit C" short circuited, identify the place with
continuity in the transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit b", transmission wiring of the "Indoor
Unit c", and transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit d" in the order described.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity

SiMT342301E Check
1. Short circuit
between the
outdoor-outdoor
unit terminal
parts.
2. Short circuit between Outdoor-outdoor unit

the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring
2. Check the transmission
wiring for continuity. Indoor-outdoor unit terminal parts.
If there is continuity, the transmission wiring
indoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no
broken wires in it.
1. Check the transmission

wiring for continuity.
If there is continuity, the
outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no broken
wires in it.
Unified ON/OFF controller Central remote controller
5.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable)

CHECK 16 Check the fan motor connector according to the following procedure.
Outdoor Unit 1. Turn OFF the power supply.

2. Measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the motor side connectors (3-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red U
White V
Black W

Check SiMT342301E
Indoor Unit FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXDQ-SP, FXHQ-MA

1. Turn OFF the power supply.
2. Measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the motor side connectors (3-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red
White
Black
Judgment
Model
Black-Red Black-White
FXDQ20-32PD 71.0  ± 10% 73.5  ± 10%
FXDQ40ND 83.0  ± 10% 71.0  ± 10%
FXDQ50ND 47.0  ± 10% 43.0  ± 10%
FXDQ63ND 39.2  ± 10% 41.3  ± 10%
FXDQ20-32SP 81.0  ± 10% 102  ± 10%
FXDQ40-63SP 44.0  ± 10% 44.0  ± 10%
FXHQ32-63MA 71.0  ± 10% 73.5  ± 10%
FXHQ80/100MA 53.5  ± 10% 31.6  ± 10%
FXSQ140PA, FXMQ50-140PA, FXMQ140-250AF

Measurement of power wire connector.
Remove the X1A connector from the fan PCB (A2P) and measure the resistance between the
U and V, V and W, and W and U phases of the motor connector (with five conductors) and
check that each phase are balanced (within a permissible dispersion range of ±20%)
Connector power wire use (X1A)
Red (5) U
— (4)
White (3) V
— (2)
Black (1) W

SiMT342301E Check
FXMQ-PV1A
1. Turn OFF the power supply.
2. Remove the X1A connector and measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the
motor side connectors (three-core wire) to check that the values are balanced within the
range of ±20% and there is no short circuiting, while connector or relay connector is
disconnected.
(2) White: V
(3) Red: U
(1) Black: W
FXMQ-PVM
Measurement of power wire connector.
Remove the X1A connector from the fan PCB (A2P) and measure the resistance between the
U and V, V and W, and W and U phases of the motor connector (with five conductors) and
check that each phase are balanced (within a permissible dispersion range of ±20%)
Connector power wire use (X1A)
Red U
White V
Black W
5.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Wire)

CHECK 17 Check the fan motor connector according to the following procedure.
Indoor Unit FXZQ-B, FXCQ80/125B, FXSQ20-125PA, FXMQ20-40PA, FXUQ-A, FXAQ-A, FXMQ80AF

Resistance measuring points and judgment criteria.
White (1) FG
Orange (2) Vsp
Brown (3) Vcc
Blue (4) GND
— (5) —
— (6) —
Red (7) Vdc
Judgment criteria
Measuring point Criteria

1-4 1  or more
2-4 1  or more
3-4 1  or more
7-4 1  or more

Check SiMT342301E
FXCQ20-63B, FXEQ-A, FXDSQ-A, FXDQ-T, FXHQ-B, FXNQ-A2
— (1) —
White (2) FG
Orange (3) Vsp
Brown (4) Vcc
Blue (5) GND
— (6) —
— (7) —
Red (8) Vm
Judgment criteria
Measuring point Criteria

2-5 1  or more
3-5 1  or more
4-5 1  or more
8-5 1  or more
FXSQ140PA, FXMQ50-140PA, FXMQ-PVM, FXMQ140-250AF

Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between GND and Vcc, Hw, Hv, or Hu
terminals of the motor connector (with five conductors).
Connector signal wire use (X2A)
Gray (5) GND
Pink (4) Vcc
Orange (3) Hw
Blue (2) HV
Yellow (1) HU
FXMQ-PV1A
Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between GND and Vcc, HW, HV, or
HU terminals of the motor connector (with five conductors).
(4) Yellow: HU
(8) Gray: GND (5) Blue: HV
(7) Pink: Vcc (6) Orange: HW

SiMT342301E Check
5.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check

CHECK 18 Remove the connector for electronic expansion valve from PCB. Measure the resistance value
between pins and check the continuity to judge the condition.
The normal products will show the following conditions.
Outdoor Unit Y1E, Y3E (RXYQ8-12B), Y6E
White (1)
Yellow (2)
Orange (3)
Blue (4)
Red (5)
Judgment criteria
Measuring points
Y1E, Y6E Y3E (RXYQ8-12B)
1-5
2-5
120-180  35-55 
3-5
4-5
Y2E, Y3E (RXYQ14-24B), Y4E, Y5E
Orange (1)
Red (2)
Yellow (3)
Black (4)
Gray (5)
Measuring points Judgment criteria

1-5
2-5
35-55 
3-5
4-5

Check SiMT342301E
Indoor Unit FXFTQ-A, FXFSQ-A, FXFRQ-A, FXFQ-A, FXZQ-B, FXCQ-B, FXEQ-A, FXDSQ-A, FXSQ-PA,
FXMQ-PA, FXUQ-A, FXNQ-A2, FXMQ-AF
Orange (1) Measuring points Judgment criteria
1
1-2 No continuity
Gray (6) M
3 1-3 92
Yellow (3) 1-6 46
2-4 92
2 4
2-6 46
Red Black
(2) (4)
(1) Orange
(2) Red
(3) Yellow
(4) Black
(5) —
(6) Gray
FXKQ-MA, FXDQ-T, FXDQ-SP, FXMQ-PV1A, FXMQ-M, FXHQ-MA, FXHQ-B, FXAQ-A,

FXLQ-MA, FXNQ-MA, FXBQ-P, FXBPQ-P, FXMQ-MF
White (1) Measuring points Judgment criteria

φ1
1-2 No continuity
Red (5) M
φ3 1-3 300 Ω
Orange (3) 1-5 150 Ω
2-4 300 Ω
φ2 φ4
2-6 150 Ω
Yellow Brown Blue
(2) (6) (4)
(1) White
(2) Yellow
Blue Brown Orange
(3) Orange (4) (6) (3)
(4) Blue
(5) Red
(6) Brown
(2) (5) (1)
Yellow Red White

SiMT342301E Check
FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND
White (1)
φ1 Measuring points Judgment criteria
Red (6) M 1-2 No continuity
φ3
Orange (3) 1-3 92 Ω
1-6 46 Ω
φ2 φ4 2-4 92 Ω
2-6 46 Ω
Yellow Blue
(2) (4)
(1) White
(2) Yellow
(3) Orange
(4) Blue
(5) —
(6) Red
FXMQ-PVM, FXVQ-N
White (1) Measuring points Judgment criteria
φ1
Red (6) M 1-2 No continuity
φ3 1-3 300 Ω
Orange (3)
1-6 150 Ω
φ2 φ4
2-4 300 Ω
2-6 150 Ω
Yellow Blue
(2) (4)
(1) White
(2) Yellow
Blue — Orange
(3) Orange
(4) (5) (3)
(4) Blue
(5) —
(6) Red
(2) (6) (1)
Yellow Red White

SiMT342301E
Part 7
Appendix
1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................373
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................373
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................374
1.3 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................403
372 Part 7 Appendix

SiMT342301E Wiring Diagrams
1. Wiring Diagrams
1.1 Outdoor Unit
RXYQ8/10/12/14/16/18/20/22/24BYM
C: 2D140799B
Part 7 Appendix 373

Wiring Diagrams SiMT342301E
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

1.2.1 Round Flow Cassette with Streamer Function
FXFTQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVM, FXFRQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVM
3D137041A
374 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.2 Round Flow Cassette with Sensing

FXFSQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVM
3D112965B
Part 7 Appendix 375

1.2.3 Round Flow Cassette

FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVM
3D112978B
376 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.4 Auto Grille Panel

BYCQ125EBSF (Auto Grille Panel for FXFSQ-A, FXFQ-A)
3D130909
Part 7 Appendix 377

1.2.5 Compact Multi Flow Cassette

FXZQ20/25/32/40/50BVM
3D141498
378 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.6 Double Flow Cassette

FXCQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/125BVM
3D141488
Part 7 Appendix 379

1.2.7 Single Flow Cassette

FXEQ20/25/32/40/50/63AV36
3D102995D
380 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.8 Corner Cassette

FXKQ25/32/40/63MAVE9
3D039564E
Part 7 Appendix 381

1.2.9 3D Airflow Duct with Sensing

FXDSQ20/25/32/40/50/63AVM
3D116380
382 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.10 Bedroom Duct

FXDBQ40/50/63/80AVM
C: 3D132045B
Part 7 Appendix 383

1.2.11 Slim Duct (Standard Type)

FXDQ20/25/32PDVE, FXDQ20/25/32PDVET, FXDQ40/50/63NDVE, FXDQ40/50/63NDVET
3D103337B
384 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.12 Slim Duct (Compact Type)

FXDQ20/25/32/40/50/63TV1C, FXDQ20/25/32/40/50/63TV1CA
3P529518D
Part 7 Appendix 385

FXDQ20/25/32/40/50/63SPV1
3D099151
386 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.13 Middle Static Pressure Duct

FXSQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PAVE, FXSQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125PAVE9
C: 3D092752D
Part 7 Appendix 387

388
Wiring Diagrams
POWER SUPPLY
220~240V 50Hz M
MODEL FU (3AG Type) C1R Y1E
X1M
80 5A Slow Blow 12µF R1T R2T R3T
L NE
100 & 125 6.3A Slow Blow 11µF
145 8A Slow Blow 20µF t t t
RED F1U RED
FXDYQ80/100/125/145MAV1
X2M
(see table)
RED L F2U PINK
X7A X13A X12A X11A X18A T2
4 WHITE INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
YELLOW T1
BLUE N ORANGE F2 NOTE-3
K1R X30A F1
BLUE TRANSMISSION WIRING CENTRAL
BLACK P2
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 6 P1 REMOTE CONTROLLER
4 X3A P2
C1R FAN CAPACITOR (See table) P1
R1T
F1U FUSE & HOLDER (See table) K2R
ORG
F2U FUSE 5A 250V 6 RYF3 FLL
4 Std High GRY WIRED REMOTE
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE T1R RYF2 FL CONTROLLER
HAP BRN
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) K3R (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
C1R X4A PINK 1 1 1 See Note 4
K1R ~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY 6 X3M K1R K2R K3R
RYF1 FH 0 0 0
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
FC BLK
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
WHT
YLW
GRY
BRN
BUL
ORG
ORG
4 8 X HAP
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL - LIQUID) 3 1 7 6 X8A
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL - SUCTION)
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
NOTES
X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER) : TERMINAL 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE 4. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE
1. 2. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS
X2M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
WHT
VIOLET
GRY
BRN
BUL
: CONNECTOR BLK : BLACK BLU: BLUE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD
X3M EXT. STATIC SELECTOR : FIELD WIRING ORG: ORANGE RED: RED UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TO THE INDOOR UNIT.
X18A OPTIONAL CONNECTOR - WIRING : PLUG AND SOCKET GRN: GREEN WHT: WHITE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
M
ADAPTOR FOR ELECTRICAL 1~ : JUMPER CONNECTOR GRY: GREY YLW: YELLOW
M1F
APPENDICES : WIRE CLAMP BRN: BROWN
GRN/YLW K2R
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE K3R
A1P K1R
X3M
F1U
X2M X1M
C1R
T1R
SWITCH BOX
C: 3PDA0313
SiMT342301E
Part 7 Appendix
1.2.14 Middle-high Static Pressure Duct

FXMQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PAVE
C: 3D103336A
Part 7 Appendix 389

1.2.15 High Static Pressure Duct

FXMQ160/180/200/250PV1A
3P478266C
390 Part 7 Appendix

FXMQ200/250PVM
C: 3D118424D
Part 7 Appendix 391

FXMQ200/250MVE9
3D039621E
392 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.16 4-Way Flow Ceiling Suspended

FXUQ71/100AVEB9
3D079580B
Part 7 Appendix 393

1.2.17 Ceiling Suspended

FXHQ32/50/63/80/100MAVE
C: 3D039801F
394 Part 7 Appendix

FXHQ125/140BVM
3D141491
Part 7 Appendix 395

1.2.18 Wall Mounted

FXAQ20/25/32/40/50/63AVM
C: 3D120333B
396 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.19 Floor Standing, Concealed Floor Standing

FXLQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE8, FXNQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE8
3D039826G
Part 7 Appendix 397

1.2.20 Concealed Floor Standing (Duct Connection Type)

FXNQ20/25/32/40/50/63A2VEB
3D095598B
398 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.21 Floor Standing Duct

FXVQ125/200/250NY1
3D093434D
Part 7 Appendix 399

400
㹇㹌㹂㹍㹍㹐㹓㹌㹇㹒
㸿㸯㹎㸿㸰㹎㹎㹐㹇㹌㹒㹃㹂㹁㹇㹐㹁㹓㹇㹒㹀㹍㸿㹐㹂
㹁㹎㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹎㸿㹌㹃㹊㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹂㹇㸿㹅㹐㸿㹋
㹄㸯㹓㹄㹓㹑㹃㸦㹄㸳㸿㸰㸳㸮㹔㸧
Wiring Diagrams
㹆㸯㹎㹎㹇㹊㹍㹒㹊㸿㹋㹎㸦㹑㹃㹐㹔㹇㹁㹃㹋㹍㹌㹇㹒㹍㹐㸫㹅㹐㹃㹃㹌㸧㹌㹍㹒㹃㹑㸧

FXVQ400/500NY1
㸯㸬ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸸㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊ࠉ㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉ࠉ㸸㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊ࠉ㸪ࠉ㸸㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸸㹄㹇㹃㹊㹂ࠉ㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅
㹆㸯㸮㹎㹎㹇㹊㹍㹒㹊㸿㹋㹎㸦㹋㸿㹊㹄㹓㹁㹒㹇㹍㹌㸫㹐㹃㹂㸧
㸰㸬㹐㹃㹄㹃㹐ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹇㹌㹑㹒㸿㹊㹊㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹋㸿㹌㹓㸿㹊㸪㹄㹍㹐ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹇㹌㹂㹍㹍㹐㸫㹍㹓㹒㹂㹍㹍㹐
㹆㸿㹎㹄㹊㸿㹑㹆㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹊㸿㹋㹎㸦㹑㹃㹐㹔㹇㹁㹃㹋㹍㹌㹇㹒㹍㹐࣮㹅㹐㹃㹃㹌㸧 32:(56833/<
㸱㸬㹄㹍㹐㹁㹃㹂ࠉ㹍㹄㹄ࠉ㹍㹐ࠉ㹍㹌㸭㹍㹄㹄ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊ࠉ㹍㹎㹃㹐㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹁㸿㹌ࠉ㹀㹃㹑㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹃㹂ࠉ㹀㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊ࠉ㹎㸿㹌㹃㹊㸦㹁㹎㸧㸬
㹉㸯㹋㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹁㹍㹌㹒㸿㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㹋㸯㹄㸧 1㹼ࠉ9+] 㹇㹌ࠉ㹂㹃㹒㸿㹇㹊㹑㸪㹐㹃㹄㹃㹐ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹇㹌㹑㹒㸿㹊㹊㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹋㸿㹌㹓㸿㹊ࠉ㸿㹒㹒㸿㹁㹆㹃㹂ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹓㹌㹇㹒
/ / / 1 㸲㸬㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹒㸿㹉㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹍㹓㹒ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹄㸿㹌ࠉ㹍㹎㹃㹐㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹍㹓㹒㹎㹓㹒㸪
㹉㸯㹐㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㸦㹋㸯㹄㸧
㹓㹑㹃ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㸿㹓㹖㹇㹊㹇㸿㹐㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㸿㹁㹒ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹉㸯㹋㸦㸯㸱㸪㸯㸲㸧㸬
㹉㸯㹑㹍㹔㹃㹐㹁㹓㹐㹐㹃㹌㹒㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㸦㹋㸯㹄㸧㸳㸬㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹓㹑㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹇㹒ࠉ㹒㹍㹅㹃㹒㹆㹃㹐ࠉ㹕㹇㹒㹆ࠉ㹁㹃㹌㹒㹐㸿㹊㹇㹘㹃㹂ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹊㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹂㹃㹔㹇㹁㹃㸪
㹉㸰㹐㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹁㹓㹒ࠉ㹈㹓㹋㹎㹃㹐㸦㹈㸳㸧㹍㹄ࠉ㸿㸰㹎㸬
㸴㸬㸿㹀㹍㹓㹒ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹆㸿㹌㹂㹊㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹋㹃㹒㹆㹍㹂ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㸿㹂㸿㹎㹒㹍㹐㸦㸿㸰㹎㸧ࠉ㹄㹍㹐ࠉ㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹐㹇㹁㸿㹊
㹉㹎㹐㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㸦㹆㹍㹒㹅㸿㹑㹀㹗㹎㸿㹑㹑㸧
㸿㹎㹎㹃㹌㹂㹇㹁㹃㹑㸪㹐㹃㹄㹃㹐ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹒㹃㹁㹆㹌㹇㹁㸿㹊ࠉ㹂㹍㹁㹓㹋㹃㹌㹒㸬
㹋㸯㹄㹄㸿㹌㹋㹍㹒㹍㹐㸵㸬㹑㹃㹒㹒㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹄㸿㹁㹒㹍㹐㹗ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹑㹑㸯ࠉ㹇㹑ࠉ㹑㹆㹇㹎㹎㹃㹂㸸㹔㹍㹊㹒㸪
㹐㸯㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹆㹃㸿㹒㹃㹖㹁㸬㹇㹌㹊㹃㹒㸧㹑㹃㹒㹒㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹄㸿㹁㹒㹍㹐㹗ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹑㹑㸰ࠉ㹇㹑ࠉ㹑㹆㹇㹎㹎㹃㹂㸸㹎㹍㹑㹑㹇
㸶㸬㹁㹍㹊㹍㹐㹑ࠉ㹀㹊㹉㸸㹀㹊㸿㹁㹉ࠉ㹐㹃㹂㸸㹐㹃㹂ࠉ㹀㹊㹓㸸㹀㹊㹓㹃ࠉ㹕㹆㹒㸸㹕㹆㹇㹒㹃ࠉ㹎㹌㹉㸸㹎㹇㹌㹉ࠉ㹗㹊㹕㸸㹗㹃㹊㹊㹍㹕ࠉ㹀㹐㹌㸸㹀㹐㹍㹕㹌
㹐㸰㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹁㹍㹇㹊㹊㹇㹏㹓㹇㹂㸧
㹅㹐㹗㸸㹅㹐㸿㹗ࠉ㹍㹐㹅㸸㹍㹐㸿㹌㹅㹃ࠉ㹅㹐㹌㸸㹅㹐㹃㹃㹌㸬
㹐㸱㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹁㹍㹇㹊㹅㸿㹑㸧
㹐㸲㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹆㹃㸿㹒㹃㹖㹁㸬㹍㹓㹒㹊㹃㹒㸧
;0 / / / 1 ;0 5 6
㹐㹑㸯㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹋㹍㹂㹃㹑㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐
5('
:+7
%/.
%/8
㹐㹷㸯㹐㹷㸰㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗
5(' 5(' 57 57 57
㹑㹑㸯㹑㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㹑㹕㹇㹒㹁㹆 57 .5
㸦㹔㹍㹊㹒㸿㹅㹃㸭㹌㹍㹌㸫㹔㹍㹊㹒㸿㹅㹃㸧 %/8 %/8
㹑㹑㸰㹒㹃㹋㹎㹃㹐㸿㹒㹓㹐㹃㹑㹃㹒㹒㹇㹌㹅㹀㹗 Wr Wr Wr Wr
</:
*5<
㹐㹃㹋㹍㹒㹃㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹊㹃㹐 / / / $3
㸦㹎㹍㹑㹑㹇㹀㹊㹃㸭㹇㹋㹎㹍㹑㹑㹇㹀㹊㹃㸧 .0 5 6 $3
㹒㸯㹐㹒㹐㸿㹌㹑㹄㹍㹐㹋㹃㹐㸦㸰㸰㸮㸫㸰㸲㸮㹔㸭㸰㸰㹔㸧 ;$ ;$ ;$ ;$ ;$ ;$ : : : :
.6
㹖㸱㸿ࠊ㹖㸲㸿㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㹗㸯㹃ࠊ㹗㸰㹃㸧 )8 ;$
+$3
㹖㸳㸿㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㹁㹎㸧 5\ 5\
;$
㹖㸯㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹎㹍㹕㹃㹐㹑㹓㹎㹎㹊㹗㸧 +3
:+7
%/.
5('
75 ;$
㹖㸰㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹇㹌㹅㸧 7 31. 7 127(
:+7 ,1387)520
+3
㹖㸱㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉 Wr 7 7 ;$
㸦㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㸧㸦㹐㹃㹋㹍㹒㹃㹁㹍㹋㹒㹐㹍㹊㹊㹃㹐㸧 ) </: )
2876,'( %/. 56
;$ .5 .35 25*
*51
) )
5('
:+7
%/.
㹖㸲㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹇㹌㹅㸧 %/8 :+7
3 3 RXWGRRU ;$
㹖㸳㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹇㹌㹅㸧 ;0 8 9 : 3 %/. 3 127( 66
㹗㸯㹃࣭㹗㸰㹃㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹐㹍㹌㹇㹁㹃㹖㹎㸿㹌㹑㹇㹍㹌㹔㸿㹊㹔㹃 ;$ =& 㹖㸱㹋 66 ,0326
5('
:+7
%/.
;$ ;$ < < 1 3266,
㹗㸯㹑㹑㹍㹊㹃㹌㹍㹇㹂㹔㸿㹊㹔㹃㸦㹆㹍㹒㹅㸿㹑㹀㹗㹎㸿㹑㹑㸧 %/. :+7
%/8
:+7
:+7 %/8
*51
5('
%/.
%51
8 9 : 5(' %/8
</:
:+7
92/7
121
92/7
㹘㸯㹁㹄㹃㹐㹐㹇㹒㹃ࠉ㹁㹍㹐㹃 127(

;$
㹍㹎㹒㹇㹍㹌㸿㹊㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㹋㹖㸲㹋 %/. :+7
㹖㸯㸴㸿㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㸿㹂㸿㹎㹒㹍㹐㹄㹍㹐㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅㸧㸱㹼㹁㹎
㹖㸳㹋 % % %& $ $
;0 3 3
0)
.5
.6 .5
;$ ;$
%/. 31.
- .0 <6
&21752/3$1(/ $ $
127(
0 0
;0 75 ;0
$3 <( <(
&3
.5 .0
;0
.6 ;0
=&
$3
&21752/%2; ;0
;$ &21752/%2;
81,7/$<287㸦)5217㸧
'' 㹄㹖㹔㹏㸲㸮㸮㹌㹗㸯࣭㸳㸮㸮㹌㹗㸯㸪㹄㹖㹔㹏㸲㸮㸮㹌㹗㸯㸲࣭㸳㸮㸮㹌㹗㸯㸲
3D093435D
SiMT342301E
Part 7 Appendix
㹇㹌㹂㹍㹍㹐㹓㹌㹇㹒
㸿㸯㹎㸿㸰㹎㹎㹐㹇㹌㹒㹃㹂㹁㹇㹐㹁㹓㹇㹒㹀㹍㸿㹐㹂
SiMT342301E
㹁㹎㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹎㸿㹌㹃㹊㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹂㹇㸿㹅㹐㸿㹋
Part 7 Appendix
㹄㸯㹓㹄㹓㹑㹃㸦㹄㸳㸿㸰㸳㸮㹔㸧
FXVQ500NY16
㹆㸯㹎㹎㹇㹊㹍㹒㹊㸿㹋㹎㸦㹑㹃㹐㹔㹇㹁㹃㹋㹍㹌㹇㹒㹍㹐㸫㹅㹐㹃㹃㹌㸧㹌㹍㹒㹃㹑㸧

㸯㸬ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸸㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊ࠉ㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉ࠉ㸸㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊ࠉ㸪ࠉ㸸㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸸㹄㹇㹃㹊㹂ࠉ㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅
㹆㸯㸮㹎㹎㹇㹊㹍㹒㹊㸿㹋㹎㸦㹋㸿㹊㹄㹓㹁㹒㹇㹍㹌㸫㹐㹃㹂㸧
㸰㸬㹐㹃㹄㹃㹐ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹇㹌㹑㹒㸿㹊㹊㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹋㸿㹌㹓㸿㹊㸪㹄㹍㹐ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹇㹌㹂㹍㹍㹐㸫㹍㹓㹒㹂㹍㹍㹐
㹆㸿㹎㹄㹊㸿㹑㹆㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹊㸿㹋㹎㸦㹑㹃㹐㹔㹇㹁㹃㹋㹍㹌㹇㹒㹍㹐࣮㹅㹐㹃㹃㹌㸧 32:(56833/<
㸱㸬㹄㹍㹐㹁㹃㹂ࠉ㹍㹄㹄ࠉ㹍㹐ࠉ㹍㹌㸭㹍㹄㹄ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊ࠉ㹍㹎㹃㹐㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹁㸿㹌ࠉ㹀㹃㹑㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹃㹂ࠉ㹀㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊ࠉ㹎㸿㹌㹃㹊㸦㹁㹎㸧㸬
㹉㸯㹋㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹁㹍㹌㹒㸿㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㹋㸯㹄㸧㹼ࠉ9+] 㹇㹌ࠉ㹂㹃㹒㸿㹇㹊㹑㸪㹐㹃㹄㹃㹐ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹇㹌㹑㹒㸿㹊㹊㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹋㸿㹌㹓㸿㹊ࠉ㸿㹒㹒㸿㹁㹆㹃㹂ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹓㹌㹇㹒
/ / / 1 㸲㸬㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹒㸿㹉㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹍㹓㹒ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹄㸿㹌ࠉ㹍㹎㹃㹐㸿㹒㹇㹍㹌ࠉ㹍㹓㹒㹎㹓㹒㸪
㹉㸯㹐㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㸦㹋㸯㹄㸧
㹓㹑㹃ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㸿㹓㹖㹇㹊㹇㸿㹐㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㸿㹁㹒ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹉㸯㹋㸦㸯㸱㸪㸯㸲㸧㸬
㹉㸯㹑㹍㹔㹃㹐㹁㹓㹐㹐㹃㹌㹒㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㸦㹋㸯㹄㸧㸳㸬㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹓㹑㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹇㹒ࠉ㹒㹍㹅㹃㹒㹆㹃㹐ࠉ㹕㹇㹒㹆ࠉ㹁㹃㹌㹒㹐㸿㹊㹇㹘㹃㹂ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹊㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹂㹃㹔㹇㹁㹃㸪
㹉㸰㹐㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹁㹓㹒ࠉ㹈㹓㹋㹎㹃㹐㸦㹈㸳㸧㹍㹄ࠉ㸿㸰㹎㸬
㸴㸬㸿㹀㹍㹓㹒ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹆㸿㹌㹂㹊㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹋㹃㹒㹆㹍㹂ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㸿㹂㸿㹎㹒㹍㹐㸦㸿㸰㹎㸧ࠉ㹄㹍㹐ࠉ㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹐㹇㹁㸿㹊
㹉㹎㹐㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㸦㹆㹍㹒㹅㸿㹑㹀㹗㹎㸿㹑㹑㸧
㸿㹎㹎㹃㹌㹂㹇㹁㹃㹑㸪㹐㹃㹄㹃㹐ࠉ㹒㹍ࠉ㹒㹆㹃ࠉ㹒㹃㹁㹆㹌㹇㹁㸿㹊ࠉ㹂㹍㹁㹓㹋㹃㹌㹒㸬
㹋㸯㹄㹄㸿㹌㹋㹍㹒㹍㹐㸵㸬㹑㹃㹒㹒㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹄㸿㹁㹒㹍㹐㹗ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹑㹑㸯ࠉ㹇㹑ࠉ㹑㹆㹇㹎㹎㹃㹂㸸㹔㹍㹊㹒㸪
㹐㸯㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹆㹃㸿㹒㹃㹖㹁㸬㹇㹌㹊㹃㹒㸧㹑㹃㹒㹒㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹕㹆㹃㹌ࠉ㹄㸿㹁㹒㹍㹐㹗ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹑㹑㸰ࠉ㹇㹑ࠉ㹑㹆㹇㹎㹎㹃㹂㸸㹎㹍㹑㹑㹇
㸶㸬㹁㹍㹊㹍㹐㹑ࠉ㹀㹊㹉㸸㹀㹊㸿㹁㹉ࠉ㹐㹃㹂㸸㹐㹃㹂ࠉ㹀㹊㹓㸸㹀㹊㹓㹃ࠉ㹕㹆㹒㸸㹕㹆㹇㹒㹃ࠉ㹎㹌㹉㸸㹎㹇㹌㹉ࠉ㹗㹊㹕㸸㹗㹃㹊㹊㹍㹕ࠉ㹀㹐㹌㸸㹀㹐㹍㹕㹌
㹐㸰㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹁㹍㹇㹊㹊㹇㹏㹓㹇㹂㸧
㹅㹐㹗㸸㹅㹐㸿㹗ࠉ㹍㹐㹅㸸㹍㹐㸿㹌㹅㹃ࠉ㹅㹐㹌㸸㹅㹐㹃㹃㹌㸬
㹐㸱㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹁㹍㹇㹊㹅㸿㹑㸧
㹐㸲㹒㹒㹆㹃㹐㹋㹇㹑㹒㹍㹐㸦㹆㹃㸿㹒㹃㹖㹁㸬㹍㹓㹒㹊㹃㹒㸧
;0 / / / 1 ;0 5 6
㹐㹑㸯㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹋㹍㹂㹃㹑㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐
5('
:+7
%/.
%/8
㹐㹷㸯㹐㹷㸰㹋㸿㹅㹌㹃㹒㹇㹁㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗
5(' 5(' 57 57 57
㹑㹑㸯㹑㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㹑㹕㹇㹒㹁㹆 57 .5
㸦㹔㹍㹊㹒㸿㹅㹃㸭㹌㹍㹌㸫㹔㹍㹊㹒㸿㹅㹃㸧 %/8 %/8
㹑㹑㸰㹒㹃㹋㹎㹃㹐㸿㹒㹓㹐㹃㹑㹃㹒㹒㹇㹌㹅㹀㹗 Wr Wr Wr Wr
</:
*5<
㹐㹃㹋㹍㹒㹃㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㹊㹃㹐 / / / $3
㸦㹎㹍㹑㹑㹇㹀㹊㹃㸭㹇㹋㹎㹍㹑㹑㹇㹀㹊㹃㸧 .0 5 6 $3
㹒㸯㹐㹒㹐㸿㹌㹑㹄㹍㹐㹋㹃㹐㸦㸰㸰㸮㸫㸰㸲㸮㹔㸭㸰㸰㹔㸧 ;$ ;$ ;$ ;$ ;$ ;$ : : : :
.6
㹖㸱㸿ࠊ㹖㸲㸿㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㹗㸯㹃ࠊ㹗㸰㹃㸧 )8 ;$
+$3
㹖㸳㸿㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㹁㹎㸧 5\ 5\
;$
㹖㸯㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹎㹍㹕㹃㹐㹑㹓㹎㹎㹊㹗㸧 +3
:+7
%/.
5('
75 ;$
㹖㸰㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹇㹌㹅㸧 7 31. 7 127(
:+7 ,1387)520
+3
㹖㸱㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉 Wr 7 7 ;$
㸦㹁㹍㹌㹒㹐㹍㹊㸧㸦㹐㹃㹋㹍㹒㹃㹁㹍㹋㹒㹐㹍㹊㹊㹃㹐㸧 ) </: )
2876,'( %/. 56
;$ .5 .35 25*
*51
) )
5('
:+7
%/.
㹖㸲㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹇㹌㹅㸧 %/8 :+7
3 3 RXWGRRU ;$
㹖㸳㹋㹒㹃㹐㹋㹇㹌㸿㹊㹀㹊㹍㹁㹉㸦㹐㹃㹊㸿㹗㹇㹌㹅㸧 ;0 8 9 : 3 %/. 3 127( 66
㹗㸯㹃࣭㹗㸰㹃㹃㹊㹃㹁㹒㹐㹍㹌㹇㹁㹃㹖㹎㸿㹌㹑㹇㹍㹌㹔㸿㹊㹔㹃 ;$ =& 㹖㸱㹋 66 ,0326
5('
:+7
%/.
;$ ;$ < < 1 3266,
㹗㸯㹑㹑㹍㹊㹃㹌㹍㹇㹂㹔㸿㹊㹔㹃㸦㹆㹍㹒㹅㸿㹑㹀㹗㹎㸿㹑㹑㸧 %/. :+7
%/8
:+7
:+7 %/8
*51
5('
%/.
%51
8 9 : 5(' %/8
</:
:+7
92/7
121
92/7
㹘㸯㹁㹄㹃㹐㹐㹇㹒㹃ࠉ㹁㹍㹐㹃 127(

;$
㹍㹎㹒㹇㹍㹌㸿㹊㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㹋㹖㸲㹋 %/. :+7
㹖㸯㸴㸿㹁㹍㹌㹌㹃㹁㹒㹍㹐㸦㸿㹂㸿㹎㹒㹍㹐㹄㹍㹐㹕㹇㹐㹇㹌㹅㸧㸱㹼㹁㹎
㹖㸳㹋 % % %& $ $
;0 3 3
0)
.5
.6 .5
;$ ;$
%/. 31.
- .0 <6
&21752/3$1(/ $ $
127(
0 0
;0 75 ;0
$3 <( <(
&3
.5 .0
;0
.6 ;0
=&
$3
&21752/%2; ;0
;$ &21752/%2;
81,7/$<287㸦)5217㸧
'& 㹄㹖㹔㹏㸳㸮㸮㹌㹗㸯
3D101521C
Wiring Diagrams
401
1.2.22 Clean Room Air Conditioner

FXBQ40/50/63PVE, FXBPQ63PVE
3D100642A
402 Part 7 Appendix

1.3 Air Treatment Equipment

1.3.1 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit
FXMQ125/200/250MFV1
C: 3D044996E
Part 7 Appendix 403

FXMQ80/140/200/250AFVM
3D134488C
404 Part 7 Appendix

1.3.2 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM Series)

VKM50/80/100GCVE
3D124873C
Part 7 Appendix 405

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
WIRING DIAGRAM
406
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
A2P (POWER SUPPLY BOARD)
C1 兟C2 CAPACITOR (M1F.M2F) POWER SUPPLY L N CONTROL BOX
C3 CAPACITOR (A2P) SINGLE PHASE
F1U FUSE(A1P)(T,10A,250V) 220-240/220V C1 A2P
F1UT 兟F2UT THERMAL FUSE凚M1F.M2F BUILT-IN) X1M
50/60Hz C2
INDICATOR LIGHT (MICROCOMPUTER
HAP NORMAL MONITOR GREEN)
K2R MAGNETIC RELAY(M1S)
K3R 兟K4R MAGNETIC RELAY
A1P
Wiring Diagrams
K6R 到K8R MAGNETIC RELAY(M1F)

R1T R2 T
K9R 到K11R MAGNETIC RELAY(M2F) X1M L N
M1S MOTOR (DAMPER)
t° t°
M1F MOTOR (AIR SUPPLY FAN)
WHT
RED
A1P
M2F MOTOR (AIR EXHAUST FAN)
TO CENTRAL REMOTE
PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A2P) X2 7 A CONTROLLER UNIT
RED X12 A X1 3 A X1 4 A X4 1 A X4 2 A X9 A X1 1 A (NOTE 2)
R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) F2
RED F1 U
R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) X1 M F1 WIRED REMOTE
A2P SS1 NOR. P1 P1
S1C LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER) X7 A CONTROLLER
HA P H P2 (OPTIONAL
SELECTOR SWITCH X1 7 A (N O T E 4)
SS1 M P2 ACCESSORIES)
(FOR ESPECIALLY USE)
X2 M J C
V1R DIODE BRIDGE =)
J3 INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
X101A,X102A RELAY CONNECTOR (M1F.M2F) J2
V1R (NOTE 3)
X1M TERMINAL (POWER SUPPLY) J1
C3 X8 A X3 M
X1M TERMINAL (CONTROL)(A1P) K8R K7R K6R K9R K10R K11R K2R X1
K3R EXTERNAL DAMPER (NOTE 5)
X2M TERMINAL (CONTROL)(A1P) X2 (LOCAL PROCUREMENT)
TERMINAL (CONTROL)(A1P) 36 FL 1 F M1 FH 1 FC 1 X6 1 A F C2 FH2 FM 2 FL 2 X3 A X3
X3M K4R OPERATING OUTPUT
X1 A X2 A X4
VAM150/250/350/500/650/800/1000HVE
Z1F NOISE FILTER X18 A

OPTIONAL CONNECTOR X5 A
WHT
WHT
X9A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTER) WHT
CONNECTOR (ADAPTER POWER RED
X11A SUPPLY)
MSW
RED
RED
CONNECTOR (CO2 SENSOR) BLK 1到
X14A
X41A CONNECTOR (HUMIDITY SENSOR) C1 C2 M1 S S1C
X42A CONNECTOR (HUMIDITY SENSOR)
NOTE:
WHT
BLU
YLW
YLW
ORG
BLU
BLK
RED
RED
WHT
BLK
ORG
X1 0 1 A X1 0 2 A 1) FIELD WIRING, TERMINAL BLOCK, TERMINAL,
, CONNECTOR, GROUNDING
BLK
BLU
BLK
RED
BLU
WHT
YLW
RED
YLW
ORG
ORG
WHT
2) IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT
M M IN ACCORDANCE WITH ATTACHED MANUAL.
㹼㹼 3) WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP OR ON/OFF
tࢎ tࢎ CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED.
(CONTACT THAT CAN ENSURE THE MINIMUM APPLICABLE LOAD OF DC12V, 1mA).
4) SS1 IS A SPECIAL USE SELECTOR SWITCH. THE UNIT NOT RUN IF THE SETTING
M1 F M2 F
IS CHANGED.
F1 U T F2 UT 5) IT IS DRIVEN SYNCHRONOUSLY WITH TOTAL HEAT E XCHANGE AND THE EXTERNAL
DAMPER OPEN AND CLOSE, FOR DETAILS REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL.
1.3.3 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM Series)
INSTALL THE HEAT EXCHANGES ELEMENT AND

HEAT EXCHANGE ELEMENT
FOR INSTALLATION & RELOCATION WORKER INSERT IT WITH THE SIDE FACING YOU.
INSTALLING THE AIR FILTER BY INSERTING THE AIR FILTER CONTROL BOX
IN POSITION SHOWN ON THE RIGHT WITH RESPECT TO
WARNING THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENT BOX.
FOR THE DETAILS, SEE THE OPERATION MANUAL.
INSTALL AN EARTH LEAKAGE BREAKER IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS TO PREVENT
ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND FIRE ACCIDENTS.
BE SURE TO PREFORM GROUNDING WORK.
AIR FILTER
ASK AN ELECTRICIAN FOR GROUNDING WORK AND EARTH LEAKAGE BREAKER FACILITIES.
DUCT LAYOUT PAY ATTENTION TO RESIDUAL VOLTAGE.

RA DO NOT TOUCH THE CHANGING PART UNTIL YOU CONFIRM THAT THE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IS DC50V OR LESS.
EA
㻝 TURN OFF THE POWER SUPPLY AND DO NOT OPEN THE LID OF THE ELECTRICAL BOX FOR 10 MINUTES.
OUTDOOR INDOOR
AFTER THAT, USE A TESTER TO CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY IS CUT OFF BETWEEN THE L AND N TERMINALS
SIDE SIDE 㻞 OF THE POWER TERMINAL BLOCK (X1M).
㻟 MEASURE THE PART (C+兟C-) IN THE FIGURE BELOW WI TH A TESTER SO THAT IT DOES NOT COME INTO
OA SA CONTACT WITH CHANGING PART AND CONFIRM THAT THE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IS DC50V OR LESS.
/ 1
㹁
FOR SERVICE MAINTAINANCE WORK 㹁
TESTER
WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK CAUTION
RESIDUAL
㹁 VOLTAGE
ALWAYS SHUT OFF ALL POWER SOURCES (INCLUDING REMOTE DISPLAY AND BOOSTER FAN ELECTRIC DAMPER MEASUREMENT
INTERLOCKING POWER SOURCES) DURING SERVICE INSPECTIONS AND CLEANING OF AIR FILTERS AND HEAT POINT
EXCHANGE ELEMENTS. IT MAY CAUSE ELECTRIC SHOCK IN THE CHANGING PART OR INJURY IN THE 㹁
FAN ROTATING PART.
(FOR THE POWER SUPPLY TO BE CONNECTED REFER TO THE TECHNICAL DATA AND INSTALLATION MANUAL OF
THE SEPARATELY SOLD ADAPTER).
3D134273-1 VAM 150/250/350/500/650/800/1000 HVE/HVLT

3D134273C
SiMT342301E
Part 7 Appendix
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
WIRING DIAGRAM
A2P (POWER SUPPLY BOARD) A3P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD POWER SUPPLY L N X3 A
A3P WHT N
(INTERFACE) SINGLE PHASE
R y1 R y2 Ry3 R y4 R y5 R y6
C1到C4 CAPACITOR (M1F到M4F) 220-240/220V RED
50/60Hz
C5 CAPACITOR凚A2P凛 L CONTROL BOX
F2U FL3 F M3 FH3 FC3 FC4 FH4 FM4 FL4
F1U FUSE(A1P)(T,10A,250V) X1 A X2 A
F2U FUSE (A3P) ( 㻮 , 10A, 250V)
SiMT342301E
C1 A2P
F1UT兟F2UT THERMAL FUSE凚M1F.M2F BUILT-IN)
Part 7 Appendix
C3 C4 C2
F3UT兟F4UT THERMAL FUSE (BUILT-IN M3F / M4F)
INDICATOR LIGHT (MICROCOMPUTER C3 A1P
HAP X1M
NORMAL MONITOR GREEN)
ORG
BLK
RED
BLK
BLU
WHT
BLU
RED
ORG
YLW
YLW
WHT
X1M L N C4
K2R兟K5R MAGNETIC RELAY(M1S兟M2S) X1 0 3 A X1 0 4 A
VAM1500/2000HVE
K3R兟K4R MAGNETIC RELAY
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
RED
RED
YLW
A3P
YLW
WHT
ORG
ORG
WHT
K6R到K8R MAGNETIC RELAY(M1F)
K9R到K11R M M
MAGNETIC RELAY(M2F) 㹼
㹼
M1F兟M3F MOTOR (AIR SUPPLY FAN) tࢎ tࢎ
M2F兟M4F MOTOR (AIR EXHAUST FAN)
M3F M4F
M1S兟M2S MOTOR (DAMPER) R1T R2T F4UT
F3UT
PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A2P)
R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) t° t°
RED
R2T TO CENTRAL REMOTE
WHT
THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR)
RED
A1P
RED CONTROLLER UNIT
Ry1到Ry3 MAGNETIC RELAY(M3F)
X2 7 A F2 (NOTE 2)
Ry4到Ry6 MAGNETIC RELAY(M4F) A2P
X12A X13A X14A X41A X42A X9A X11A X62A X16A
S1C兟S2C LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER) X1 7 A F1U X1 M F 1 WIRED REMOTE
P1 P1 CONTROLLER
SELECTOR SWITCH P2
SS1 (FOR ESPECIALLY USE) =) X7 A SS1 NOR. (OPTIONAL
P2 ACCESSORIES)
H
V1R DIODE BRIDGE (NOTE 4) X2 M J C
V1R M
X101A 到X104A RELAY CONNECTOR (M1F.M2F) J3 INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
X8 A K8R K7R K6R K9R K10R K11R K2R K5R J2 (NOTE 3)
X1M TERMINAL (POWER SUPPLY) C5
HAP J1
X1M TERMINAL (CONTROL)(A1P) X3 M
FL1 FM1 FH1 FC1 X6 1 A FC2 FH2 F M2 FL2 X3 A X4 A X1 EXTERNAL DAMPER (NOTE 5)
X2M TERMINAL (CONTROL)(A1P) K3R
X1 A X2 A X2 (LOCAL PROCUREMENT)
X3M TERMINAL (CONTROL)(A1P) PS
K4R X3
Z1F NOISE FILTER OPERATING OUTPUT
X1 8 A X4
WHT
WHT
WHT
WHT
OPTIONAL CONNECTOR
X5 A X6 A
X9A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTER) WHT MSW MSW
CONNECTOR (ADAPTER POWER 1到 1到
X11A RED
SUPPLY)
RED
RED
RED
RED
CONNECTOR (CO2 SENSOR) C1 C2 M1S M2S
X14A BLK S1C S2C
YLW
YLW
BLU
ORG
RED
ORG
BLK
BLU
WHT
WHT
RED
BLK
NOTE:
X1 0 1 A X1 0 2 A
1) FIELD WIRING, TERMINAL BLOCK, TERMINAL,
BLK
BLK
BLU
BLU
RED
YLW
RED
YLW
ORG
WHT
ORG
WHT
, CONNECTOR, GROUNDING.
M M 2) IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT
㹼㹼 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ATTACHED MANUAL.
tࢎ tࢎ 3) WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP OR ON/OFF
CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED.
M1F M2F (CONTACT THAT CAN ENSURE THE MINIMUM APPLICABLE LOAD OF DC12V, 1mA).
F1UT F2UT 4) SS1 IS A SPECIAL USE SELECTOR SWITCH. THE UNIT NOT RUN IF THE SETTING
IS CHANGED.
5) IT IS DRIVEN SYNCHRONOUSLY WITH TOTAL HEAT E XCHANGE AND THE EXTERNAL
DAMPER OPEN AND CLOSE, FOR DETAILS REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL.
UPPER UNIT HEAT EXCHANGE ELEMENT
FOR INSTALLATION & RELOCATION WORKER INSTALL THE HEAT EXCHANGES ELEMENT AND
INSERT IT WITH THE SIDE FACING YOU. CONTROL BOX
INSTALLING THE AIR FILTER BY INSERTING THE AIR FILTER
WARNING DUCT LAYOUT IN POSITION SHOWN ON THE RIGHT WITH RESPECT TO
THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENT BOX.
INSTALL AN EARTH LEAKAGE BREAKER IN E A R A FOR THE DETAILS, SEE THE OPERATION MANUAL.
ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS TO
PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND FIRE ACCIDENTS. OUTDOOR INDOOR
SIDE SIDE
BE SURE TO PREFORM GROUNDING WORK.
ASK AN ELECTRICIAN FOR GROUNDING O A S A
WORK AND EARTH LEAKAGE BREAKER FACILITIES. LOWER UNIT AIR FILTER
PAY ATTENTION TO THE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE. RESIDUAL
DO NOT TOUCH THE CHANGING PART UNTIL YOU VOLTAGE
㹁
FOR SERVICE MAINTENANCE WORK CONFIRM THAT THE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IS DC50V OR LESS. 㹁
MEASUREMENT
POINT
㻝 TURN OFF THE POWER SUPPLY AND DO NOT OPEN THE LID OF
WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK CAUTION THE ELECTRICAL BOX FOR 10 MINUTES.
ALWAYS SHUT OFF ALL POWER SOURCES (INCLUDING REMOTE DISPLAY AND 㻞 AFTER THAT, USE A TESTER TO CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY 㹁
BOOSTER FAN ELECTRIC DAMPER INTERLOCKING POWER SOURCES) DURING IS CUT OFF BETWEEN THE L AND N TERMINALS OF THE POWER TESTER
SERVICE INSPECTIONS AND CLEANING OF AIR FILTERS AND HEAT EXCHANGE ELEMENTS. TERMINAL BLOCK (X1M). / 1
IT MAY CAUSE ELECTRIC SHOCK IN THE CHANGING PART OR INJURY IN THE FAN MEASURE THE PART (C+兟C-) IN THE FIGURE BELOW WI TH A 㹁
ROTATING PART.
㻟
TESTER SO THAT IT DOES NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH
(FOR THE POWER SUPPLY CONNECTED REFER TO THE TECHNICAL DATA AND CHANGING PART AND CONFIRM THAT THE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE
INSTALLATION MANUAL OF THE SEPARATELY SOLD ADAPTER). IS DC50V OR LESS.
3D1342 41
3D134274-1 /
VAM 1500/2000 /
HVE/HVLT
3D134274B
Wiring Diagrams
407
Warning z Daikin products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the world. Prior to
purchase, please confirm with your local authorized importer, distributor and/or retailer whether this
product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for use, in the region where the product
will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict or modify the application of any local
legislation.
z Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
z Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorized parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
z Read the user's manual carefully before using this product. The user's manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any inquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
© All rights reserved

Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of March 2023 but subject to change without notice.
SiMT342301E
03/2023 AK.K

SiMT342301E RXYQ-BYM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SiMT342301E RXYQ-BYM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SiMT342301E RXYQ-BYM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SiMT342301E

Heat Pump 50/60 Hz

Part 1 General Information ............................................................ 8

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ............................................................. 39

Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................. 72

Part 4 Functions and Control ..................................................... 111

Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation .................................. 149

Part 6 Service Diagnosis ............................................................ 224

iii Table of Contents

2.5 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .......................................................................234

4.47 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................321

Part 7 Appendix .......................................................................... 372

1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the

Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting

Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when

In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes,

Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled

Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the

Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and

Do not damage or modify the power cable.

When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected

Check the earth / grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not

Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9

8 Part 1 General Information

YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz

1.1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

V1, V1A, V1C, V1CA, V36: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

Part 1 General Information 9

1.1.3 Air Treatment Equipment

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz

Heat Reclaim For New Zealand

VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

10 Part 1 General Information

YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz

Part 1 General Information 11

1.2.2 VRV Indoor Unit

Double flow 125

Slim duct FXDQ 20 25 32 40 50 63 — — — — — — — — — V1

High static 200 250

V1, V36: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

12 Part 1 General Information

1.2.3 Air Treatment Equipment

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz

VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz